chapter 3

TRIFLEXWindows Chapter 3

1

Table of Contents

TRIFLEXWindows User Manual

Introduction to TRIFLEXWindows .........................................................Chapter 1

Tutorial ......................................................................................................Chapter 2

CHAPTER 3 .......................................................................................................18

Creating a TRIFLEX Window Icon....................................................................18

3.1.1 Main Screen Layout ..........................................................................20

3.1.1.1 Main Menu 21

3.1.1.2 Component Toolbar 22

3.1.1.3 Graphic Toolbar 23

3.1.1.4 Thumbwheels on Screen including Zoom 25

3.1.1.5 Status Bar 27

3.1.2 Menus……………............................................................................28

3.1.2.1 File Menu 28

3.1.2.1.1 Open ..................................................................................30

3.1.2.1.2 Save As ..............................................................................31

3.1.2.1.3 Autosave ............................................................................31

3.1.2.2 Setup Menu 32

3.1.2.2.1 Input Units.........................................................................34

3.1.2.2.2 Graphic Preferences Sub Menu .........................................38

3.1.2.3 Components Menu 40

3.1.2.3.1 Component Control Menu.................................................42

3.1.2.3.2 Insert, Replace and Append Mode ....................................43

3.1.2.3.3 Edit Component Sub Menu ...............................................45

3.1.2.3.4 Set input Mode Sub Menu.................................................46

3.1.2.4 Edit Menu 47

3.1.2.5 Calculate Menu 49

3.1.2.5.1 Progress Bar Preferences ...................................................50


2

3.1.2.6 Output Window 52

3.1.2.7 Utilities Menu 54

3.1.2.7.1 Database Sub Menu...........................................................55

3.1.2.7.2 Import Files Sub Menu......................................................57

3.1.2.7.3 Export Files Sub Menu......................................................58

3.1.2.7.4 Points Distance ..................................................................60

3.1.2.7.5 Connectivity Log...............................................................63

3.1.2.7.6 Activator Check .................................................................63

3.1.2.7.7 WERCO.............................................................................66

3.1.2.7.8 AAAT Catalog...................................................................69

3.1.2.7.9 PSI Home Page ..................................................................70

3.1.2.8 Windows Menu 72

3.1.2.9 Help Menu 73

3.1.2.9.1 Using the Manual and Help Command .............................74

3.1.3 Input Spreadsheet ..............................................................................75

3.1.4 Accessing Data from Piping Model..................................................76

3.1.4.1 Using Color to Check the Input Parameters. 78

3.2 Component Dialog.....................................................................................81

3.2.1 Anchor…...........................................................................................81

3.2.1.1 Anchor Component, Type/Location Tab 81

3.2.1.2 Anchor Component, Pipe Properties, Material Selection 85

3.2.1.3 Anchor Component, Init. Mvts. and Rotations Tab 93

3.2.1.3.1 Anchor Component, Init. Mvts., X, Y, Z axes ..................93

3.2.1.3.2 Anchor Component, Init. Mvts. A, B, C axes ...................96

3.2.1.4 Anchor Component, Vessel Properties 99

3.2.1.5 Vessel Drawing Orientation 104

3.2.2 Pipe…..............................................................................................113

3.2.2.1 Coding Piping Data, Piping Data 113

3.2.2.2 Automatic placement of Multiple Node Points 117

3.2.2.3 Jacketed Pipe 119

3.2.3 Elbow or Bend ................................................................................129

3.2.3.1 Coding Elbow Data, Elbow Data Tab 129

3.2.4 Branch Connection..........................................................................135


3

3.2.4.1 Coding Branch Connection, Branch Connection Tab 135

3.2.5 Valves…..........................................................................................140

3.2.5.1 Coding Valve Data, Valve Data Tab 140

3.2.6 Flanges ............................................................................................147

3.2.6.1 Coding Flange Data, Flange Data Tab 147

3.2.6.2 Flange Loading Input Data Setup 153

3.2.7 Reducers..........................................................................................155

3.2.7.1 Coding Reducer Data, Reducer Data Tab 155

3.2.8 Rigid Joint and Structural Member .................................................159

3.2.8.1 Coding Joint Data Tab, Rigid Input 159

3.2.8.2 Coding Joint Tab, Flexible Input 164

3.2.9 Expansion Joint ...............................................................................171

3.2.9.1 Coding Expansion Joint, Expansion Joint Tab 171

3.2.9.2 Expansion Joint, Different Types 177

3.2.10 Release Element ............................................................................178

3.2.10.1 Coding Release Element, X, Y, Z coordinate axes 178

3.2.10.2 Coding Release Element, A,B,C coordinate axes 182

3.2.11 Pressure Relief Valve....................................................................185

3.2.11.1 Pressure Relief Valve DataTab 185

3.3 Common dialogs for all Component Types .............................................191

3.3.1 Pipe Properties Tab .........................................................................191

3.3.1.1 Rippling Property Changes (HOW TO RIPPLE) 194

3.3.2 Process Tab .....................................................................................196

3.3.3 Restraints Tab .................................................................................198

3.3.3.1 Restraints Tab, X, Y, Z coordinate system 203

3.3.3.2 Restraints Tab, L, N, G coordinate system 212

3.3.3.2 Restraints Tab, A, B, C coordinate system 216

3.3.3.3 Spring Hanger/Support 226

3.3.4 Wind Load and Uniform Load Tab ................................................228

3.3.4.1 Wind Loading, Specifying Wind Speed 228

3.3.4.2 Wind Loading, Pressure Force and Shape Factor 235

3.3.4.3 Wind Loading, Actual Load 239

3.3.4.4 Uniform Load 243


4

3.3.5 Soil Load Tab..................................................................................248

3.3.5.1 Overview of Soil Modeling 248

3.3.5.2 Understanding the Soil Load Tab 250

3.3.5.3 Soil/Pipe Interaction 257

3.3.5.4 Coding Underground Piping 265

3.3.6 Code Compliance Tabs ...................................................................287

3.3.6.0.1 Fatigue (An Option in Code Compliance)......................287

3.3.6.1 ASME B31.1 Code Compliance 288





3.3.6.6 U.S Navy General Specifications for Ships, Section 505 299

3.3.6.7 ASME Section III, Division I (Subsection NC) – Class 2 301

3.3.6.8 ASME Section III, Division I (Subsection ND) – Class 3 303

3.3.6.9 SPC1 - Swedish Piping Code (Method 1, Section 9.4) 305

3.3.6.10 SPC2 - Swedish Piping Code (Method 2, Section 9.5) 307

3.3.6.11 TBK5-6 - Norwegian General Rules for Piping System (Annex D- Alternative Method) 310

3.3.6.12 TBK5-6 - Norwegian General Rules for Piping System (Section 10.5) 312

3.3.6.13 DNV - DnV Rules for Submarine Piping System (1981 Edition)….. 315

3.3.6.14 DNV - Submarine Pipeline System -DnV, 1996 Edition 317

3.3.6.15 DNV - Offshore Standard OSF-101 Submarine Pipeline System - DnV, 2000 Edition 319

3.3.6.16 Polska Norma PN-79 / M-34033 321

3.3.6.17 SNIP 2.05-06-95 FSU Transmission Piping Code 326

3.3.6.18 BS7159 Glass Reinforced Plastic Piping Code 329

3.3.6.19 BS8010 British Standard Piping Code 337

3.3.6.20 UKOOA -UK Offshore Operator Association 339

3.3.6.21 NPD Guidelines for Submarine Pipelines and Risers 347

3.3.6.22 Statoil Design, Specifications Offshore Pipeline Systems 349

3.3.6.23 EURO CODE European Standard prEN 13480-3 351


5

3.4 General Setup Dialogs .............................................................................353

3.4.1 Modeling Default ............................................................................353

3.4.2 Setup Input/Output English units ....................................................356

3.4.3 Setup Modeling Defaults ................................................................358

3.4.4 Setup Case Definition Data.............................................................364

3.4.5 Occasional Loading Data ................................................................382

3.4.6 Modal Analysis ...............................................................................384

3.4.7 Response Spectrum Analysis ..........................................................384

3.4.8 Time History Analysis ....................................................................384

3.4.9 Configure Graphics Colors .............................................................386

3.4.10 Graphic Preferences ......................................................................388

3.4.11 Save Graphic Setting.....................................................................390

3.4.12 Restore Setting ..............................................................................390

3.5 Importing Interfaces .................................................................................391

3.5.1 Import TRIFLEX® DOS .................................................................396

3.5.2 Import a TRIFLEX keyword file ....................................................398

3.5.3 Import SpreadSheet Input ...............................................................399

3.5.4 Import a Global Positioning system (GPS) file ..............................403

3.5.5 Import a Plant-4D and ALIAS Input File .......................................412

3.5.6 Import CADPipe Input File ............................................................416

3.5.7 Import CALMA V Input File.........................................................419

3.5.8 Import CATIA IV, STEP AP 227 ..................................................422

3.5.9 Import an Intergraph PDS Neutral File into TRIFLEX®Windows.435

3.5.9.1 Generating a Stress Neutral File for PDS 444

3.6 Export Interfaces......................................................................................448

3.6.1 Export a TRIFLEX Keyword file ...................................................450

3.6.2 Export an isoOUT file.....................................................................451

3.6.3 Export a 3D DXF file ......................................................................452

3.6.4 Export a JPEG file...........................................................................456

3.6.5 Export a BITMAP file ....................................................................458

3.6.6 Export a HPGL file .........................................................................460

3.6.7 Export a PostScript file ...................................................................461

3.6.8 Export a SpreadSheet......................................................................462


6

3.6.8.1 Export to Excel 462

3.6.8.2 Export to TXT File 465

3.7 Data Bases................................................................................................468

3.7.1 Generic Pipe Database ....................................................................468

3.7.2 Flange Database ..............................................................................470

3.7.3 Valve Data Base..............................................................................472

3.7.3.1 Build your Companies Valve Database 472

3.7.4 Pressure Relief Valve Database ......................................................475

3.7.5 Structural Steel Data Base (Joint) ...................................................478

3.7.6 Pipe Material Database ...................................................................485

3.7.7 Insulation Database .........................................................................487

3.7.8 Fiberglass Pipe Material .................................................................488

3.8 Graphic Manipulation..............................................................................490

3.9 Run TRIFLEX .........................................................................................491

3.9.1 View Run Output ............................................................................494

3.10 Printing...................................................................................................500

3.10.1 Output & View Analysis Results ..................................................500

3.10.1.1 Printing Output Reports (as SpreadSheet) .................................501

3.10.2 Piping Code Report .......................................................................504

3.10.3 Spring Hanger Report ...................................................................505

3.10.4 Color Mapped Graphic Display....................................................506

3.10.4.2 Printing Graphics Output 510

3.10.4.2.1 Printer ............................................................................510

3.10.4.2.2 Graphics Output Print Setup ..........................................511

3.10.5 Preview Reports ............................................................................513

3.10.6 Print Reports .................................................................................515

APPENDIX A- TRIFLEX Windows Command and Shortcut Keys .............518

TRIFLEXWindows Theory Manual


7

Data.Preparation…………………………………………..……Chapter 4

Use.of.Restraints……………………………………..………....Chapter 5

Outputs ......................................................................................................Chapter 6

Rotating Equipment Compliance Reports .................................................Chapter 7

TriflexWindows Piping Code Compliance Reports .............................Chapter 8

TriflexWindows Dynamic Capabilities ...................................................Chapter 9

Related Engineering Data ..........................................................................Appendix

List of Figures Figure 3.1.0-1 Demo IU1.dta Example............................................................................. 19

Figure 3.1.1-1 Main Screen Layout .................................................................................. 20

Figure 3.1.1.1-1 Main Menu ............................................................................................. 21

Figure 3.1.1.2-1 Component Toolbar ............................................................................... 22

Figure 3.1.1.3-1 Graphic Toolbar ..................................................................................... 23

Figure 3.1.1.3-2 Manipulation Toolbar............................................................................. 24

Figure 3.1.1.3-3 Status Bar ............................................................................................... 24

Figure 3.1.1.4-1 Demo IU1.dta Example.......................................................................... 25

Figure 3.1.1.5-1 Status Bar ............................................................................................... 27

Figure 3.1.2.1-1 File Menu ............................................................................................... 28

Figure 3.1.2.1.1-1 Open TRIFLEXWindows Project File.............................................. 30

Figure 3.1.2.1.2-1 Save As................................................................................................ 31

Figure 3.1.2.1.3-1 Autosave Default dialog...................................................................... 31

Figure 3.1.2.2-1 Setup Menu ............................................................................................ 32

Figure 3.1.2.2.1-1 Input Units........................................................................................... 34






Figure 3.1.2.2.2-1 Graphic Preferences Sub Menu........................................................... 38


8

Figure 3.1.2.3-1 Components Menu ................................................................................. 40

Figure 3.1.2.3.1-1 Components Control Menu ................................................................. 42

Figure 3.1.2.3.3-1 Edit Components Sub Menu ............................................................... 45

Figure 3.1.2.3.4-1 Set Input Mode Sub Menu .................................................................. 46

Figure 3.1.2.4-1 Edit Menu............................................................................................... 47

Figure 3.1.2.5-1 Calculate Menu ...................................................................................... 49

Figure 3.1.2.5.1-1 Progress Bar Preferences..................................................................... 50

Figure 3.1.2.5.1-2 Calculation Progress Log Display Preferences ................................... 50

Figure 3.1.2.6-1 Output Window...................................................................................... 52

Figure 3.1.2.7-1 Utilities Menu......................................................................................... 54

Figure 3.1.2.7.1-1 Databases Sub Menu ........................................................................... 55

Figure 3.1.2.7.2-1 Import Files Sub Menu........................................................................ 57

Figure 3.1.2.7.3-1 Export Files Sub Menu........................................................................ 58

Figure 3.1.2.7.4-1 Points Distance dialog box.................................................................. 60

Figure 3.1.2.7.4-2 Example Points Distance..................................................................... 61



Figure 3.1.2.7.5-1 Connectivity Log................................................................................. 63

Figure 3.1.2.7.6-1 Activator Check .................................................................................. 63

Figure 3.1.2.7.7-1 WERCO screen................................................................................... 66

Figure 3.1.2.7.7-2 WERCO example “test1”.................................................................... 67

Figure 3.1.2.7.7-3 WERCO example “test1M” (metric) .................................................. 67

Figure 3.1.2.7.8-1 AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. screen................................ 69

Figure 3.1.2.7.9-1 PSI home page screen ......................................................................... 70

Figure 3.1.2.7.9-2 PSI, TRIFLEX Samples screen, start.................................................. 71

Figure 3.1.2.7.9-3 PSI, TRIFLEX Samples screen, end ................................................... 71

Figure 3.1.2.8-1 Windows Menu ...................................................................................... 72

Figure 3.1.2.9-1 Help Menu.............................................................................................. 73

Figure 3.1.3.0-1 Input Spreadsheet ................................................................................... 75

Figure 3.1.4-1 Viewing Anchor Component Properties ................................................... 76

Figure 3.1.4-2 Worksheet.................................................................................................. 76

Figure 3.1.4.1-1 Color, Process Temperature ................................................................... 78

Figure 3.1.4.1-2 Color, Process Temperature ................................................................... 79


9

Figure 3.1.4.1-3 Color, Base Temperature ....................................................................... 79

Figure 3.1.4.1-4 Color, Nominal Diameter ....................................................................... 80

Figure 3.1.4.1-5 Color, Wind Load................................................................................... 80

Figure 3.2.1.0-1 Anchor Components, All Tabs............................................................... 81

Figure 3.2.1.2-1 Anchor Dialog, Pipe Properties Screen.................................................. 85

Figure 3.2.1.2-2 Pipe Material Database, Selection of Materials ..................................... 86

Figure 3.2.1.2-3 Pipe Material Database, Selection of Materials ..................................... 86

Figure 3.2.1.2-4 Anchor Dialog, Selection of Materials................................................... 87

Figure 3.2.1.2-5 Table of Materials .................................................................................. 89

Figure 3.2.1.2-6 Table of Insulation Materials ................................................................. 91

Figure 3.2.1.3.1-1 Node 1000, Anchor Dialog, Initial Mvt, X. Y. Z axes........................ 93

Figure 3.2.1.3.2-1 Node 1000, Anchor Dialog, Initial Mvt. A, B, C axes........................ 96

Figure 3.2.1.4-1 Setup Case Definition ............................................................................ 99

Figure 3.2.1.5-1 Example One ........................................................................................ 105

Figure 3.2.1.5-2 Description of Counter Clockwise Orientation.................................... 105



Figure 3.2.1.5-5 Example Two ....................................................................................... 108




Figure 3.2.1.5-16 Example Three ................................................................................... 111



Figure 3.2.2.0-1 Anchor Component, Pipe Properties Tab............................................. 113

Figure 3.2.2.2-1 Automatic placement of Multiple Node Pts. ........................................ 117

Figure 3.2.2.3-1 Jacketed Steam Line, Core 4”, Jacket 6” ............................................ 119








10



Figure 3.2.2.3-10 Jacketed Steam Line, Core 4”, Jacket 6” .......................................... 124








Figure 3.2.2.4-1 Release element for Jacketed Pipe ...................................................... 128

Figure 3.2.3.0-1 Coding Elbow Data, Elbow data Tab................................................... 129

Figure 3.2.4.0-1 Coding Branch Connection, Branch Connection Tab ......................... 135

Figure 3.2.5.0-1 Coding Valve Data, Valve Data Tab.................................................... 140

Figure 3.2.6.0-1 Coding Flange Data, Flange Data Tab ................................................. 147

Figure 3.2.6.1-1 Flange Data Tab, Rupture Disk Holder................................................ 152

Figure 3.2.6.2-1 Flange Loading Input Data Setup ........................................................ 153

Figure 3.2.6.2-2 Flange Loading Input Data Setup ........................................................ 153

Figure 3.2.7.0-1 Coding Reducer Data, Reducer Data Tab ............................................ 155

Figure3.2.8.0-1 Coding Joint Data, Rigid Input ............................................................. 159

Figure3.2.8.2-1 Coding Joint Data, Flexible Input ......................................................... 164

Figure 3.2.8.2-2 Structural Steel Coordinate Axes ......................................................... 167



Figure 3.2.8.2-5 Structural “Effective Shear Area”........................................................ 169

Figure 3.2.9.0-1 Coding Expansion Joint, Expansion Joint Tab .................................... 171

Figure 3.2.10.0-1 Coding Joint Data, Joint Data Table .................................................. 178

Figure 3.2.10.2-1 Coding Joint Data, Joint Data Table .................................................. 182

Figure 3.2.10.2-2 Coding Joint Data, Longitudinal Direction Calculator ...................... 184

Figure 3.2.11-1 Coding Pressure Relief Valve, Pressure Relief Valve Tab ................... 185

Figure 3.3.1-1 Anchor Component, Pipe Properties Tab................................................ 191

Figure 3.3.1.1-1 Pipe Properties Tab, Ripple .................................................................. 194

Figure 3.3.1.1-2 Pipe Properties Tab, Ripple .................................................................. 194


11

Figure 3.3.2.0-1 Anchor Component, Process Tab......................................................... 196

Figure 3.3.3.0-1 Restraint Tab for General Pipe Support or Restraint ........................... 198

Figure 3.3.3.0-3 XYZ and ABC Coordinate Systems .................................................... 201

Figure 3.3.3.1-1 X,Y,Z coordinate system Pipe Support or Restraint ............................ 203

Figure 3.3.3.1-2 X,Y,Z coordinate system Restraint Tab ............................................... 203

Figure 3.3.3.2-1 L,N,G coordinate system Pipe Support or Restraint ............................ 212

Figure 3.3.3.2-2 L,N,G coordinate system Restraint Tab ............................................... 212

Figure 3.3.3.3-1 A, B, C coordinate system Pipe Support or Restraint .......................... 216

Figure 3.3.3.3-2 A,B,C coordinate system Restraint Tab ............................................... 216

Figure 3.3.3.3-1 Springs - Restraints Tab, Size a Spring Hanger................................... 226

Figure 3.3.4.0-1 Anchor Component, Wind Load Tab................................................... 228

Figure 3.3.4.1-1 Wind Load Tab, X axis, Specifying Wind Speed ................................ 228

Figure 3.3.4.1-2 Wind Load Tab, Z axis, Specifying Wind Speed................................. 229

Figure 3.3.4.1-3 Wind Loads for the Z plane of action .................................................. 231


Figure 3.3.4.1-5 Winds Loads along the X plane ........................................................... 233

Figure 3.3.4.1-6 Wind Loads along the Z plane ............................................................. 234

Figure 3.3.4.2-1 Wind Load Tab, X axis, Pressure Force and Shape Factor.................. 235

Figure 3.3.4.2-2 Wind Load Tab, Z axis, Pressure Force and Shape Factor .................. 235





Figure 3.3.4.3-1 Wind Load Tab, X axis, Actual Load .................................................. 239

Figure 3.3.4.3-2 Wind Load Tab, Z axis, Actual Load................................................... 239





Figure 3.3.4.4-1 Uniform Load Tab, X axis ................................................................... 243

Figure 3.3.4.4-2 Uniform Load Tab, Z axis.................................................................... 243




12



Figure 3.3.5.0-1 Anchor Component, Soil Loads Tab.................................................... 248

Figure 3.3.5.2-1 Soil Loads Tab (Use method in ASME B31.1- 2001) ......................... 250

Figure 3.3.5.2-2 Soil Loads Tab (User Defined Loads and Stiffness)............................ 251

Figure 3.3.5.2-3 Soil Loads Tab (Use method in ASME B31.1 - 2001) ........................ 252

Figure 3.3.5.2-4 Soil Loads Tab (User Defined Loads and Stiffness)............................ 254

Figure 3.3.5.2-5 Movement ............................................................................................ 255

Figure 3.3.5.3-1 Soil Displacement Curve ...................................................................... 258



Figure 3.3.5.4-1 Anchor Data, Type/Location Tab ........................................................ 265

Figure 3.3.5.4-2 First Anchor, Pipe Properties Tab ........................................................ 266

Figure 3.3.5.4-3 First Anchor, Process Tab .................................................................... 266

Figure 3.3.5.4-4 First Anchor, Initial Mvt/Rots Tab....................................................... 267

Figure 3.3.5.4-5 First Anchor, Wind/Uniform Tab ........................................................ 267

Figure 3.3.5.4-6 First Anchor, Soil Loads Tab ............................................................... 268

Figure 3.3.5.4-7 Soil Loads Tab ..................................................................................... 269



Figure 3.3.5.4-10 Soil Loads Tab ................................................................................... 270





Figure 3.3.5.4-15 Elbow Data Tab, Node Point 10 to 100 ............................................. 275

Figure 3.3.5.4-16 Pipe Data Tab, Node Point 100 to 200............................................... 276


Figure 3.3.5.4-18 Elbow Data Tab, Node Point 300 to 400 ........................................... 278



Figure 3.3.5.4-21 Input Spreadsheet, Previously Coded Model..................................... 280

Figure 3.3.5.4-22 Output, View Analysis Results, Restraint Description...................... 281


13

Figure 3.3.5.4-23 Output, View Analysis Results, Axial Descriptions .......................... 282

Figure 3.3.5.4-24 Output, View Analysis Results, Restraint Forces & Moments .......... 283

Figure 3.3.5.4-25 Piping System Model, Node points 10 to 300.................................... 285



Figure 3.3.6.1-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, B31.1 ............................ 288

Figure 3.3.6.2-1 Anchor component, code compliance Tab, B31.3 ............................... 290




Figure 3.3.6.6-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, US Navy ....................... 299

Figure 3.3.6.7-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, Class 2 .......................... 301

Figure 3.3.6.8-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, Class 3 .......................... 303

Figure 3.3.6.9-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, SPC1 ............................. 305

Figure 3.3.6.10-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, SPC2 ........................... 307

Figure 3.3.6.11-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, TBK, 56 ...................... 310

Figure 3.3.6.12-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, TBK 5-6 Method 2 ..... 312

Figure 3.3.6.13-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, DNV 1981 .................. 315



Figure 3.3.6.16-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, Polska Norma ............. 321

Figure 3.3.6.17-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, Russian SNIP.............. 326

Figure 3.3.6.18-1 – Modeling Default, FRP ................................................................... 329

Figure 3.3.6.18-2 - Anchor Component, Pipe Properties Tab, FRP ............................... 331

Figure 3.3.6.18-3 - Anchor Component, Process Tab, FRP ........................................... 332

Figure 3.3.6.18-4 - Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, FRP........................... 335

Figure 3.3.6.19-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, BS 8010 ...................... 337

Figure 3.3.6.20-1 – Modeling Default, FRP ................................................................... 339

Figure 3.3.6.20-2 - Anchor Component, Pipe Properties Tab, FRP ............................... 341

Figure 3.3.6.20-3 - Anchor Component, Process Tab, FRP ........................................... 342

Figure 3.3.6.20-4 - Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, FRP........................... 345

Figure 3.3.6.21-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, NPD............................ 347

Figure 3.3.6.22-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, STOL.......................... 349


14

Figure 3.3.6.23-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, EUROCODE .............. 351

Figure 3.4.1-1 Main Screen – Setup Options.................................................................. 353

Figure 3.4.1-2 Project Data ............................................................................................. 354

Figure 3.4.2.0-1 Input English Units .............................................................................. 356

Figure 3.4.2.0-2 Output English Units ............................................................................ 356

Figure 3.4.3.0-1 Main Screen – Setup Options............................................................... 358

Figure 3.4.3.0-2 Spring Hanger Manufacturers .............................................................. 361

Figure 3.4.4.0-1 Setup Case Definition .......................................................................... 364

Figure 3.4.5.0-1 Setup Occasional Loading Data ........................................................... 382

Figure 3.4.6.0-1 Dynamic Data Entry............................................................................. 384

Figure 3.4.9.0-1 Configure Graphics Colors .................................................................. 386

Figure 3.4.9.0-2 Background Color Selection ................................................................ 387

Figure 3.4.10.0-1 Graphic Preferences ........................................................................... 388



Figure 3.5.0-1 Importing Interfaces ................................................................................ 393

Figure 3.5.1-1 Display of an Imported Model ................................................................ 397

Figure 3.5.3-1 Importing Spreadsheet Input ................................................................... 399






Figure 3.5.4-1 Surveyor G.P.S. tabulated information. ................................................. 403

Figure 3.5.4-2 EXCEL Spreadsheet converted information. ......................................... 404

Figure 3.5.4-3 TRIFLEX Import Screen........................................................................ 405

Figure 3.5.4-4 TRIFLEX Spreadsheet Import Screen ................................................... 405

Figure 3.5.4-5 EXCEL Spreadsheet............................................................................... 406

Figure 3.5.4-6 TRIFLEX Spreadsheet Input .................................................................. 407

Figure 3.5.4-7 TRIFLEX piping model ......................................................................... 407

Figure 3.5.4-8 Surveyor G.P.S. tabulated information. ................................................. 408

Figure 3.5.4-9 TRIFLEX Anchor screen....................................................................... 409

Figure 3.5.4-10 TRIFLEX Restraint screen................................................................... 409


15

Figure 3.5.4-11 TRIFLEX Process screen..................................................................... 410

Figure 3.5.4-12 TRIFLEX Soils Loads screen .............................................................. 410

Figure 3.5.4-13 TRIFLEX Piping model....................................................................... 411

Figure 3.5.4-14 TRIFLEX Report Output screen.......................................................... 411

Figure 3.5.5-1 Importing Plant4D................................................................................... 414

Figure 3.5.6-1 Importing CADPipe ................................................................................ 418

Figure 3.5.7-1 Importing CALMA ................................................................................. 421

Figure 3.5.8-1 STEP Converter Main Dialog................................................................. 422

Figure 3.5.8-2 Selection of CATIA STEP File ............................................................. 423

Figure 3.5.8-3 Selection of TRIFLEX *.IN File............................................................. 423

Figure 3.5.8-4 TRIFLEX Import Dialog......................................................................... 424

Figure 3.5.9-1 PDS Import.............................................................................................. 435



Figure 3.6.0-1 Exporting Interfaces ................................................................................ 448

Figure 3.6.1-1 TRIFLEX Keyword Export..................................................................... 450

Figure 3.6.2-1 Export a isoOut file ................................................................................. 451

Figure 3.6.3-1 Export a 3D dxf file screen ..................................................................... 452




Figure 3.6.3-5 Check the color of each Layer in AutoCAD........................................... 454

Figure 3.6.3-6 Make sure all Layers in AutoCAD are Black or 250. ............................. 454


Figure 3.6.4-1 Export a JPEG file screen ....................................................................... 456

Figure 3.6.4-2 Export a JPEG file screen ....................................................................... 457

Figure 3.6.5-1 Export a Bitmap file screen..................................................................... 458

Figure 3.6.5-2 Export a Bitmap file screen..................................................................... 459

Figure 3.6.6-1 Export a HPGL file screen...................................................................... 460

Figure 3.6.7-1 Export a PostScript file screen................................................................ 461

Figure 3.6.8-1 Export a Spreadsheet screen.................................................................... 462




16

Figure 3.6.8-4 Export a SpreadSheet screen................................................................... 464

Figure 3.6.8.2-1 Export a SpreadSheet screen................................................................ 465




Figure 3.7.1-1 Pipe Database .......................................................................................... 468

Figure 3.7.2-1 Flange Database ...................................................................................... 470

Figure 3.7.2-2 Flange Database ...................................................................................... 470

Figure 3.7.3.0-1 Valve Database..................................................................................... 472

Figure 3.7.3.1-1 Valve Database..................................................................................... 472

Figure 3.7.4-1 Pressure Relief Valve Database .............................................................. 475

Figure 3.7.4-2 Pressure Relief Valve Database .............................................................. 475

Figure3.7.5-1 Structural Steel Database, User Defined .................................................. 478

Figure 3.7.5-2 Structural Steel Database ........................................................................ 480








Figure 3.7.5-10 Structural Steel Database ...................................................................... 484

Figure 3.7.6-1 Material Database.................................................................................... 485

Figure 3.7.7-1 Insulation Database ................................................................................. 487

Figure 3.7.8-1 Fiberglass Pipe Material Database ......................................................... 488

Figure 3.9.0-1 Main Screen, Calculate Pull-Down Menu .............................................. 491

Figure 3.9.0-2 Main Screen, Calculation Ready/Stop Icon ............................................ 492

Figure 3.9.0-3 Main Screen, Calculation Complete ....................................................... 492

Figure 3.9.1-1 Output Pull-Down Menus ....................................................................... 494

Figure 3.9.1-2 Output Report, View results.................................................................... 494

Figure 3.9.1-3 Output Report, Type Report Selector...................................................... 495

Figure 3.9.1-4 Output Code Compliance Report ............................................................ 496

Figure 3.9.1-5 Output Display Icon................................................................................ 497


17

Figure 3.9.1-6 Output Display Dialog ............................................................................ 498

Figure 3.9.1-7 Output Display Deformed Graphics........................................................ 498

Figure 3.10.1.1-1 Output, View Analysis Results .......................................................... 501

Figure 3.10.1.1-2 View, Full Report ............................................................................... 501

Figure 3.10.1.1-3 File, Print ............................................................................................ 502

Figure 3.10.1.1-4 Print, Full Report................................................................................ 502

Figure 3.10.1.1-5 Print, print Options ............................................................................. 503

Figure 3.10.1.1-6 Print, Printer Selection ....................................................................... 503

Figure 3.10.2-1 Piping Code Report ............................................................................... 504

Figure 3.10.3-1 Spring Hanger Report ........................................................................... 505

Figure 3.10.4-1 Graphics Display Control...................................................................... 506

Figure 3.10.4-2 Graphics Display................................................................................... 508

Figure 3.10.4-3 Graphics Display with Show Color Scale ............................................. 508

Figure 3.10.4-4 Graphics Output Print Setup ................................................................. 509

Figure 3.10.4.2.1-1 Printer Setup .................................................................................... 510

Figure 3.10.4.2.2-1 Graphics Output Print Setup ........................................................... 511

Figure 3.10.5-1 Print Report ........................................................................................... 513

Figure 3.10.5-2 Report Print Menu................................................................................. 514

Figure 3.10.6-1 Printing Options .................................................................................... 515

Figure 3.10.6-2 Printing Options .................................................................................... 516


18

CHAPTER 3

Note: Whenever you read TRIFLEX or TRIFLEXWindows throughout all User manuals remember it means TRIFLEXWindows. TRIFLEX is a registration mark of TRIFLEX registering the software to PipingSolutions, Inc.

Creating a TRIFLEX Window Icon

There are several ways to create a TRIFLEX Windows Icon on your desktop, is to do the following:

1. Click on the START button in the lower left corner of your screen.

2. Click on Programs .

3. Follow your Programs path on the screen until you find TRIFLEXWindows

4. Right click on the TRIFLEXWindows file name

5. Highlight Create Shortcut and left click

6. Drag your shortcut to your desktop.

7. Rename the shortcut to what you want to identify TRIFLEX. A suggestion is to add the Revision Number of TRIFLEX in the shortcut name.

OR

To create a TRIFLEX Windows Icon on your desktop, do the following:

1. Click on the START button in the lower left corner of your screen.

2. Highlight Find or Search and click on Files or Folders .

3. Enter TriflexWindows.exe in the Named field; select all hard drives in the Look in field and click on Find Now. The default path is:

C:\Program Files\PipingSolutions\TriflexWindows

4. Right click on the TriflexWindows.exe file name

5. Highlight Create Shortcut and left click


19

6. Click YES to respond to the Windows Message to place the TRIFLEX Windows Icon on the desktop.

To execute TRIFLEX Windows,

1. Double click on the TRIFLEX Windows Icon on the desktop.

2. To open an Existing Piping Model, click on FILE

3. Select File and OPEN.

4. From the path

(c:\ProgramFiles\PipingSolutions\TriflexWindows \Samples\Tutorial01),

5. open Tutorial01.DTA file.

Figure 3.1.0-1 Demo IU1.dta Example


20

3.1.1 Main Screen Layout

When TRIFLEX is first brought up, the TRIFLEX introduction screen as shown in Figure 3.1.1-1 appears.

Figure 3.1.1-1 Main Screen Layout

Thumb-wheels: The window also includes three thumb-wheels labeled Rotx, Roty, and Zoom.

The Component toolbar buttons are the same as the components listed at the bottom of the Components pop-up menu. To create a component, click on one of the component buttons or select and click on Component on the Main menu, and then highlight the component you wish and click on it.

Main Menu Main Toolbar Component Toolbar

Graphics Toolbar

Manipulation Toolbar

Rot X

Rot Y

Zoom

Status Bar


21

3.1.1.1 Main Menu

Figure 3.1.1.1-1 Main Menu

(Left to Right)

1. New – Opens a new project File

2. Open – Opens a previously saved project file

3. Save – Saves the active file

4. Cut – Cuts the selected piping components

5. Copy – Copies the selected piping components

6. Paste - Pastes what has previously been copied or cut

7. Print – Prints the current screen

8. About Triflex – Displays window giving version information for Triflex as well as contact information of Piping Solutions, Inc.

9. Help Cursor – Allows the user to click upon an item, which results in the help system explaining that item’s function

10. Worksheet Toggle - the User can add or view components as well as edit, move, replace, insert and append components in the worksheet format

11. Preview Report - This control enables the User to preview reports in a reduced image.

12. Print Reports - This control enables the User to print reports.

13. Select Output Graphics Display - This control brings up a dialog that allows the User to select which aspect of the output is to be exhibited in the graphics view.

14. Show Output Color Scale - This control displays a scale that shows the correspondence between color and the numerical value with which it is associated

15. Response Spectrum Analysis - This dialog allows the User to display and perform response spectrum data for the current piping system.

16. Time History Analysis - This dialog allows the User to define data required for analysis and calculation.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18


22

17. Start Calculator - This command enables the User to start the calculation of system stresses and displacements.

18. Load Cases - Allows the user to select which Load Cases that were applied in the calculation. Used to select report after calculation occurs.

3.1.1.2 Component Toolbar

Figure 3.1.1.2-1 Component Toolbar

-Anchor Component

-Pipe Component

-Elbow Component

-Branch Connection

-Valve

-Flange

-Reducer

-Joint

-Expansion Joint

-Release Element

-Pressure Relief Valve


23

3.1.1.3 Graphic Toolbar

Figure 3.1.1.3-1 Graphic Toolbar

-Select/View – Arrow used to point at a component and select it / Hand used to move or rotate the piping model

-Add View – Allows User to define a view of the piping model as the default view

-Recall View – Brings default view on screen

-Toggle Axis – Draws X, Y, Z-axis - size and position can be changed (on/off)

-Zoom Point – Brings User specified point in the piping model closer

-Line/Render – Line or 3D shapes –component colors can be changed (on/off)

-Node Labels – Node number on model – font size can be changed (on/off)

-Freeze Graphics-enables the User to input data and utilize faster edit features for large systems (on/off)

-Show Selected Components- displays components that have been selected. (on/off)

-View All - Brings entire piping model into view on screen

-Ortho/Perspective – Right angle view or panorama view

-Orient View-allows the User to orient the view by selecting one of several options

-Isometric View- shows an isometrics display of a piping system to the User

-Zoom Point- Zooms in on a particular point of selection

-Box Zoom- Zooms in upon a selected box


24

Figure 3.1.1.3-2 Manipulation Toolbar

Figure 3.1.1.3-3 Status Bar

Status bar Indicators

This is located on the bottom view of the normal TRIFLEX screen.

Edit current component

Previous component

Next component

First component

Last component

Insert ahead

Replace current

Append following

Status Bar

Manipulation Toolbox


25

3.1.1.4 Thumbwheels on Screen including Zoom

Figure 3.1.1.4-1 Demo IU1.dta Example RotX - This dial allows the User to rotate the graphic representation of the piping model about a screen-oriented horizontal axis, extending from the specified object center to the right hand side of the viewable windows. RotY - This dial allows the User to rotate the graphic representation of the piping model about a screen-oriented vertical axis, extending from the specified object center to the top of the viewable windows.

Zoom – allows the user to alter the percentage of zoom upon the piping system.

Note: +y axis is always up (vertical) in a piping model in TRIFLEX.

Other Graphical Commands

In Graphic Mode

Pan – When in graphic mode, that displays the hand shaped cursor as opposed to the selective mode arrow, press SHIFT + LEFT CLICK to move the graphic.

Or if you have a three button or thumbwheel mouse hold down the middle button or thumbwheel, RIGHT CLICK and MOVE.

Rot X

Rot Y

Zoom


26

Rotate – In manipulative mode, simply LEFT CLICK and DRAG the object at the angle and speed that the user wishes the object to rotate.

In Select Mode

Set Current Component - To set the current component when in selective mode, LEFT CLICK on the component that is to be current.

Selecting/ Deselecting Current Components - To select or deselect a current components on the graphically displayed piping system, press CTRL + LEFT CLICK.


27

3.1.1.5 Status Bar

Figure 3.1.1.5-1 Status Bar

(Left to Right)

1. For Help, press F1 – instructions.

2. Input Mode or Results Ready – type of Mode you are in.

3. Blank Box

When a piping model has been created or loaded, the following two items will appear:

4. 0 CPBD – Refers to number of components in the “Clipboard”.

5. 1 SEL or 0 SEL – Refers to One or Zero components selected.

6. APP - Refers to Append Mode as opposed to INS (Insert) Mode.

7. 1 A CURR – Current component is No. 1

3B CURR- Current Component is No. 3 and is a Branch from node 1010 to 1020.

8. 1 TOT or 12 TOT- Refers to the piping model having a total of 1 or 12 Components.

EMPTY – Appears when a piping model has not yet been created or loaded.

9. 5 or 1000 – Refers to Node Point 5 or 1000 being the current Node Point.

10. NOSYS - Appears when a piping model has not been created or loaded

When a piping model has been created or loaded, the following two items will appear to indicate the status of the geometry of the system:

OK- indicates that there is no geometry error.

ERR – indicates that there is a geometry error.


28

3.1.2 Menus……………..

3.1.2.1 File Menu

Figure 3.1.2.1-1 File Menu

COMMAND DESCRIPTION SHORTCUT KEYS

New Use the New File command to create a new project in TRIFLEX.

Ctrl + N

Open Use the Open File command to open an existing TRIFLEX project.

Ctrl + O

Close Use the Close command to close the current TRIFLEX job.

Save Use the Save File command to save the current TRIFLEX job.

Ctrl + S

Save As Use the Save As command to save the current job to a new file name as specified by the User.

Auto Save This command is used to enable or


29

disable the AutoSave feature and to specify a backup file name.

Export Spreadsheet Data

Allows user to export the data in the spreadsheet to another application

1 Tutorial01.DTA

2 ……

3 ……

Use this command to open the most recently used data file.

Worksheet Toggle Toggles the input worksheet mode F4

Print Use the Print command to print the contents of the current active view to the selected printer.

Ctrl + P

Print Preview Allows the user to preview what is to be printed.

Setup Printer Use the Setup Printer command to select a printer and/or to specify the setup properties for the printer.

Exit Use the Exit command to leave the TRIFLEX program.


30

3.1.2.1.1 Open

Figure 3.1.2.1.1-1 Open TRIFLEXWindows Project File

Look In: Specifies the location in which you want to locate a file or a folder.

File Name: Provides a space for the user to enter the name of the file they want to open.

Files of Type: Lists the types of files to display. (In this case only one file type may be chosen *.DTA)


31

3.1.2.1.2 Save As

Figure 3.1.2.1.2-1 Save As

Save In: Specifies the location in which you want to locate a file or a folder.

File Name: Provides a space for the user to enter the name of the file they want to save.

Save as type: Specifies the type of file you are saving.

3.1.2.1.3 Autosave

Figure 3.1.2.1.3-1 Autosave Default dialog


32

Enable the Autosave Functionality: Enables the ability to auto save the current file.

Current Working File: Specifies the file name of the current file.

The Backup File Name: Specifies the name of the backup file that would be created.

3.1.2.2 Setup Menu

Figure 3.1.2.2-1 Setup Menu

SETUP COMMAND DESCRIPTION

Project Sets up project data

Project Notes Allows the User to record relevant data

Input Units

(see note 1)

Allows user to define the system of measurement used for input units

Output Units Allows user to define the system of measurement used for output units.

Modeling Defaults Defines default values to be used in data input


33

Case Definition Defines particular case specified by the User.

Occasional Loading Defines load requirements for soil, wind, and uniform loads.

Rot. Equip. Rpt. Data Allows the User to access the Rotating Equipment Report.

Flg. Loading Rpt. Data Allows the User to access the Flange Loading Report.

Modal Analysis Defines the resonant vibration frequencies and mode shapes.

Response Spectrum Analysis

Allows the User to perform and display modal analysis in the piping system.

Time History Ana lysis Allows the User to perform operations dealing with abrupt processes.

Configure Graphics Colors

Defines the color setting for components, text, and background.

Restore Defaults Colors

Restores the default graphic settings.

Graphic Preferences Defines font size and scale adjustments. See Graphic Preferences Sub Menu

Save Settings… Allows the User to save current actions.

Restore Settings… Allows the User to go back to original settings.


34

3.1.2.2.1 Input Units

Figure 3.1.2.2.1-1 Input Units

The Input Units are chosen by the User and usually depend on your Project requirements. That is where the Project is taking place, and who the client is will dictate what Units you will require. A discussion with your Project and with your Project manager to decide on the Units you will use will save you time in the future.

Note: Once Input Units are selected and the model is developed then TRIFLEX will NOT compensate for the Switch of Input Units to another type of Input Unit. Once selected then you are committed to that Input Unit.

The following pages show the choices for Units.


35




36




37



38

3.1.2.2.2 Graphic Preferences Sub Menu

Figure 3.1.2.2.2-1 Graphic Preferences Sub Menu

GRAPHIC PREFERENCES DESCRIPTION

Continuous View All This toggle enables the User to have a continuous view of the piping system as it is being built. (Default is Off.)

Fixed Axis Display Displays a fixed axis with a position and style as set by the User with the Axis Properties dialog.

Axis Properties Enables the User to enter an integer between 1 and 100 to be used to scale the X, Y, Z legs of the Axis Indicator.

Adjust Restraint Scale This function enables the User to enter an integer between 1 and 100 to adjust the relative drawing size of restraint indicators with respect to the dimensions of the pipe or fitting to which they are attached.

Node and Component Labels Enables the User to set the font size by selecting the size (from 4 to 72) by using a slider.


39

Set Graphics Acceleration This function enables the User to speed up the manipulation of the objects in the piping system.

Set Isometric View Properties This function enables the User to view the isometric properties of the piping system.

Set Selection Method This function enables the User to choose a method for the component preferences.


40

3.1.2.3 Components Menu

Figure 3.1.2.3-1 Components Menu

COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION

Edit Component See Edit Component Sub Menu

Set Input Mode See Set Input Mode Sub Menu

Anchor Will display the Anchor Component used to enter Anchor data. An Anchor can be drawn as a Vessel. Transparent capability is available.

Pipe Will display the Pipe Component used to enter pipe data

Elbow Will display the Elbow Component used to enter elbow data

Branch Connection Will display the Branch Connection Component used to enter branch connection data

Valve Will display the Valve Component used to enter valve data


41

Flange Will display the Flange Component used to enter flange data

Reducer Will display the Reducer Component used to enter reducer data

Joint Will display the Joint Component used to enter joint data

Exp. Joint Will display the Expansion Joint Component used to enter expansion joint data

Release Element Will display the Release Element Component used to enter release element data

Pressure Relief Valve Will display the Pressure Relief Valve Component used to enter pressure relief valve data


42

3.1.2.3.1 Component Control Menu

Figure 3.1.2.3.1-1 Components Control Menu

(RIGHT CLICK on Desired Component)

ITEM DESCRIPTION

COMPONENT CONTROL

Displays the name of this menu.

Toggle Node Label Toggles the node label for that particular component.

Toggle Component Label

Toggles the label for that particular component.

Select Component Selects that particular component.

Display Component Dialog

Displays the dialog of the clicked upon component.

Component Information

States information such as the Type, Index, and Nodal range of the component.


43

3.1.2.3.2 Insert, Replace and Append Mode

In order to demonstrate the modification capabilities of TRIFLEX Windows, it is best to either create a short model or refer to the Tutorial shown in Figure 3.1.0-1. TRIFLEX Windows can operate in APPEND mode, INSERT mode or REPLACE mode. To change this mode, click on Components on the Main Menu and then click on the desired mode - Append, Insert or Replace. Alternatively, the User can click on the icons located in the bottom left corner of Main Screen to change the operating mode. See section 3.1.1.3 for an explanation of these Icons.

The three modes for modeling components are as follows: Insert (creates component prior to highlighted or current component), Append (creates component following last component in a branch) and Replace (replaces highlighted or current component). When building a new piping model, the User will use the Append mode. When the User wishes to insert a new component in an existing piping model prior to a highlighted component, the Insert mode should be selected. When the User wishes to replace one highlighted component, the User should select the replace mode. Insert and Replace also are functional for current or last coded components when no component is highlighted. The selected mode will remain the same until the User selects a different mode.

To Insert one or more components, do the following:

1. Turn on the node numbers by clicking on the Node Numbers Icon on the Graphic Toolbar while viewing the piping model.

2. Highlight the component before which you wish to place a new component. Alternatively, you can select this component on the spreadsheet.

3. Click on the Insert Icon in the lower left corner.

4. Select the component you wish to insert from the component toolbar and the desired dialog will appear for you to define the component. Then click OK or press Enter.

Similarly, to Append a component following the last component (must be last component of a branch), click on the desired component on the component toolbar and enter the data on the dialog that appears. Then click OK or press Enter.

To Replace a component, do the following: Turn on the node numbers by clicking on the Node Numbers Icon on the Graphic Toolbar while viewing the piping model.

1. Highlight the component, which you wish to replace. Alternatively, you can select this component on the spreadsheet.


44

2. Click on the Replace Icon in the lower left corner.

3. Select the new component from the component toolbar. The desired dialog will appear for you to define the component. Then click OK or press Enter.

Modifying (Delete, Cut, Paste, Copy and Undo)

The following procedures are recommended for graphically modifying components:

Deleting

1. Click on the component(s) to be deleted.

2. Press the Del (Delete ) key.

Cutting (Ctrl + x)

1. Click on the component(s) that are to be cut.

2. Click on Edit on the Main Menu and click on Cut.

Copying (Ctrl + c)

1. Click on the component(s) that are to be copied.

2. Click on Edit on the Main Menu and click on Copy.

Pasting (Ctrl + v) May be used to append one or more components (previously cut or copied components) to the TO node of the highlighted component.

1. Click on the component to which the component(s) are to be pasted.

2. Click on Edit on the Main Menu and click on Paste.

Undo (Ctrl +z) To undo the last operation, click on Edit on the Main Menu and click on Undo.

Note: In order to PAN hold down the SHIFT key and left Click on the mouse on the model dragging the chosen area of the model to the center position

Refer to Appendix A - Lists Keyboard Control Key.


45

3.1.2.3.3 Edit Component Sub Menu

Figure 3.1.2.3.3-1 Edit Components Sub Menu

EDIT COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Current Use this command to edit the current component.

First Use this command to edit the first component

Last Use this command to edit the last component

Next Use this command to edit the next component.

Prev Use this command to edit the previous component


46

3.1.2.3.4 Set input Mode Sub Menu

Figure 3.1.2.3.4-1 Set Input Mode Sub Menu

SET INPUT MODE DESCRIPTION

Insert Use this command to insert a component.

Replace Use this command to replace a component.

Append Use this command to append the component.


47

3.1.2.4 Edit Menu

Figure 3.1.2.4-1 Edit Menu

Undo This command reverses the previous component’s editing operations.

Ctrl + Z

Redo Redoes the previous action that was undone. Ctrl + Y

Cut This command removes the selected components from the piping system and places them on the TRIFLEX Windows Clipboard for future pasting operations.

Ctrl + X

Copy This command copies the selected components on to the TRIFLEX Windows Clipboard for future pasting operations.

Ctrl + C

Paste This command removes the currently selected component(s). Note: It does not move them to the TRIFLEX system clipboard.

Ctrl + V

Delete This command removes the currently selected component(s). Note: It does not move them to the TRIFLEX system clipboard.

Del

Renumber Selection Allows user to renumber the selection Ctrl + R

EDIT DESCRIPTION SHORTCUT KEYS


48

Find Node Enables the User to find a specific node in the project.

Ctrl + F

Find Next Enables the User to find the next specified node on the project.

F3

Copy Whole Spreadsheet

Enables the User to copy the total spreadsheet to the EXCEL spreadsheet program.

Export Spreadsheet Data

Enables the User to export various spreadsheets.

Toggle Current Component Selection

Toggle the selection status of the current component.

Select Current Branch

Selects the current branch of the current component. Ctrl + B

Deselect Current Branch

Deselects the current branch of the current component.

Shift + Ctrl + B

Select All Selects all components of the piping system Ctrl + A

Deselect All Deselects all selected components of the piping system.

Shift + Ctrl + A

Invert Selection Deselects what is selected and selects everything that is not selected.

Show Selected Components

Shows the components that have been selected.

Rearrange Component List

Rearranges the list of components.


49

3.1.2.5 Calculate Menu

Figure 3.1.2.5-1 Calculate Menu

CALCULATE DESCRIPTION SHORTCUT KEYS

Basic Enables the User to start the calculation of system stresses and displacements.

Progress Log Preferences

Enables the User to display various reports, calculations, and to refresh the log before each calculation, and to clear the progress log when it is desired.

Load Case Combination

Enables the User to specify load cases F6

Response Spectrum Analysis

Allows the User to display and perform response spectrum data for the current piping system.

Response Spectrum Log Master

Enables the User to view messages of the analyses and calculations for the piping system.

Time History Analysis

Allows the User to define data required for analysis and calculation.


50

3.1.2.5.1 Progress Bar Preferences

Figure 3.1.2.5.1-1 Progress Bar Preferences

Figure 3.1.2.5.1-2 Calculation Progress Log Display Preferences

RADIO BUTTON DESCRIPTION

Display Full Report in Progress Log

Enables the user to Display full report in the Progress Log for future use.

Display Only Calculation Summary in Progress Log

Enables the user to Display only calculation summary in Progress Log for future use.


51

Display Only Calculation Confirmation in Progress Log

Enables the user to Display only calculation confirmation in Progress Log for future use.


52

3.1.2.6 Output Window

Figure 3.1.2.6-1 Output Window

View Analysis Results This dialog enables the User to view a description of the reports from TRIFLEX’s Output.

Piping Code Report This control enables the User to select piping code reports for the piping system and to look at the values in these reports.

Piping Code Report

- Selected Components

This control enables the User to select piping code reports for the piping system and to look at the selected components in these reports.

API –610 Report Enables the User to access a piping code report.

API – 617 Report Enables the User to access a piping code report.

NEMA Report Enables the User to access a piping code report.

Rot. Equip. Report Enables the User to access a piping code report.

Flange Loading Report Enables the User to access a piping code report.

Spring Hanger Report Enables the User to access a piping code report.

OUTPUT DESCRIPTION SHORTCUT KEYS


53

Color Mapped Graphic Display

Displays the output results in graphics.

Show Color Scale Shows the color scale of the output.

Preview Reports Enables the User to preview the reports in reduced image.

F7

Print Reports Enables the User to print reports. F8


54

3.1.2.7 Utilities Menu

Figure 3.1.2.7-1 Utilities Menu

UTILITIES DESCRIPTION

Databases Enables the User to view or define data for components. See Databases Sub Menu.

Current Data File Enables the User to see the path of a currently active data file.

Import Files Defines data required to import various files. See Import Files Sub Menu

Export Files Defines data required to export various files. See Export Files Sub Menu

Points Distance Enables the User to view absolute coordinates and distances.

Connectivity Log Enables the User to view any connectivity details of the current piping system.

Activator Check Enables the User to view contents of the activators connected to the computer.

WERCO Opens the WERCO program, if licensed.


55

View AAAT Catalog Enables the User to look at AAA Technology’s catalog of products.

3.1.2.7.1 Database Sub Menu

Figure 3.1.2.7.1-1 Databases Sub Menu

DATABASES DESCRIPTION

Pipe Enables the User to browse through all the records in the Pipe Database.

Flange Allows the User to browse through the Flange Database

Valve Allows the User to browse through the valve database after choosing Type, Size, and Rating.

Pressure Relief Valve Allows the User to browse through the pressure relief valve database after choosing Type, Size, and Rating

Structural Steel Allows the User to browse through all the records after choosing a specific structural steel shape.


56

Materials Shows all the materials that are listed in the Material combo-box. The left side shows general data and the right side shows properties’ values at different temperatures. These values are to be used for calculation purposes in TRIFLEX.

Insulation Matls Allows the User to browse through all insulation material records stored in the TRIFLEX database.

FRP/GRP Matls Allows the User to browse through all fiberglass reinforced pipe records stored in the TRIFLEX database.


57

3.1.2.7.2 Import Files Sub Menu

Figure 3.1.2.7.2-1 Import Files Sub Menu

IMPORT FILES DESCRIPTION

DOS TRIFLEX Job Enables the User to define all data required to import a TRIFLEX DOS File

TRIFLEX Keyword Defines all data required to convert an existing keyword file to the TRIFLEX Windows program.

CAD Import Settings Enables the User to define the settings for the current project. This feature is fashioned after a compass that allows the User to set the directions of the X, Y, Z coordinates, and also to specify a starting node number.

CADPipe This field enables the User to define all data required to import a CADPIPE neutral file.

PDS Files Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a PDS File

PDMS Files Enables the User to define all data required to import a PDMS neutral file.


58

CALMA Enables the User to define all data required to import a CALMA neutral file.

ALIAS Enables the User to define all data required to import a ALIAS file.

Import Error Messages Enables the User to have a view of the error messages created during the importing procedure

3.1.2.7.3 Export Files Sub Menu

Figure 3.1.2.7.3-1 Export Files Sub Menu

EXPORT FILES DESCRIPTION

TRIFLEX Keyword Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a TRIFLEX Keyword File.

isoOut File Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to an ISO Out File

3D DXF Generates a DXF with an isometric drawing.


59

JPEG File Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a JPEG File.

Bitmap File Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a Bitmap File.

HPGL File Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a HPGL File.

PostScript File Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a Postscript File

Export Spreadsheet Data to HTML/XLS/TXT

Enables the User to export various spreadsheets such as, XLS Files, HTML Files, and TAB-delimited Files

relief + SchmArt Database


60

3.1.2.7.4 Points Distance

Figure 3.1.2.7.4-1 Points Distance dialog box The basic function of this dialog box allows the User to choose the Starting Point, with its global coordinates (X, Y, Z); and the Ending Point with its global coordinates (X, Y, Z). Then the Delta Dimension (DX, DY, DZ Length) between those two points is given by TRIFLEX. However there are TWO different methods to accomplish this task.

Method One:

First, type the Node Number in the box marked “Start Point”. Or the user can use the “Start Point” scroll down box and go to the correct node number and select it that way.

Second, type the Node Number in the box marked “End Point”. Or the user can use the “End Point” scroll down box and go to the correct node number and select it that way. Third, read the Delta Dimension (DX, DY, DZ Length) between the node points you selected. This given by TRIFLEX. We will demonstrate by an example. In the Tutorial model shown in the Figure you find Node pt. 1020 and Node pt. 1030. We want to find the distance of the stanchion, or the distance from node pt. 1020 to node pt. 1030.


61

Figure 3.1.2.7.4-2 Example Points Distance Therefore by going to: Utilities, then Points Distance, then making node pt. 1020 the Start Point. Then making node pt. 1030 the End Point. Then clicking back into the Start Point box we get the “Delta Dimension” shown in figure 3.1.2.7.4-3.

Figure 3.1.2.7.4-3 Example Points Distance

This dialog box is very valuable when you are trying to close a loop in a particular model.


62

Method Two:

First, in TRIFLEX pick or select your current component.

Second, select “Utilities”, then “Points Distance”

Third, set Start Node to Current.

Fourth, type the Node Number in the box marked “End Point”. Or the user can use the “End Point” scroll down box and go to the correct node number and select it that way.

Figure 3.1.2.7.4-4 Example Points Distance In figure 3.1.2.7.4-4 the User activated (picked) the component with Node Pt. 50 as its end point. Then clicking on “Set Start To Current”. Then typing in 70 as the end point we can see the distance from Node Pt. 50 to Node Pt. 70 as 1 foot in the X direction.

Note: The Points Distance topic refers to dialog box "Delta Dimensions between Two Points" as shown in the Figure 3.1.2.7.4-1.


63

3.1.2.7.5 Connectivity Log

Figure 3.1.2.7.5-1 Connectivity Log

This dialog box enables the User to see any errors and to save these connectivity details as a log file.

3.1.2.7.6 Activator Check

Figure 3.1.2.7.6-1 Activator Check


64

The main window of the Activator Check program will automatically display the contents of a compatible activator attached to a parallel port of the computer. There are three divisions of the screen: Program Selection, Activator Settings, and Program Options. In addition, a button is located in the lower left corner of the dialog that allows the User to remotely update an activator. Program Selection: The Program Selection buttons allow the User to select which of four locations on the activator to view. When the activator contains fewer than four program settings, only those available on the activator are selectable. Selection 1 is automatically selected at Startup. Activator Settings: This group shows the contents of the activator at the location specified by the Program Selection buttons. Specifically, the fields are Serial Number, Date Last Used, Revision, Activator Type, Program Name, Version, Lease Type, Runs Left, Days Left and Number of Users. Serial Number: This is the 10-digit serial number assigned to this activator and entered by the User during installation. Date Last Used: This is the date the activator was last accessed and updated from a PSI application program. Revision: As the activator lease information is modified using this program, the activator revision is incremented. Thus the revision is an indication of the number of times the plug has been updated. Activator Type: This field will indicate whether the use is for Network or Standalone purposes, and either GIWXK (primarily, but not exclusively, used for DOS programs), or ACQDY (primarily, but not exclusively, used for Windows programs). The latter is an Aladdin code indicating an internal identification scheme for the activator. Program Name: This field is for the name of the PSI Windows application for which this activator location is set. Version: This field describes the version of the application program for which the activator will respond. Under normal circumstances, an update of the activator will be required as the program is modified to include new features and the version number is changed. Version Release Specifications (Version A.B.C) A Major Release. A new Update Code Required.


65

B Changes in digits denotes major change in versions . A new Update Code Required.

C All maintenance releases are identified as changes in the third digit of the release number. No new Update Code Required. Lease Type: Currently, PSI supports four lease types: Rental, Limited Runs, Evaluation, and Perpetual. The RUNS LEFT and DAYS LEFT fields depend on which of these options is shown in this field. Runs Left: If the lease type is either Evaluation or Limited Runs, this field will show the number of program executions remaining on the current lease period. Days Left: If the lease type is either Evaluation or Rental, this field gives the number of days remaining on the current lease period. Pressing the “Date” button to the right of this field will give the expiration date of the lease period. Number of Users: If the activator is for NETWORK use, this field shows the number of simultaneous Users allowed under the lease provisions. Program Option: The last group on the right of the screen is Program Options. Each application program may have up to 10 options or added features agreed to under the provisions of the lease. Please consult the User’s Manual for the particular application program to determine the availability and details of such options. Update Activator Button: The Remote Update facility built into PSI’s activator system provides a method to refresh the license data on the activator. If the User should wish to use his/her existing activator for a new version of the application program, or would like to revise or extend lease parameters, then this will be useful. All the User needs to do is select the Update Activator button on the main screen, enter the code supplied by PSI, and he/she will be up and running with the new settings. New data written to the plug should be immediately shown in the main window when the Update Activator button is pressed in the Remote Update Dialog screen.


66

3.1.2.7.7 WERCO

The newest version of WERCO is a comprehensive software package for calculating stresses in shells in accordance with the guidelines set forth in the Welding Research Council Bulletins WRC-107 & WRC-297. This software program eliminates the need for hours of tedious hand-calculations and lengthy manual cross-referencing, while it reduces errors.

The latest changes and general features of WERCO will be easily understood by the new User, and our engineers have provided fields for the User to input any data that is required to run the WERCO software program.

The User may click on these radio buttons, and/or enter data into these fields:

Title Options

Code Input Units

Output Units Processing

Geometry (Shell, Attachment, Reinforcing Pad) Loads

Stresses Curve Factors

Figure 3.1.2.7.7-1 WERCO screen


67

Example test1 (English units) is shown in the figure.

Figure 3.1.2.7.7-2 WERCO example “test1”

Example test1M (Metric units) is shown in the figure.

Figure 3.1.2.7.7-3 WERCO example “test1M” (metric)


68

For additional examples go to FILE, OPEN, then pick one of the different samples for viewing.

All explanations are fully covered by going to HELP, then Help Topics.

Note: WERCO is a separate licensed program. DEMO’S are limited to a Spherical Shell with a 24 in. (610 mm) Inside Radius and a Round Hollow Attachment with a 2 in. (50 mm) Outside Radius.


69

3.1.2.7.8 AAAT Catalog

To reach the AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. HOME PAGE.

Type: www.aaatech.com

However when you are in TRIFLEX you can select Utilities, then View AAAT Catalog, then Figure 3.1.2.7.8-1 as shown will come up. That is you are automatically sent to the home page of AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. This is a sister company to PipingSolutions, Inc.

AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc can provide ALL of your Pipe Support needs.

Figure 3.1.2.7.8-1 AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. screen


70

3.1.2.7.9 PSI Home Page

To reach the PipingSolutions, Inc. HOME PAGE.

Type: www.pipingsolutions.com

Our Internet Home Page is where you can find many helpful items.

For example.

Following this path: www.pipingsolutions.com / Products / TRIFLEX / Samples.

This will allow you to view Power Point Shows . And viewing one of the many Power Point Shows available can solve a particular problem you needed to figure out.

Note: If you do not find the Idea that you are seeking. Then contact the PipingSolutions Inc. staff and a new Power Point Show will be made for you and added to the Home Page. The particular Idea may be available as a Power Point Show but just not on the Home page at this time. Just contact our friendly staff.

PipingSolutions, Inc.

Ph: (713)-849-3366 Fax: (713)-849-3654 Email: [email protected]

Figure 3.1.2.7.9-1 PSI home page screen


71

Figure 3.1.2.7.9-2 PSI, TRIFLEX Samples screen, start

Figure 3.1.2.7.9-3 PSI, TRIFLEX Samples screen, end


72

3.1.2.8 Windows Menu

Figure 3.1.2.8-1 Windows Menu

WINDOW DESCRIPTION

Arrange Windows Rearranges the windows.

Cascade Windows Shows cascading windows.

Tile Horizontal Tile multiple windows horizontally.

Tile Vertical Tile multiple windows vertically.

1 Tutorial01.dta – Graphics Activates this window.

2 Tutorial01.dta - Spreadsheet Activates this window.


73

3.1.2.9 Help Menu

Figure 3.1.2.9-1 Help Menu

HELP DESCRIPTION

Help System Enables the User to conveniently find information about using TRIFLEX Windows.

Display Manual Allows the user to view the manual by chapter in Adobe Acrobat format.

Graphics Driver Info Enables the User to see what Open GL drivers are installed on her/his computer

About TRIFLEX Displays window giving version information for Triflex as well as contact information of Piping Solutions, Inc.


74

3.1.2.9.1 Using the Manual and Help Command

To access assistance with specific topics; click on Help on the Main Menu. Index and User Manual will then appear. Clicking on Index will show a list of topics to select from to obtain more detail about any specific topic listed. Clicking on User Manual will show a list of the chapters available for viewing.

The electronic TRIFLEX User’s Manual is located in the default directory:

c:\ProgramFiles\PipingSolutions \TriflexWindows\Manual

The manual is furnished electronically in Adobe Acrobat (*.pfd) format and linked by chapter, figures and index. Click on a chapter and the chapter will appear on the screen.

But, remember this has to be done by YOU the USER!

Please refer to the “Table of Contents” for what each Chapter covers.


75

3.1.3 Input Spreadsheet

Figure 3.1.3.0-1 Input Spreadsheet

Set Current Component – LEFT CLICK on the component’s row to set that component current

Selecting Components – LEFT CLICK + CTRL the already current component

Entering/Editing Input Data – Data can be entered or edited simply by a LEFT CLICK on the field and typing in the desired data


76

3.1.4 Accessing Data from Piping Model

To investigate the properties of a piping model, clicking (left mouse button) on the particular component of interest. For instance, clicking on the Anchor will yield a menu such as shown in Figure 3.1.4-1. To modify any property on this component, click on Display Component Dialog and enter the desired data in the component dialog from the keyboard. An in-depth discussion can be found in Section 3.0

Figure 3.1.4-1 Viewing Anchor Component Properties

Figure 3.1.4-2 Worksheet


77

To view entered data for the piping model, including node numbers, delta dimensions, pipe sizes, restraint indicators, pipe material, insulation material, and temperature and pressure for all load cases, click on the component button icon Worksheet, located in the Main Menu. Figure 3.1.4-2. Pressing the Ctrl + Tab keys allows the User to toggle between different screens.

Note: If your Company runs CAD from this system, then check your CAD system to see what commands are “Hot Keyed”. Compare them with TRIFLEX’s shortcut keys, they may be in conflict.


78

3.1.4.1 Using Color to Check the Input Parameters.

1. With the input piping on the screen, click on the Icon which looks like a bending beam.

2. Then click on the desired data group in the Graphic Display Control dialog box. Here we wish to see the process data.

3. Then click on the selection bar entitled, “Select item to display” and select “Temperature”. The color will now show the process temperature of the pipe shown.

Figure 3.1.4.1-1 Color, Process Temperature

4. The user can change to “Base Temperature” or to “Nominal Diameter” or to “Wind Load” or to whatever parameter he wishes to check.

5. See Figure 3.1.4.1-2 through Figure 3.1.4.1-5


79

Figure 3.1.4.1-2 Color, Process Temperature

Figure 3.1.4.1-3 Color, Base Temperature


80

Figure 3.1.4.1-4 Color, Nominal Diameter

Figure 3.1.4.1-5 Color, Wind Load


81

3.2 Component Dialog

3.2.1 Anchor…..

Figure 3.2.1.0-1 Anchor Components, All Tabs

3.2.1.1 Anchor Component, Type/Location Tab

To enter an Anchor component, the User must click on the Anchor Icon on the Component Toolbar on the left border of the dialog, or click on Components on the main menu at the top of the dialog and then on Anchor on the resulting pull down menu. Upon either of these sequences of actions, an Anchor dialog with a series of related dialogs will be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

The data is organized in related data groups on each and every dialog. In the upper left corner of the Anchor dialog, a data group entitled “Element” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Node – In this field, TRIFLEX will generate a Node Number equal to: 1.) The Initial Node Number entered by the User in the Modeling Defaults if this is the first node being entered, or 2.) The next available Node Number based upon the Last coded To Node number plus the node increment specified by the User in the Modeling Defaults. If the node number generated by TRIFLEX is not the desired node number, then the User may select a node number from the drop down combo list in this field or enter a node number, as desired.


82

Note:

User Input Component Numbers cannot exceed 998.

User Input Node Numbers cannot exceed 9999.

TRIFLEX Input (computer generated) Node Numbers cannot exceed 32,000.

Name – In this field, the User may specify any name, tag #, line # that will fit within the field. This name indicator will likely assist the User or other interested parties in identifying the significance of the node. Entry of the name in this field is optional.

ü Immediately below the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Absolute Coordinates”. The default values will be all zeros. If the User wishes to enter coordinates for the first Anchor, TRIFLEX will use this entered coordinate as the starting coordinate. All of the subsequent components’ coordinates will be based upon this starting coordinate. If the User wishes to enter coordinates for a subsequent Anchor, TRIFLEX will use this entered coordinate to compare with the coordinate calculated by TRIFLEX. In the event that the coordinates are different, TRIFLEX will flag this as an error for the User to sort out and correct. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

X, Y and Z – The User can leave these fields blank or enter a numerical value in one, two or three of these fields. The default values will be 0,0,0.

To the immediate right of the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Type”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Anchor is Totally Rigid – If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the anchor to be totally rigid, then the User should accept the selection of this radio button. The default selection for all anchors will be with this radio button selected. Graphically represented as a plate (Rectangular) in the Graphics mode.

Anchor is Totally Free – If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the anchor to be totally free, then the User should click on the radio button just to the left of “Anchor is Totally Free”. TRIFLEX will then consider the anchor to be completely flexible along and about the X, Y and Z-axes. Graphically represented as a round disk in the Graphics mode.


83

Note: A system designed with totally free anchors and no restraints will NOT produce a stress solution.

“Y” Axis Rigid – If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the anchor to be totally free along the X and Z-axes and about all axes, then the User should click on the radio button just to the left of “Y” Axis Rigid. TRIFLEX will then consider the anchor to be completely flexible along the X and Z-axes and about the X, Y and Z-axes; but totally rigid along the Y-axis.

User Defined Stiffness – If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the anchor to have specific stiffness along one or more axes or about one or more axes, then the User should click on the radio button just to the left of “User Defined Stiffness”. When this radio button is selected, TRIFLEX will then activate the Translational Stiffness data group and the Rotational Stiffness data group to enable the User to enter the desired stiffness along and about the X, Y and Z-axes.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Type”, the User will find a data group entitled “Translational Stiffness“. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are further defined below:

X, Y and Z – If the User has selected the User Defined Stiffness radio button, then the User can select Free or Rigid from the drop down combo list in the X, Y and/or Z fields or enter a numerical value in any of these fields to define the desired stiffness.

Immediately to the right of the data group entitled “Translational Stiffness”, the User will find a data group entitled “Rotational Stiffness”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are further defined below:

X, Y and Z – If the User has selected the User Defined Stiffness radio button, then the User can select Free or Rigid from the drop down combo list in the X, Y and/or Z fields or enter a numerical value in any of these fields to define the desired stiffness.

Immediately below the “Absolute Coordinates” data group, the User will find additional data fields for one additional anchor option as follows:

Absolute Coordinates data group

Anchor Global Coordinate – This box when checked will allow the entry in the three boxes below it of the Actual global coordinate location of the Anchor in space.

Reset and automatically calculate the Global coordinate – This box when checked will allow TRIFLEX to “reset and automatically calculate the global


84

coordinate” of the anchor. This is useful if you do not know the global coordinate of the anchor and want TRIFLEX to do it for you.

Coordinate system for Anchor stiffness and Movements

X,Y,Z Coordinates – This box when checked will allow the use of the X,Y,Z axes for calculation of Anchor Stiffness and Movements.

A,B,C Coordinates – This box when checked will allow the use of the A,B,C axes for calculation of Anchor Stiffness and Movements.

Skewed Anchor Element direction angles – When the A,B,C Coordinate axes are chosen above these boxes allow for input of the skewed Anchor element direction angles.

Show Transparent – This box when checked will allow the anchor if drawn as a Vessel to be Transparent. The amount of Transparency can be changed by going to: Setup / Graphic Preferences / Transparency Adjustment.

Anchor Drawn as Vessel – This box when checked will allow the Anchor, which is normally shown as a plate to be shown as a Vessel. Then go to the Vessel Properties Tab to alter your Vessel Drawing.

Free along “Y” axis when Weight Analysis Processed for Spring Hanger Design - If the User has elected to have TRIFLEX size and select spring hangers in this analysis and wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to consider this anchor to be free along the “Y” only during the Weight Analysis, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Free along “Y” axis when Weight Analysis Processed for Spring Hanger Design”. The default for this option is that it is not selected. For a further discussion about the use of this option, see the Chapter 5 – Use of Restraints.


85

3.2.1.2 Anchor Component, Pipe Properties, Material Selection

Figure 3.2.1.2-1 Anchor Dialog, Pipe Properties Screen

Note: For B31.1 & B31.3 TRIFLEX utilizes a Database for all of the materials reported by ASME. For other Codes TRIFLEX utilizes a generic Database.

In the Setup to this problem we have selected the following piping code.

Setup, Modeling Defaults, Piping Code = “B31.1”. Therefore we know the Piping Code, but what is the material?

All piping models must choose the material for the piping system. The User begins his system by first choosing the Anchor as a starting point. Then he must go to the Pipe Properties Tab and after choosing the Pipe Size he should go to the bar marked “Pipe Material based on B31.1 Table”. This is circled in the dialog box above to show you its location.

Upon clicking on the bar, a new dialog box will appear. I input the first table and the default value of “LS Low Carbon Steel [<0.3% C]” cleared itself from the material.


86

Figure 3.2.1.2-2 Pipe Material Database, Selection of Materials

You begin your selection of material by the use of this dialog box. First decide the Table you wish to use. Here we have selected “Table A-3 for Stainless Steel.

Next go to the Group. Here we have selected “Welded Pipe and Tube - Without Filler Metal Austenitic”.

Next go to the Spec. No. and select your particular specification number. Here we have selected A-312 stainless steels.

Next go to your Material Grade. Here we have selected A-312, Grade: TP316L.

Figure 3.2.1.2-3 Pipe Material Database, Selection of Materials

After you have satisfied the dialog box for selection of material from the B31.1 code tables, then click “OK”.


87

Figure 3.2.1.2-4 Anchor Dialog, Selection of Materials

Then the Pipe Properties tab will show your selection under material as shown in Figure 3.2.1.2-4.

If you have only the Anchor selected, then you can go on to the next component to be entered since TRIFLEX will automatically fill in the material on all components following. But if you have any additional components after this Anchor then you will need to “Ripple” the material selection to the last component in the piping system. Note how I input “50” as the last component even though it may only be 2 or 3 components. Using a very high number will make sure that all of the components will changed to the same material as you want it to be.

You now have the material selected for your piping system.


88

Generic Database of Material

Material – The User can click on the drop down combo list in this field and then select the desired pipe material from the list of available materials. In the event that the desired material is not available in the list, the User can select “User Specified” and enter the desired values for the pipe materia l density and Poisson’s ratio on this dialog as well as the modulus of elasticity and coefficient of expansion on the Process tab.

In the event that the User wishes to enter these properties for one or more materials in the library of materials available on the drop down combo list, all such entries are to be made through “Utilities” then “Databases” then “Materials”.

Density – When the User has selected a pipe material from the drop down combo list in the material field just above, TRIFLEX will select the proper value for the density from the data base in TRIFLEX and will display the value in this field. The field will be grayed out and inaccessible to the User, except through the material field.

When the User has selected “User Specified” from the drop down combo list in the material field just above, TRIFLEX will activate this field and thereby enable the User to enter the desired density of the pipe.

ü The current database supplied with TRIFLEX contains the following piping density properties. The following Table shows the material codes that are within the TRIFLEX database. The column marked Post '90 reflect the material codes that use the latest modulus of elasticity as found in the post '90 ANSI B31.1 and ANSI B31.3 piping codes. The older, Pre '90, codes are maintained within the TRIFLEX program so Users may continue to run older jobs. Users may change the material codes of older piping models to reflect the new materials.


89

Material Code

Post ‘90

Code

Pre ‘90

Eng SI MET IU1

Units lbs/in3 N/m3≅ 104 g/cm3 kg/m3

Aluminum AL AL 0.098 0.266 2.71 2713

Austenitic Stainless AS AU 0.290 0.787 8.03 8027

Brass (Yellow) BR BR 0.306 0.831 8.47 8470

Bronze (Phosphor 9%) BZ BZ 0.318 0.863 8.80 8802

Gray Cast Iron CI CI 0.265 0.719 7.34 7335

Carbon Molybdenum Steels MS CM 0.283 0.768 7.83 7833

Copper Nickel (70 Cu- 30 Ni) CN CN 0.323 0.877 8.94 8941

Straight Chrome Steels (12 Cr, 17 Cr, 27 Cr)

SC CR 0.281 0.763 7.78 7778

Low Carbon Steels (< 0.3% C) LS CS 0.283 0.768 7.83 7833

Copper Nickel (Navy Specs) CU CU 0.323 0.877 8.94 8941

High Carbon Steels (> 0.3% C) HS HC 0.283 0.768 7.83 7833

Intermediate Chrome Moly Steel 5 to 9 CrMo

IM IC 0.283 0.768 7.83 7833

K-Monel MK KM 0.306 0.831 8.47 8470

Low Chrome Moly Steels through 3 CrMo

LM LC 0.283 0.768 7.83 7833

Monel ML MO 0.319 0.866 8.83 8830

Nickel Iron Chrome (Ni-Fe-Cr) NC NC 0.300 0.814 8.30 8304

Nickel (3.5% Ni) NK NI 0.322 0.874 8.91 8913

Type 310 Stainless (25 Cr 20 Ni) SL ST 0.290 0.787 8.03 8027

Wrought Iron WI WI 0.280 0.760 7.75 7750

Figure 3.2.1.2-5 Table of Materials


90

Weight/Unit Len. - In this field, TRIFLEX will calculate and display the actual weight per unit length of the pipe. The field will be grayed out and inaccessible to the User, except through the material field or density field if the User selected User Specified from the drop down combo list in the material field.

Poisson’s Ratio – In this field, TRIFLEX will display a value of 0.3 for all materials. If the User wishes to alter this value, the User can click on this field and edit it.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Pipe Material”, the User will find a data group entitled “Insulation”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are further defined below:

Material – The User can click on the drop down combo list in this field and then select the desired insulation material from the list of available materials. In the event that the desired material is not available in the list, the User can select “User Specified” and enter the desired values for the insulation material density on this dialog.

In the event that the User wishes to enter these properties for one or more materials in the library of insulation materials available on the drop down combo list, all such entries are to be made through “Utilities” then “Databases” then “Insulation Matls”.

Density – When the User has selected an insulation material from the drop down combo list in the material field just above, TRIFLEX will select the proper value for the density from the data base in TRIFLEX and will display the value in this field. The field will be grayed out and inaccessible to the User, except through the material field.

When the User has selected “User Specified” from the drop down combo list in the material field just above, TRIFLEX will activate this field and thereby enable the User to enter the desired density of the insulation.

The current database of insulation materials supplied with TRIFLEX has the following insulation density properties.


91

Insulation Material Code Eng SI MET IU1

Units Lb/ft3 N/m3 Kg/m3 Kg/m3

Amosite Asbestos AS 16.0 2513 256 256

Calcium Silicate Thermobestos7

85% Magnesia Calcium Silicate

CS 11.0 1728 176 176

Careytemp7 CT 10.0 1571 160 160

Foam-glass Cellular Glass

FG 9.0 1414 144 144

Fiberglass Owens/Corning 25 ASJ

FS 7.0 1100 112 112

High Temp HT 24.0 3770 384 384

Kaylo 10J KA 2.5 1964 200 200

Mineral Wool M W 8.5 1335 136 136

Perlite Celo-tempJ 1500

PE 13.0 2042 208 208

Styro-Foam ST 1.8 283 29 29

Super-X SX 25.0 3927 400 400

Poly-Urethane 5 to 9 CrMo

UR 2.2 346 35 35

Figure 3.2.1.2-6 Table of Insulation Materials

Weight/Unit Len. - In this field, TRIFLEX will calculate and display the actual weight per unit length of the insulation covering the pipe. The field will be grayed out and inaccessible to the User, except through the material field or density field if the User selected User Specified from the drop down combo list in the material field.


92

Thickness – If the User has selected an insulation material, then the User must also specify an insulation thickness in this field. The default value for this field is zero.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Insulation”, the User will find a miscellaneous data item as further defined below:

Total Weight/Unit Len. - In this field, TRIFLEX will display the actual weight per unit length of the pipe itself, the contents and the insulation covering the pipe. The field will be grayed out and inaccessible to the User, except through entry of the contents data, the pipe data and the insulation data fields.


93

3.2.1.3 Anchor Component, Init. Mvts. and Rotations Tab

3.2.1.3.1 Anchor Component, Init. Mvts., X, Y, Z axes

Figure 3.2.1.3.1-1 Node 1000, Anchor Dialog, Initial Mvt, X. Y. Z axes

For every anchor in a piping model, the User may enter initial movements and initial rotations, if desired. The initial movements and initial rotations are those that are caused by the growth or shrinkage of connected equipment or the physical movement and/or rotation of the connected equipment resulting from any cause. To enter the required data, the User must click on the Initial Mvt/Rots tab at the top of the screen on each anchor component entered. Upon clicking on the tab, an Initial Movement / Rotations dialog will be presented to the User.

In the upper left corner of the Initial Mvt/Rots dialog, a data group entitled “Initial Movements” is available for User data entry. The default value for each field will be zero. The data is to be entered by the User on a case-by-case basis. In this release of TRIFLEX, six cases can be specified and processed one at a time or in combination. When the User has elected to activate a load case, the User may specify initial movements for each anchor for that particular load case. To activate a load case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired load case. If this has not been done, the fields for the initial movements will be grayed out. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

X Movement – The numerical value entered in this field for each case by the User represents the movement along the X Axis imposed on the anchor from the installed to operating position for that case.


94

Y Movement – The numerical value entered in this field for each case by the User represents the movement along the Y Axis imposed on the anchor from the installed to operating position for that case.

Z Movement – The numerical value entered in this fie ld for each case by the User represents the movement along the Z Axis imposed on the anchor from the installed to operating position for that case.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Initial Movements”, the User will find a data group entitled “Initial Rotations”. The default value for each field will be zero. The data is to be entered by the User on a case-by-case basis. In this release of TRIFLEX, six cases can be specified and processed one at a time or in combination. When the User has elected to activate a load case, the User may specify initial rotations for each anchor for that particular load case. To activate a load case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case. If this has not been done, the fields for the initial rotations will be grayed out. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

X Rotation – The numerical value entered in this field for each case by the User represents the rotation about the X Axis imposed on the anchor from the installed to operating position for that case.

Y Rotation – The numerical value entered in this field for each case by the User represents the rotation about the Y Axis imposed on the anchor from the installed to operating position for that case.

Z Rotation – The numerical value entered in this field for each case by the User represents the rotation about the Z Axis imposed on the anchor from the installed to operating position for that case.

ü Immediately below the “Initial Rotations” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Offset Material, Dimensions and Temperatures”. In the event that the User would prefer TRIFLEX to compute the anchor movements based upon the material of the anchor, the change in temperature of the material of the anchor and offset dimensions, then the User may enter this data and TRIFLEX will generate the anchor movements. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Material – The User can click on the drop down combo list in this field and then select the desired material from the list of available materials for the anchor casing. In the event that the desired material is not available in the list, the User should enter the desired movements in the fields noted above.

In the event that the User wishes to enter the properties for one or more materials in the library of materials available on the drop down combo list, all such entries


95

are to be made through “Utilities” then “Databases” then “Materials”. This field is identical to the Material field that is found on the Pipe Properties dialog. The material selected by the User for the anchor casing may be different from the pipe material selected by the User on the Pipe Properties dialog. The material selected by the User on the Pipe Properties dialog will be the default material for the anchor casing material.

Temperature – In this field, the User may enter the temperature of the anchor casing for each of six cases. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out).

ü The default value is the value for base temperature for the system of units selected by the User.

Offset Dimensions – The offset dimensions are the actual dimensions of the anchor casing from the actual fixed point from which growth or shrinkage originates to the node location identified by the User as the anchor point in the piping model. Anchor movements for this data point will be calculated by TRIFLEX based the anchor casing material, the change in temperature experienced by the anchor casing from the installed to operating conditions and the offset dimensions entered by the User. The default values for the offset dimensions will be zero.


96

3.2.1.3.2 Anchor Component, Init. Mvts. A, B, C axes

Figure 3.2.1.3.2-1 Node 1000, Anchor Dialog, Initial Mvt. A, B, C axes

For every anchor in a piping model, the User may enter initial movements and initial rotations, if desired. The initial movements and initial rotations are those that are caused by the growth or shrinkage of connected equipment or the physical movement and/or rotation of the connected equipment resulting from any cause. To enter the required data, the User must click on the Initial Mvt/Rots tab at the top of the screen on each anchor component entered. Upon clicking on the tab, an Initial Movement / Rotations dialog will be presented to the User.

In the upper left corner of the Initial Mvt/Rots dialog, a data group entitled “Initial Movements” is available for User data entry. The default value for each field will be zero. The data is to be entered by the User on a case-by-case basis. In this release of TRIFLEX, six cases can be specified and processed one at a time or in combination. When the User has elected to activate a load case, the User may specify initial movements for each anchor for that particular load case. To activate a load case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired load case. If this has not been done, the fields for the initial movements will be grayed out. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

A Movement – The numerical value entered in this field for each case by the User represents the movement along the A Axis imposed on the anchor from the installed to operating position for that case.

B Movement – The numerical value entered in this field for each case by the User represents the movement along the B Axis imposed on the anchor from the installed to operating position for that case.


97

C Movement – The numerical value entered in this field for each case by the User represents the movement along the C Axis imposed on the anchor from the installed to operating position for that case.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Initial Movements”, the User will find a data group entitled “Initial Rotations”. The default value for each field will be zero. The data is to be entered by the User on a case-by-case basis. In this release of TRIFLEX, six cases can be specified and processed one at a time or in combination. When the User has elected to activate a load case, the User may specify initial rotations for each anchor for that particular load case. To activate a load case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case. If this has not been done, the fields for the initial rotations will be grayed out. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

A Rotation – The numerical value entered in this field for each case by the User represents the rotation about the A Axis imposed on the anchor from the installed to operating position for that case.

B Rotation – The numerical value entered in this field for each case by the User represents the rotation about the B Axis imposed on the anchor from the installed to operating position for that case.

C Rotation – The numerical value entered in this field for each case by the User represents the rotation about the C Axis imposed on the anchor from the installed to operating position for that case.

ü Immediately below the “Initial Rotations” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Offset Material, Dimensions and Temperatures”. In the event that the User would prefer TRIFLEX to compute the anchor movements based upon the material of the anchor, the change in temperature of the material of the anchor and offset dimensions, then the User may enter this data and TRIFLEX will generate the anchor movements. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Material – The User can click on the drop down combo list in this field and then select the desired material from the list of available materials for the anchor casing. In the event that the desired material is not available in the list, the User should enter the desired movements in the fields noted above.

In the event that the User wishes to enter the properties for one or more materials in the library of materials available on the drop down combo list, all such entries are to be made through “Utilities” then “Databases” then “Materials”. This field is identical to the Material field that is found on the Pipe Properties dialog. The material selected by the User for the anchor casing may be different from the pipe material selected by the User on the Pipe Properties dialog. The material selected


98

by the User on the Pipe Properties dialog will be the default material for the anchor casing material.

Temperature – In this field, the User may enter the temperature of the anchor casing for each of six cases. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out).

ü The default value is the value for base temperature for the system of units selected by the User.

Offset Dimensions – The offset dimensions are the actual dimensions of the anchor casing from the actual fixed point from which growth or shrinkage originates to the node location identified by the User as the anchor point in the piping model. Anchor movements for this data point will be calculated by TRIFLEX based the anchor casing material, the change in temperature experienced by the anchor casing from the installed to operating conditions and the offset dimensions entered by the User. The default values for the offset dimensions will be zero.


99

3.2.1.4 Anchor Component, Vessel Properties

Figure 3.2.1.4-1 Setup Case Definition

To create a Vessel Drawing which is the Anchor shown as a Vessel. (Do NOT assume that this is a Vessel program in itself like WERCO. No this is a Vessel Drawing only.) The User must click on the Anchor Icon on the Component Toolbar on the left border of the dialog or click on Components on the main menu at the top of the dialog and then on Anchor on the resulting pull down menu. Upon either of these sequences of actions, a Anchor dialog with a series of related dialogs will be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

Then click on Vessel Properties Tab. The data is organized in related data groups on each and every dialog. In the upper part of the Vessel Properties dialog, a series of five data groups are shown. The first one is “Orientation”, then “Nozzle Location”, then “Head Type”, then “Anchor Location”, then “Pipe Attachment”.

Orientation:

Vertical. When selecting this the Vessel Orientation Vector (VDV) will place a 0 in the X (coordinate), 1 in the Y (coordinate), 0 in the Z (coordinate). Thereby making the Vessel Vertical.

Horizontal. When selecting this the Vessel Orientation Vector (VDV) will place a 1 in the X (coordinate), 0 in the Y (coordinate), 0 in the Z (coordinate). Thereby making the Vessel Horizontal on the X axis.


100

Horizontal. You can change the Vessel Orientation Vector (VDV) and place a: 0 in the X (coordinate), 0 in the Y (coordinate), 1 in the Z (coordinate). Thereby making the Vessel Horizontal on the Z axis.

Horizontal. You can change the Vessel Orientation Vector (VDV) and place a: 1 in the X (coordinate), 0 in the Y (coordinate), 1 in the Z (coordinate). Thereby making the Vessel Horizontal on the X - Z axis.

Skewed. When you select this the Vessel Orientation Vector (VDV) and place a: 1 in the X (coordinate), 1 in the Y (coordinate), 0 in the Z (coordinate). Thereby making the Vessel Skewed on the X - Y axis.

Practice on different ways of showing the vessel. Simply vary the placement of the 1’s in the Vessel Orientation (VDV) boxes.

Note: The piping still remains the same. That is if you were going along the +X axis to start with you will still be going along the +X axis with the piping model. The only thing that has changed is that you will now see a Vessel instead of a plate to represent the Anchor. Remember it is a Drawing ONLY.

Nozzle Location:

Positive Head This is where the nozzle will be shown. A positive or curved outward head will be shown. And the nozzle will be starting on that head.

Negative Head This is where the nozzle will be shown. A negative or curved inward head will be shown. And the nozzle will be starting on that head.

Shell This is where the nozzle will be shown. The shell of the Vessel or you could call it the cylinder of the Vessel will shown the nozzle. And the nozzle will be starting on that shell location.

Head Type;

Flat This is where the nozzle will be shown. A flat head will be shown. And the nozzle will be starting on that head.

Hemispherical This is where the nozzle will be shown. A Hemispherical or curved outward head will be shown. And the nozzle will be starting on that head.

Elliptical This is where the nozzle will be shown. An Elliptical or curved outward head will be shown. And the nozzle will be starting on that head.


101


102

Anchor Location:

Positive Head This is where the Anchor will be placed. A positive or curved outward head will be shown. And the Anchor will be starting on that head.

Negative Head This is where the Anchor will be placed. A negative or curved inward head will be shown. And the Anchor will be starting on that head.

Shell This is where the Anchor will be placed. The shell of the Vessel or you could call it the cylinder of the Vessel will have the Anchor. And the Anchor will be starting on that shell location.

Pipe Attachment:

Square - This is type of pipe attachment that will be shown

Rounded - This is type of pipe attachment that will be shown

Reentrant - This is type of pipe attachment that will be shown

Next comes the four boxes on the left center of the dialog box.

Diameter Diameter of the Vessel.

Length Length of the Vessel

Head Height Head Height of the Vessel Head

Head Thk Head Thickness of the Vessel Head

On the bottom left of the dialog box is where the Vessel Orientation (VDV)

Boxes are located.

X Coordinate

Y Coordinate

Z Coordinate

This was discussed with Orientation at the beginning of this section.


103

In the center and toward the right side of the dialog box you will find.

Angular Data: Angles measured CCW (Counter ClockWise) from the +Y direction looking back from the head of the VDV.

Nozzle Location:

Angle CCW from +Y on positive head. (in degrees)

Radial distance from positive head center. (in feet)

True Anchor (Vessel attachment) Location:

Angle CCW from +Y on negative head. (in degrees)

Radial distance from negative head center. (in feet)


104

3.2.1.5 Vessel Drawing Orientation

Twelve Examples of the use of Vessel Properties for Anchor (drawings)

(These examples are with the Vessel “Show Transparent” box checked)

(Example One) Vertical

Nozzle Location:

Angle CCW from +X on positive head. 90 (degrees)

Radial distance from positive head center. 2 (feet)


Angle CCW from +X on negative head. 0 (degrees)

Radial distance from negative head center. 0 (feet)


105

Figure 3.2.1.5-1 Example One

Figure 3.2.1.5-2 Description of Counter Clockwise Orientation

Y 2 Feet

90 degrees CCW

X

HEAD


106




107

(Example Two) Horizontal

Nozzle Location:

Angle CCW from +Y on positive head. 90 (degrees)



Angle CCW from +Y on negative head. 0 (degrees)



108

Figure 3.2.1.5-5 Example Two



109




110

(Example Three) Vertical

Nozzle Location:

Angle CCW from +X on positive head. 0 (degrees)



Angle CCW from +X on negative head. 0 (degrees)



111

Figure 3.2.1.5-16 Example Three



112


End of the Three Examples of Vessel Properties.


113

3.2.2 Pipe…..

Figure 3.2.2.0-1 Anchor Component, Pipe Properties Tab

3.2.2.1 Coding Piping Data, Piping Data

To enter a Pipe component, the User must click on the Pipe Icon on the Component Toolbar on the left border of the dialog or click on Components on the main menu at the top of the dialog and then on Pipe on the resulting pull down menu. Upon either of these sequences of actions, a Pipe dialog with a series of related dialogs will be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

The data is organized in related data groups on each and every dialog. In the upper left corner of the Pipe dialog, a data group entitled “Element” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

From Node – In this field, TRIFLEX will generate a Node Number equal to the To Node number for the previously entered component. If the node number generated by TRIFLEX is not the desired node number, then the User may select a node number from the drop down combo list in this field or enter a node number, as desired.

To Node - In this field, TRIFLEX will generate a Node Number based upon the From Node number and the node increment specified by the User in the Default Settings. If the Node Number generated by TRIFLEX is not the desired node number, the User may select a node number from the drop down combo list in this field or enter any node number desired.

Name – In this field, the User may specify any name that will fit within the field. This name indicator will likely assist the User or other interested parties in


114

identifying the significance of the node. Entry of the name in this field is optional.

ü Immediately below the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Dimension from “From Node” to “To Node”. The dimension(s) entered in this data group define the vector from the previous node point to the To Node Point (the end point) of the pipe being entered. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Delta X, Delta Y and Delta Z – If the User is specifying the first component after an anchor, TRIFLEX will assume an “X” dimension equal to one foot if English units are specified or .35 Meters if metric units are specified. If the assumed length is incorrect or if the delta dimension should be along another axis or along two or more axes, the User may simply enter the desired data in the Delta X, Delta Y and/or Delta Z fields.

Abs Length – TRIFLEX will automatically calculate the absolute length and display it in this field. If the vector is in the same direction as the previously entered component, then the User may enter the absolute length desired and TRIFLEX will calculate the Delta X, Delta Y and Delta Z dimensions automatically and will display them in the appropriate fields.

Use the Minimum Length - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to use the Minimum Length as calculated by TRIFLEX based upon the length of any preceding component, and then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Use the Minimum Length”. TRIFLEX will then replace the absolute length with the minimum required length. This is particularly useful when the Pipe being modeled follows a Bend or a Valve, Flange or Joint with the data point specified at a point other than the end point.

Minimum Length – This field is a display field only. In this field, TRIFLEX displays the minimum length that must be provided between the previous Node Point and the To Node location being entered by the User. The Absolute Length dimension entered by the User must be equal to or greater than the minimum length computed by TRIFLEX.

Number of Intermediate Nodes – If the User enters a number in this field, TRIFLEX will break the pipe into one more segment that the number of intermediate nodes specified in this field. In other words, if the User enters a 2 in this field, TRIFLEX will place two (2) intermediate nodes between the to node and the from node – TRIFLEX will break the pipe into three (3) segments.

Maximum Spacing – The User may specify the maximum spacing between nodes in this field. If the lengths of the pipe components generated by TRIFLEX when the number of intermediate nodes is used by TRIFLEX to generate the intermediate nodes is longer than the length specified by the User in this field,


115

then TRIFLEX will generate additional node points until the lengths between intermediate node points is less than the length specified by the User in this field.

To the immediate right of the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Cold Spring”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Cut Short – If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX to consider a “cut short”, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Cut Short” and then enter the amount of cut short in the field entitled “Cut Length”.

Cut Long – If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX to consider a “cut long”, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Cut Long” and then enter the amount of cut long in the field entitled “Cut Length”.

Cut Length – If the User has placed a check in the Cut Short or the Cut Long check boxes, then the value entered in this field will be the amount of the cut short or long considered by TRIFLEX.

Immediately to the right of the data group entitled “Element Data” and below the data group entitled “Cold Spring”, the User will find a data group entitled “Stress Intensification Factors”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are further defined below:

For “From Node” – If the User wishes to specify a numerical stress intensification factor on the beginning of the pipe component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field.

For “To Node” - If the User wishes to specify a numerical stress intensification factor on the end of the pipe component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field.

Immediately below the “Stress Intensification Factors” data group, the User will find additional data fields for miscellaneous data defined as follows:

Show Transparent – This box when checked will allow the anchor if drawn as a Vessel to be Transparent. The amount of Transparency can be changed by going to: Setup / Graphic Preferences / Transparency Adjustment.

Weight Off - If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX to consider the component being entered as weightless, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Weight Off”. The default is for weight to be considered.

Buoyancy - If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX to consider the effects of buoyancy on this component, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Buoyancy Calculations”. The density of the fluid surrounding the pipe should also be specified on the Setup / Modeling Defaults dialog. The default is for the effects of buoyancy not to be considered.


116

Immediately below the miscellaneous data fields, the User will find a data group entitled “Pipe Size”. In this data group, the User can see the pipe Diameter and schedule as entered on a different dialog for this component. If the User wishes to change either the pipe Diameter or the pipe schedule, the User must go to the Pipe Properties tab.

Property Ripple – When the User has modified one or more properties in the Pipe Data Tab, the User can instruct TRIFLEX to modify all subsequent occurrences of these properties that are in an unbroken series from the original revision forward by pressing the Property Ripple button.

Number of Copies – This box plus the next two boxes will allow the user to quickly model multiple components. Here in “Number of Copies” the user will put the number of Duplicate Copies of this particular Component he wishes to create.

Delta Dimensions apply to Each Copy – With the “Number of Copies” box selected above. The user will decide that each duplicate will have the same Delta Dimensions. This will create that number of components following this particular component. And of course will lengthen the span by these components.

Delta Dimensions apply to Entire Span – With the “Number of Copies” box selected above. The user will decide that each duplicate will use the Delta Dimension applied over the Entire Span. This will create that number of components but have their individual lengths divided by the total length, which is the Delta Dimensions given. This will create that number of components following this particular component. And of course have a shorter span.

Pipe Diameter – In this field, the Pipe Diameter specified for this component is displayed.

Pipe Schedule - In this field, the Pipe Schedule specified for this component is displayed.


117

3.2.2.2 Automatic placement of Multiple Node Points

Recently TRIFLEX has added the following to the Pipe Data Tab screen

Figure 3.2.2.2-1 Automatic placement of Multiple Node Pts.

Note:

Pipe Data Tab

Number of Copies:

Delta Dimensions apply to Each Copy.

Delta Dimensions apply to Entire Span.

Suppose you want to have 100 feet of pipe with a restraint every 10 feet.

With the above mentioned tools you can do that very easily.

Simply :

Pipe Data Tab


118

Number of Copies: 10

Delta Dimensions apply to Each Copy. (select this radio button)

with your DX = 10 ft

Delta Dimensions apply to Entire Span. (leave blank)

Restraint Tab

Select your restraint.

Automatic placement of Multiple Node points are completed.


119

3.2.2.3 Jacketed Pipe

The best way to cover Jacketed Pipe is by an example.

Follow through this short example for a Jacketed Steam Line shown below.

Core : 4 inch nominal pipe

Twall = 0.237 inch

No insulation on core pipe

Jacket: 6 inch nominal pipe

Twall = 0.28 inch

No insulation on jacket pipe.

Figure 3.2.2.3-1 Jacketed Steam Line, Core 4”, Jacket 6”

1. Start with a Normal Anchor for the core pipe of 4” nominal pipe.

2. Add a flange on the 4” pipe.

3. Add the 4” nominal pipe.


120




121


4. Before you get to the elbow remember to model a “Release Element”.



122



5. Then the core piping elbow. This must be a Long Radius Elbow.


123



6. Finish the core piping with the Flange. This is a 4” Diameter flange.


124



7. Now start the Jacket pipe at the end of the First Flange. Note that NO special connection node is required for the Jacket pipe to the Flange.

8. But make sure you Check the box marked “Show Transparent” on the Pipe Data Tab. Remember that you can vary the amount of Transparency by going to:

“Setup / Graphic Preferences / Transparency Adjustment” from the pull down menus..


125




126



9. When adding the elbow on the Jacket pipe it only needs to be a short radius elbow.


127



10 Note that the final connecting point connects to the 4” Flange. No special connecting point is necessary. The only thing to be careful of is your Node point number scheme. Of course the placement of the Release element must be at the correct place to minimize the pipe stress.


128

3.2.2.4 Discussion on the Release element for Jacketed Pipe

Figure 3.2.2.4-1 Release element for Jacketed Pipe

The Release Element.

Note the radio button on the left for “Jacketed Piping Spacer”.

The translational Stiffness coordinate boxes must be correct.

Translational X-axis Y-axis Z-axis

Stiffness Free Rigid Rigid

Rotational

Stiffness Free Free Free

What the above is saying is that the release element is on the X-axis pipe.

And it has a gap in the Y-axis and in the Z-axis. Therefore allowing the inner or

Core line connecting to this release element to move along the X-axis, but not along the Y-axis or the Z-axis.

The inner or core line can rotate. The release element or sometimes called a spacer or spider is allowed to rotate in the three planes due to the gap between the spacer and the jacket pipe. This is usually 1/8 of an inch.


129

3.2.3 Elbow or Bend

Figure 3.2.3.0-1 Coding Elbow Data, Elbow data Tab

3.2.3.1 Coding Elbow Data, Elbow Data Tab

To enter an Elbow or Bend component, the User must click on the Elbow Icon on the Component Toolbar on the left border of the dialog or click on Components on the main menu at the top of the dialog and then on Elbow on the resulting pull down menu. Upon either of these sequences of actions, an Elbow dialog with a series of related dialogs will be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

The data is organized in related data groups on each and every dialog. In the upper left corner of the Elbow dialog, a data group entitled “Elbow/Bend Element” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:


Tangent Intersection Node - In this field, TRIFLEX will generate a Node Number based upon the From Node number and the node increment specified by the User in the Default Settings. If the Node Number generated by TRIFLEX is not the desired node number, the User may select a node number from the drop down combo list in this field or enter any node number desired.


130

Name – In this field, the User may specify any name that will fit within the field. This name indicator will likely assist the User or other interested parties in identifying the significance of the node. Entry of the name in this field is optional.

To the immediate right of the “Elbow/Bend Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Elbow/Bend Properties”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Elbow or Bend and Fitting Thickness – The first selection to be made by the User is whether the component is an Elbow or a Bend. The default selection is “Elbow”. The radio button just to the left of the Elbow label will be selected indicating that this is the default selection. When the User selects Elbow, the User may also specify the fitting thickness, if it is different from the pipe wall thickness. The default fitting thickness will be the standard pipe wall thickness. The fitting thickness will be used only for the elbow itself, not for the preceding pipe wall thickness, if any. If the User wishes to enter a Bend, the User must select the radio button just to the left of the Bend label.

Long Radius / Short Radius / User Defined Radius – In the next row of fields, the User must select one radio button. The alternatives are Long Radius (the bend radius will be set to 1.5 times the nominal pipe Diameter) or Short Radius (the bend radius will be set to 1.0 times the nominal pipe Diameter) or User Defined Radius in which the User may specify the desired bend radius or bend radius ratio. The default is set by TRIFLEX to Long Radius.

When the User selects either Long Radius or Short Radius, the bend radius ratio and the bend radius to be used by TRIFLEX will be displayed in the Bend Radius and Bend Radius Ratio fields just below the Long and Short Radius radio buttons. Note that these fields are grayed out and the User may not edit the data in these fields. The data in these fields is calculated by TRIFLEX based upon the Long or Short selection by the User.

When the User selects User Defined Radius, the bend radius ratio and the bend radius to be used by TRIFLEX must be entered by the User. The Bend Radius and Bend Radius Ratio fields are just below the Long and Short Radius radio buttons. Note that these fields are not grayed out now and the User must enter the desired data in these fields.

Number of Miter Cuts – If the User wishes to define the entered bend as a Miter Bend, then the User should specify the number of miter cuts in the field provided. TRIFLEX will automatically determine if the miter bend is closely spaced or widely spaced and the appropriate equations as defined in the piping codes will be used by TRIFLEX. Note that Restraints may not be specified on a widely spaced miter bend when specifying more than 1 miter point.


131

Number of Bend Segments – If the User has entered a bend, TRIFLEX will split the bend into two segments each equal to one half of the angle. If the User wants TRIFLEX to break the bend into more than two segments, the User may specify the number of segments desired and TRIFLEX will break the bend into the desired number of arcs. Note that a restraint may not be entered on a bend consisting of more than two bend segments or arcs.

Immediately below the “Elbow/Bend Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Dimens ion from “From Node” to “Tangent Intersection Point”. The dimension(s) entered in this data group define the vector from the previous node point to the Tangent Intersection Point of the elbow or bend being entered. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Delta X, Delta Y and Delta Z – If the User is specifying the first component after an anchor, TRIFLEX will assume an “X” dimension equal to the minimum allowed for a ninety (90) degree elbow based upon the properties already entered by the User. If the assumed length is incorrect or if the delta dimension should be along another axis or along two or more axes or if it is to be longer, the User may simply enter the desired data in the Delta X, Delta Y and/or Delta Z fields.


Use the Minimum Length - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to use the Minimum Length as calculated by TRIFLEX based upon the length of any preceding component, and then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Use the Minimum Length”. TRIFLEX will then replace the absolute length with the minimum required length. This is particularly useful when the Elbow or Bend being modeled follows a Bend or a Valve, Flange or Joint with the data point specified at a point other than the end point.

Minimum Length – This field is a display field only. In this field, TRIFLEX displays the minimum length that must be provided between the previous Node Point and the To Tangent Intersection Point Node location being entered by the User. The Absolute Length dimension entered by the User must be equal to or greater than the minimum length computed by TRIFLEX.

Number of Intermediate Nodes – TRIFLEX will break the elbow/bend and preceding pipe into one more segment that the number of intermediate nodes specified by the User in this field. In other words, if the User enters a 2 in this field, TRIFLEX will place two (2) intermediate nodes between the tangent intersection point and the previous or from node – TRIFLEX will break the


132

preceding pipe into three (3) segments. Note that an intermediate node point cannot be placed on the bend itself; it must be on the preceding pipe component.

Maximum Spacing – The User may specify the maximum spacing between nodes in this field. If the lengths of the pipe components generated by TRIFLEX when the number of intermediate nodes is used by TRIFLEX to generate the intermediate nodes is longer than the length specified by the User in this field, then TRIFLEX will generate additional node points until the lengths between intermediate node points is less than the length specified by the User in this field.

Immediately to the right of the data group entitled “Dimension from “From Node” to “Tangent Intersection Point”, the User will find data group entitled “Dimension from “Tangent Intersection Point” to “Next Node”. The dimension(s) entered in this data group define the vector from the Tangent Intersection Point of the elbow or bend being entered to the Next Node Point. The next node point may be at any point on the following pipe component or on the following valve or flange or joint or on the following elbow, etc. TRIFLEX will default to delta dimension that will yield a ninety-degree bend or elbow and will be in the most “Y” direction by default. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are further defined below:

Delta X, Delta Y and Delta Z – A length equal to the bend radius is defaulted to by TRIFLEX. If this dimension is incorrect or if the delta dimension should be along another axis or along two or more axes or if it is to be longer, the User may simply enter the desired data in the Delta X, Delta Y and/or Delta Z fields.

Abs Length – Given the Delta X, Delta Y and Delta Z dimensions, TRIFLEX will automatically calculate the absolute length and display it in this field.

Immediately to the right of the data group entitled “Dimension from Tangent Intersection Point” to “Next Node”, the User will find a data group entitled “Flanged Ends”. Two check boxes are provided for the User to indicate if the ends are considered to be flanged or not. If either end or both ends are checked, TRIFLEX will modify the flexibility of the bend or elbow in accordance with the provisions of the specified piping code. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are further defined below:

Near End - If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX that the “Near End” of the elbow or bend is to be considered as flanged, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Near End”.

Far End - If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX that the “Far End” of the elbow or bend is to be considered as flanged, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of “Far End”.


133

Immediately below the data group entitled “Flanged Ends”, the User will find a data group entitled “SI Factors and Flex Factor”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are further defined below:

For “From Node” – If the User wishes to specify a numerical stress intensification factor on the beginning of the pipe section preceding the elbow or bend defined in this component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field.

For “Bend” - If the User wishes to specify a special stress intensification factor on the elbow or bend defined in this component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field.

Bend Flex Factor - If the User wishes to specify a special flexibility factor for the elbow or bend defined in this component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field.

Immediately below the data groups entitled “Flanged Ends” and “Dimension from Tangent Intersection Point” to “Next Node”, the User will find a data group entitled “Restraint Attachment Point on Bend Centerline”. In this data group, the User can tell TRIFLEX where on the bend or elbow centerline the User wishes to attach a restraint. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are further defined below:

Near - If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX to attach the entered restraint on the centerline of the elbow or bend at the near end of the elbow or bend, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Near”.

Mid - If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX to attach the entered restraint on the centerline of the elbow or bend at the mid point of the elbow or bend, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Mid”.

Far - If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX to attach the entered restraint on the centerline of the elbow or bend at the far end of the elbow or bend, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Far”.

Angle Deg - If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX to attach the entered restraint on the centerline of the elbow or bend at a specific angle from the near end of the elbow or bend, then the User should enter the number of degrees from the Near End to the attachment point in the blank provide.

Immediately below the Dimension data groups, the User will find a data group entitled “Pipe Size”. In this data group, the User can see the pipe Diameter and schedule as entered on a different dialog for this component. If the User wishes to change either the pipe Diameter or the pipe schedule, the User must go to the Pipe Properties tab.


134



Immediately to the right of the “Pipe Size” data group, the User will find additional data fields for miscellaneous data defined as follows:





135

3.2.4 Branch Connection

Figure 3.2.4.0-1 Coding Branch Connection, Branch Connection Tab

3.2.4.1 Coding Branch Connection, Branch Connection Tab

To enter a Branch Connection component, the User must click on the Branch Connection Icon on the Component Toolbar on the left border of the dialog or click on Components on the main menu at the top of the dialog and then on Branch Connection on the resulting pull down menu. Upon either of these sequences of actions, a Branch Connection dialog with a series of related dialogs will be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

The data is organized in related data groups on each and every dialog. In the upper left corner of the Branch Connection dialog, a data group entitled “Element” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:




136


Immediately below the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Dimension from “From Node” to “To Node”. The dimension(s) entered in this data group define the vector from the previous node point to the To Node Point (the end point) of the Branch Connection being entered. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Delta X, Delta Y and Delta Z – If the User is specifying the first component after an anchor, TRIFLEX will assume an “X” dimension equal to one foot if English units are specified or .35 Meters if metric units are specified. If the assumed length is incorrect or if the delta dimension should be along another axis or along two or more axes, the User may simply enter the desired data in the Delta X, Delta Y and/or Delta Z fields.


Use the Minimum Length - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to use the Minimum Length as calculated by TRIFLEX based upon the length of any preceding component, and then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Use the Minimum Length”. TRIFLEX will then replace the absolute length with the minimum required length. This is particularly useful when the Pipe being modeled follows a Bend or a Valve, Flange or Joint with the data point specified at a point other than the end point.


Number of Intermediate Nodes – If the User enters a number in this field, TRIFLEX will break the pipe leading into the Branch Connection into one more segment that the number of intermediate nodes specified in this field. In other words, if the User enters a 2 in this field, TRIFLEX will place two (2) intermediate nodes between the To node and the From node – TRIFLEX will break the pipe leading into the Branch Connection into three (3) segments.

Maximum Spacing – The User may specify the maximum spacing between nodes in this field. If the lengths of the pipe leading into the Branch Connection


137

component generated by TRIFLEX when the number of intermediate nodes is used by TRIFLEX to generate the intermediate nodes is longer than the length specified by the User in this field, then TRIFLEX will generate additional node points until the lengths between intermediate node points is less than the length specified by the User in this field.

To the immediate right of the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Branch Connection Geometry”. The User may select one radio button and, in some selections, additional data fields will be made active for the User to enter additional data as defined below. The User is to code a branch connection component only the first time the User defines the branch connection as a To Node. If the User codes away from the branch connection or codes into the branch connection again, the User need only define these members as Pipe components and no Stress Intensification Factors need be indicated. TRIFLEX will automatically intensify all three branches of a branch connection.

Welding Tee S.I. Only (Tc > 1.5 T) – The Welding Tee S.I. Only radio button is the default selection. By accepting the radio button “Welding Tee S.I. Only”, the User instructs TRIFLEX to consider the end of the Pipe defined in this component to be a branch intersection and for all three pipes intersecting at this point to be intensified by the applicable piping code stress intensification factors for a welding tee.

Weld-in Contour Insert (Vesselet® or Sweep-o-let®) - By selecting the radio button “Weld-in Contour Insert”, the User instructs TRIFLEX to consider the end of the Pipe defined in this component to be a branch intersection and for all three pipes intersecting at this point to be intensified by the applicable piping code stress intensification factors for a weld-in contour insert.

Weld-on Fitting (Pipet® or Weld-o-let®) - By selecting the radio button “Weld-on Fitting, the User instructs TRIFLEX to consider the end of the Pipe defined in this component to be a branch intersection and for all three pipes intersecting at this point to be intensified by the applicable piping code stress intensification factors for a weld-on fitting.

Fabricated Tee - By selecting the radio button “Fabricated Tee”, the User instructs TRIFLEX to consider the end of the Pipe defined in this component to be a branch intersection and for all three pipes intersecting at this point to be intensified by the applicable piping code stress intensification factors for a fabricated tee. When the Fabricated Tee radio button is selected, the reinforcing pad thickness field is made active for the User to enter a reinforcing pad thickness, if additional reinforcement is provided at the branch intersection. Entry of the reinforcing pad thickness is optional.

Extruded Tee (Tc < 1.5T) (not an extrusion tee) - By selecting the radio button “Extruded Tee (Tc < 1.5T”, the User instructs TRIFLEX to consider the end of the Pipe defined in this component to be a branch intersection and for all three


138

pipes intersecting at this point to be intensified by the applicable piping code stress intensification factors for an extruded tee. When the Extruded Tee radio button is selected, the crotch radius field is made active for the User to enter the applicable crotch radius. Entry of the crotch radius is mandatory. Note: An extrusion tee is not the same as an extruded tee. If the User has an extrusion tee, it is highly recommended that the User consult with the vendor to obtain the correct stress intensification factors.

Latrolet® (per Bonney Forge) - By selecting the radio button “Latrolet®”, the User instructs TRIFLEX to consider the end of the Pipe defined in this component to be a branch intersection and for all three pipes intersecting at this point to be intensified by the applicable piping code stress intensification factors for a Latrolet.

ASME Branch Connections - By selecting the radio button “ASME Branch Connections”, the User instructs TRIFLEX to consider the end of the Pipe defined in this component to be a branch intersection.

When the “ASME Branch Connections” radio button is selected, TRIFLEX will activate the SI Factors according to ASME Code data group that can be found just below the Stress Intensification Factor data group on the right edge of the dialog. TRIFLEX will default to ASME B31.1 Fig. D1 (a). This means that TRIFLEX will calculate the stress intensification factors in accordance with the equation set forth in ASME B31.1 Fig. D1 (a). If the User wishes, ASME B31.1 Fig. D1 (b), ASME B31.1 Fig. D1 (c) or ASME B31.1 Fig. D1 (d) may be selected by clicking on the radio button just to the left of each such field. For more information about these equations, please refer to ASME B31.1 Fig. D1.

User Defined - When the radio button “User Defined” is selected, TRIFLEX will activate the “for To Node” SI Factor in the stress intensification factor data group. See the discussion for this data group for more details.

Immediately below the “Branch Connection Geometry” data group, the User will find additional data fields for miscellaneous data defined as follows:

Weight Off - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the component being entered as weightless, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Weight Off”. The default is for weight to be considered.

Buoyancy - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of buoyancy on this component, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Buoyancy Calculations”. The density of the fluid surrounding the Branch Connection should also be specified on the Setup / Modeling Defaults dialog. The default is for the effects of buoyancy not to be considered.


139

Immediately to the right of the data group entitled “Branch Connection Geometry”, the User will find a data group entitled “Stress Intensification Factor”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are further defined below:

For “From Node” – If the User wishes to specify a numerical stress intensification factor on the beginning of the Branch Connection component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field.

For “To Node” - If the User wishes to specify a numerical stress intensification factor on the end of the Branch Connection component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field. This value will be used on all pipes intersecting at this branch connection point.

Immediately below the “Stress Intensification Factor” data group, the User will find a data group entitled “SI Factor according to ASME Code”. The details of this data group have been given under the ASME Branch Connections discussion.

“SI Factor according to ASME Code”

ANSI B31.1, fig.D.1 (a)

ANSI B31.1, fig.D.1 (b)

ANSI B31.1, fig.D.1 (c)

ANSI B31.1, fig.D.1 (d)

Immediately below the “SI Factor according to ASME Code” data group, the User will find a data group entitled “Pipe Size”. In this data group, the User can see the Pipe Diameter and schedule as entered on a different dialog for this component. If the User wishes to change either the Pipe Diameter or the Pipe schedule, the User must go to the Pipe Properties tab.





140

3.2.5 Valves…..

Figure 3.2.5.0-1 Coding Valve Data, Valve Data Tab

3.2.5.1 Coding Valve Data, Valve Data Tab

To enter a Valve component with or without a preceding Pipe, the User must click on the Valve Icon on the Component Toolbar on the left border of the dialog or click on Components on the main menu at the top of the dialog and then on Valve on the resulting pull down menu. Upon either of these sequences of actions, a Valve dialog with a series of related dialogs will be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

The data is organized in related data groups on each and every dialog. In the upper left corner of the Valve dialog, a data group entitled “Element” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:




141


Immediately below the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Dimension from “From Node” to “To Node”. The dimension(s) entered in this data group define the vector from the previous node point to the To Node Point (the point where the User is placing the Node) of the valve being entered. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Delta X, Delta Y and Delta Z – If the User is specifying the first component after an anchor, TRIFLEX will assume an “X” dimension equal to one foot, if English units are specified, or .35 Meters, if metric units are specified. If the node being defined follows another component other than an anchor, the assumed dimension will be along the vector line defined by the previous component. If the assumed length is incorrect or if the delta dimension should be along another axis or along two or three axes, the User may enter the desired data in the Delta X, Delta Y and/or Delta Z fields.

Abs Length – TRIFLEX will automatically calculate the absolute length and display it in this field. If the vector is in the same direction as the previously entered component, then the User may enter the absolute length desired and TRIFLEX will automatically calculate the Delta X, Delta Y and Delta Z dimensions and will display them in the appropriate fields.

Use the Minimum Length - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to use the Minimum Length as calculated by TRIFLEX based upon the length of the valve, any flanges and the preceding component, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Use the Minimum Length”. TRIFLEX will then replace the absolute length with the minimum required length. This is particularly useful when the User desires to place a valve fitting make-up with the previous component and it eliminates the need for the User to perform manual math calculations.


Number of Intermediate Nodes – If the User enters a number in this field, TRIFLEX will break the pipe preceding the valve into one more segment that the number of intermediate nodes specified in this field. In other words, if the User enters a 2 in this field, TRIFLEX will place two (2) intermediate nodes between the to node and the from end of the valve. TRIFLEX will then break the pipe into three (3) segments.


142


Immediately below the data group entitled “Dimension from “From Node” to “To Node”, the User will find a data group entitled “Valve Type”. In this data group, the User must instruct TRIFLEX whether the valve is a flanged valve or a welded valve.

Flanged Valve – The flanged valve radio button is the default selection. By accepting the radio button “Flanged Valve”, the User is telling TRIFLEX that a flanged valve is desired.

Welded Valve - To tell TRIFLEX that a Welded Valve is desired, by clicking on the radio button immediately preceding “Welded Valve”, the User is telling TRIFLEX that a welded valve is desired.

To the immediate right of the “Element” data group, the User will find a data group entitled “Valve Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Type – The User must select a Valve Type from the drop down combo list in this field. The default valve type is the Flanged AAAT Standard Valve. From our staff’s past experience, this valve is an average valve. The Type of valve, along with the Rating, allows TRIFLEX to search through the valve database to find the desired valve. The current TRIFLEX Valve database consists of four flanged valve types and four welded valve types. In addition, the User may select “User Specified” in order to be able to enter their own weight and length. The valve types available in TRIFLEX are:

Flanged – AAAT Std. Valve, Globe Valve, Gate Valve, Swing Check Valve and User Specified

Welded - AAAT Std. Valve, Globe Valve, Gate Valve, Swing Check Valve and User Specified

Class Rating - The User must select a class rating from the drop down combo list in this field. The available class ratings are 150, 300, 400, 600, 900 and 1500. Given the valve type and the class rating, TRIFLEX will look up the appropriate corresponding weight, length, and insulation factor to be used in the calculations.

Valve Length – The data shown in this field is looked up from the database by TRIFLEX or, if the User Specified valve is selected, the User can enter a desired value in this field.


143

Valve Weight – The data shown in this field is looked up from the database by TRIFLEX or, if the User Specified valve is selected, the User can enter a desired value in this field.

Operator Weight – the User enters the value shown in this field. The weight entered will be applied by TRIFLEX at the centroid of the valve.

Insulation Factor (ft, mm, m, mm) - if the User has specified the Type and Class Rating, the program will extract the insulation factor for the specified valve from the database. The User can input an insulation factor by overriding the value extracted from the database. The insulation factor is a value that when multiplied times the insulation weight per unit length will result in the weight of insulation to be placed on the valve. For example, an insulation factor of 1.5 means that the weight of insulation to be added to the valve weight will be equivalent to the weight of one foot of insulation on the adjacent pipe times a 1.5 factor when using the ENG input units.

If the User wants to enter a valve length or a valve weight or an insulation factor that is different than those selected by TRIFLEX from the TRIFLEX database, then the User should select User Specified on the Valve Type and then enter the desired values.

To the immediate right of the “Valve Data” data group, the User will find a data group entitled “Flange Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Type – The User must select a Flange Type from the drop down combo list in this field. The default valve type is the AAAT Standard Flange. From our staff’s past experience, this flange is an average flange. The Type of flange, along with the Rating, allows TRIFLEX to search through the flange database to find the desired flange. The current TRIFLEX Flange database consists of five flange types. In addition, the User may select “User Specified” in order to be able to enter their own weight and length. The flange types available in TRIFLEX are:

AAAT Std. Flange, Blind Flange, Lap Joint Flange, Slip-on Flange, Weld Neck Flange and User Specified.

Flange Length – The data shown in this field is looked up from the database by TRIFLEX or, if the User Specified flange is selected, the User can enter a desired value in this field.

Flange Weight – The data shown in this field is looked up from the database by TRIFLEX or, if the User Specified flange is selected, the User can enter a desired value in this field.

Insulation Factor (ft, mm, m, mm) - if the User has specified the Type and Class Rating, the program will extract the insulation factor for the specified flange from the database. The User can input an insulation factor by overriding the


144

value extracted from the database. The insulation factor is a value that when multiplied times the insulation weight per unit length of adjoining pipe will result in the weight of insulation to be placed on the flange. For example, an insulation factor of 1.5 means that the weight of insulation to be added to the flange weight will be equivalent to the weight of one foot of insulation on the adjacent pipe times a 1.5 factor when using the ENGLISH (or Imperial) input units.

If the User wants to enter a flange length or a flange weight or an insulation factor that is different than those selected by TRIFLEX from the TRIFLEX database, then the User should select User Specified on the Flange Type and then enter the desired values.

Flange on “From End” - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to have a flange on the beginning end or from end of the valve, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Flange on From End”.

Flange on “To End” - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to have a flange on the far end or to end of the valve, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Flange on To End”.

Immediately below the data groups entitled “Valve Data” and “Flange Data”, the User will find a data group entitled “Delta Dimension Coded To”. If the User has selected a Flanged Valve in the Valve Type, then the Flanged Valve data fields on the right of this data group will be active and the Welded Valve data fields on the left of this data group will be inactive. If the User has selected a Welded Valve in the Valve Type, then the Welded Valve data fields on the left of this data group will be active and the Flanged Valve data fields on the right of this data group will be inactive.

The fields in which data can be entered in this data group will be either for Welded Valve or Flanged Valve exclusively as further defined below:

Welded Valve

Far End Weld Point – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the Far End Weld Point of the valve, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Far End Weld Point”. When the User selects this modeling option, the entire valve length precedes the Node Point. When the User selects a welded valve, this node point location is the default.

Mid Point of the Valve – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the Mid Point of the valve, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Mid Point of the Valve”. When the User selects this modeling option, one half of the valve length precedes the Node Point and one half of the valve follows the node point. In such case, the User must not specify a delta dimension to the next Node Point of less than one half of the valve length


145

Near End Weld Point – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the Near End Weld Point of the valve, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Near End Weld Point”. When the User selects this modeling option, the entire length of the valve follows the Node Point. In such case, the User must not specify a delta dimension to the next Node Point of less than the valve length

Flanged Valve

Far End Weld Point – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the Weld Point of the flange on the far end of the valve, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Far End Weld Point”. When the User selects this modeling option, the entire valve length precedes the Node Point. When the User selects a flanged valve, this node point location is the default.

Far End Flange Face – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the flange face on the far end of the valve, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Far End Flange Face”. When the User selects this modeling option, the entire valve length precedes the Node Point and the far end flange follows the node point.

Mid Point of the Valve – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the Mid Point of the valve, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Mid Point of the Valve”. When the User selects this modeling option, one half of the valve length plus the near end flange length precedes the Node Point and one half of the valve length plus the far end flange length follows the node point. In such case, the User must not specify a delta dimension to the next Node Point of less than one half of the valve length plus the far end flange length.

Near End Flange Face – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the flange face on the near end of the valve, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Near End Flange Face”. When the User selects this modeling option, the entire length of the valve plus the far end flange length follows the Node Point. In such case, the User must not specify a delta dimension to the next Node Point of less than the valve length plus the far end flange length.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Delta Dimension Coded To - Welded Valve”, the User will find additional data fields for miscellaneous data defined as follows:

SI Factor for “From Node” – If the User wishes to specify a numerical stress intensification factor on the beginning of the pipe section preceding the valve defined in this component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field.


146



Immediately to the right of the miscellaneous data fields, the User will find a data group entitled “Pipe Size”. In this data group, the User can see the pipe Diameter and schedule as entered on a different dialog for this component. If the User wishes to change either the pipe Diameter or the pipe schedule, the User must go to the Pipe Properties tab.





147

3.2.6 Flanges

Figure 3.2.6.0-1 Coding Flange Data, Flange Data Tab

3.2.6.1 Coding Flange Data, Flange Data Tab

ü To enter a Flange component with or without a preceding Pipe, the User must click on the Flange Icon on the Component Toolbar on the left border of the dialog or click on Components on the main menu at the top of the dialog and then on Flange on the resulting pull down menu. Upon either of these sequences of actions, a Flange dialog with a series of related dialogs will be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

The data is organized in related data groups on each and every dialog. In the upper left corner of the Flange dialog, a data group entitled “Element” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:


To Node - In this field, TRIFLEX will generate a Node Number based upon the From Node number and the node increment specified by the User in the Default Settings. If the Node Number generated by TRIFLEX is not the desired node


148

number, the User may select a node number from the drop down combo list in this field or enter any node number desired.


ü Immediately below the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Dimension from “From Node” to “To Node”. The dimension(s) entered in this data group define the vector from the previous node point to the To Node Point (the point where the User is placing the Node) of the flange being entered. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:



Use the Minimum Length - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to use the Minimum Length as calculated by TRIFLEX based upon the length of the flange(s) and the preceding component, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Use the Minimum Length”. TRIFLEX will then replace the absolute length with the minimum required length. This is particularly useful when the User desires to place a flange or flange pair fitting make-up with the previous component and it eliminates the need for the User to perform manual math calculations.


Number of Intermediate Nodes – If the User enters a number in this field, TRIFLEX will break the pipe preceding the flange into one more segment that the


149

number of intermediate nodes specified in this field. In other words, if the User enters a 2 in this field, TRIFLEX will place two (2) intermediate nodes between the to node and the from end of the flange. TRIFLEX will then break the pipe into three (3) segments.


ü To the immediate right of the “Element” data group, the User will find a data group entitled “Flange Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Type – The User must select a Flange Type from the drop down combo list in this field. The default flange type is the AAAT Standard Flange. From our staff’s past experience, this flange is an average flange. The Type of flange, along with the Rating, allows TRIFLEX to search through the flange database to find the desired flange. The current TRIFLEX Flange database consists of five flange types. The flange types available in TRIFLEX are: AAAT Std. Flange, Blind Flange, Lap Joint Flange, Slip On Flange & Weld Neck Flange

Class Rating - The User must select a class rating from the drop down combo list in this field. The available class ratings are 150, 300, 400, 600, 900 and 1500. Given the flange type and the class rating, TRIFLEX will look up the appropriate corresponding weight, length, and insulation factor to be used in the calculations.

Flange Length – The data shown in this field is looked up from the data base by TRIFLEX or can be entered (over-typed) by the User, if desired.

Flange Weight – The data shown in this field is looked up from the data base by TRIFLEX or can be entered (over-typed) by the User, if desired.

Insulation Factor (ft, mm, m, mm) - if the User has specified the Type and Class Rating, the program will extract the insulation factor for the specified flange from the database. The User can input an insulation factor by overriding the value extracted from the database. The insulation factor is a value that when multiplied times the insulation weight per unit length will result in the weight of insulation to be placed on the flange. For example, an insulation factor of 1.5 means that the weight of insulation to be added to the flange weight will be equivalent to the weight of one foot of insulation on the adjacent pipe times a 1.5 factor when using the ENG input units.

ü If the User wants to enter a flange length or a flange weight or an insulation factor that is different than those selected by TRIFLEX from the


150

TRIFLEX database, then the User should select User Specified on the Flange Type and then enter the desired values.

Number of Flanges - The User can specify one flange or two flanges by clicking on the radio button in front of one or two. TRIFLEX defaults to two.

ü When the User selects One Flange, the User will also then be given the opportunity to define the orientation of the flange face. TRIFLEX defaults to a flange facing forward or in the direction that the User is coding. For the User to instruct TRIFLEX to orient the flange face in the From direction, the User must place a check mark in the check box just to the left of the field entitled “Flange is facing backward”.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Flange Data”, the User will find a data group entitled “Delta Dimension Coded To”. If the User has selected One Flange in the Number of Flanges radio buttons, then the Single Flange data fields at the top of this data group will be active and the Flange Pair data fields at the bottom of this data group will be inactive. If the User has selected Two Flanges in the Number of Flanges radio buttons, then the Flange Pair data fields at the bottom of this data group will be active and the Single Flange data fields at the top of this data group will be inactive.

The fields in which data can be entered in these data groups will be either for Single Flange or Flange Pair exclusively as further defined below:

Single Flange

Far End of Flange – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the Far End of the flange, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Far End of Flange”. When the User selects this modeling option, the entire flange length precedes the Node Point. When the User selects a single flange, this node point location is the default.

Near End of Flange – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the Near End of the flange, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Near End of Flange”. When the User selects this modeling option, the entire length of the flange follows the Node Point. In such case, the User must not specify a delta dimension to the next Node Point of less than the flange length

Flange Pair

Far End Weld Point – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the Weld Point of the flange on the far end of the flange pair, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Far End Weld Point”. When the User selects this modeling option, the entire flange pair length precedes the Node Point. When the User selects a flange pair, this node point location is the default.


151

Mid Point of Flange Pair – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the Mid Point of the flange pair, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Mid Point of the Flange Pair”. When the User selects this modeling option, the length of one flange precedes the Node Point and the length of one flange follows the node point. In such case, the User must not specify a delta dimension to the next Node Point of less than one flange length.

Near End Weld Point – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the Weld Point of the flange on the near end of the flange pair, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Near End Weld Point”. When the User selects this modeling option, the entire length of the flange pair follows the Node Point. In such case, the User must not specify a delta dimension to the next Node Point of less than the length of the flange pair.

ü Immediately to the right of the “Flange Data” data fields, the User will find a data group entitled “Pipe Size”. In this data group, the User can see the pipe Diameter and schedule as entered on a different dialog for this component. If the User wishes to change either the pipe Diameter or the pipe schedule, the User must go to the Pipe Properties tab.



ü Immediately below the data group entitled “Pipe Size”, the User will find additional data fields for miscellaneous data defined as follows:

SI Factor for “From Node” – If the User wishes to specify a numerical stress intensification factor on the beginning of the pipe section preceding the flange defined in this component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field.


Weight Off - If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX to consider the component being entered as weightless, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Weight Off”. The default is for weight to be considered



152

Figure 3.2.6.1-1 Flange Data Tab, Rupture Disk Holder

Rupture Disk Holder – When the User selects the box in the dialog marked “Rupture Disk Holder” TRIFLEX will then give the User the options shown in Figure 3.2.6.1-1 above. That is; Holder Thickness, and Holder Weight.


153

3.2.6.2 Flange Loading Input Data Setup

Figure 3.2.6.2-1 Flange Loading Input Data Setup

Figure 3.2.6.2-2 Flange Loading Input Data Setup


154

Section VIII, Division 1 Code Rules state that …"proper allowance shall be made if connections are subject to external loads other than external pressure." TRIFLEX will convert the external loadings to equivalent pressure and add it to the design pressure to compare flange design pressures with ANSI B16.5 or API Standard 605.

This dialog box enables the User to enter values for:

Flange Data Point: This field enables the User to assign a number for each significant location.

Flange Material: This field enables the User to enter the flange material required by the User or according to Code.

ANSI Flange rating: This field enables the User to specify the flange rating/class as specified by the User or according to Code. (Ratings are 75, 150, 300,400, 600, 1500, or 2500.)

Design Temperature: This field enables the User to specify the design temperature for the temperature of the flange.

Gasket Width: This field enables the User to specify the width of the gasket as specified by the User or according to Code.

Gasket Inside Diameter: This field enables the User to specify the inside Diameter of the opening of the gasket as specified by the User or according to Code.

Safety Factor: This field enables the User to specify the safety factor for the materials. Please refer to the pertinent Code/Standards for the correct allowable factor.


155

3.2.7 Reducers

Figure 3.2.7.0-1 Coding Reducer Data, Reducer Data Tab

3.2.7.1 Coding Reducer Data, Reducer Data Tab

To enter a Reducer component, the User must click on the Reducer Icon on the Component Toolbar on the left border of the dialog or click on Components on the main menu at the top of the dialog and then on Reducer on the resulting pull down menu. Upon either of these sequences of actions, a Reducer dialog with a series of related dialogs will be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

The data is organized in related data groups on each and every dialog. In the upper left corner of the Reducer dialog, a data group entitled “Element” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:




156


Immediately below the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Dimension from “From Node” to “To Node”. The dimension(s) entered in this data group define the vector from the previous node point to the To Node Point (the end point) of the reducer being entered. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Delta X, Delta Y and Delta Z – The delta dimensions shown in the spaces provided are calculated by TRIFLEX based upon the vector direction defined in the previous component and the reducer length entered by the User. TRIFLEX will assume a dimension equal to one foot if English units are specified or .35 Meters if metric units are specified. The vector direction will be the same as the previously entered component. If the assumed length is incorrect, the User may enter the desired length in the Reducer Length field. Entering the reducer length may only change the delta dimensions.

Abs Length – TRIFLEX will automatically calculate the absolute length and display it in this field. Entering the reducer length may only change the Absolute Length.

ü Immediately below the data group entitled Dimension from “From Node” to “To Node”, the User will find a data group entitled “Stress Intensification Factor”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are further defined below:

For “From Node” – If the User wishes to specify a numerical stress intensification factor on the beginning of the reducer component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field.

For “To Node” - If the User wishes to specify a numerical stress intensification factor on the end of the reducer component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field.

Immediately to the right of the Element data group, the User will find a data group entitled “Size of Connected Pipes”. In this data group, the User can see the pipe Diameter and schedule for the From Node, but should not change it in this data group. In this data group, the User can see and enter the desired pipe Diameter and schedule for the To Node. The pipe size data for the To Node is then automatically transferred by TRIFLEX to the Pipe Properties dialog.

From Node Pipe Size

From Node Nom. Dia. – In this field, the Pipe Diameter specified for the from end of this component is displayed.


157

Outside Diameter - In this field, the Outside Diameter specified for the From end of this component is displayed.

Schedule - In this field, the Schedule specified for the from end of this component is displayed.

Thickness - In this field, the Thickness specified for the from end of this component is displayed.

To Node Pipe Size

To Node Nom. Dia. – In this field, the Pipe Diameter for the to end of the reducer is to be entered by the User. It must be a different Diameter than the Diameter specified for the From Node.

Outside Diameter - In this field, the Outside Diameter for the to end of the reducer is displayed based upon the Nominal Diameter entered by the User.

Schedule - In this field, the Schedule for the to end of the reducer is to be entered by the User. The default value for this field will be “Standard”. The User may select the schedule from the drop down combo list in this field or enter the schedule, as desired. If the pipe wall thickness is not represented by a schedule, then the User can select “Custom” from the drop down combo list and specify the desired wall thickness in the following field.

Thickness - In this field, the Thickness specified for the to end of the reducer is displayed. If desired, the User may enter a numerical value for the thickness in this field.

ü Immediately below the “Size of Connected Pipes” data group, the User will find a data group entitled “Reducer Geometry”. In this data group, the User must tell TRIFLEX whether the reducer is concentric or eccentric and, if eccentric, what the orientation is.

Concentric – The concentric radio button is the default selection. By accepting the radio button “Concentric”, the User instructs TRIFLEX to consider the reducer to be concentric.

Eccentric – Flat Side Down – By clicking on this radio button, the User instructs TRIFLEX to consider the reducer to have the outside Diameter of the From pipe and the To pipe on the same elevation on the bottom side. In so doing, TRIFLEX will automatically calculate the offset in the centerline of the to pipe and incorporate it into the piping model.

Eccentric – Flat Side Up – By clicking on this radio button, the User tells TRIFLEX to consider the reducer to have the outside Diameter of the from pipe and the to pipe on the same elevation on the topside. In so doing, TRIFLEX will


158

automatically calculate the offset in the centerline of the to pipe and incorporate it into the piping model.

Eccentric – Flat Side User Defined – By clicking on this radio button, the User tells TRIFLEX to consider the reducer to have the outside Diameter of the from pipe and the to pipe on the same plane on a User specified orientation. When the User selects this radio button, the data field labeled “Flat Side Orientation Angle” will be made active to enable the User to enter the proper orientation angle. In so doing, TRIFLEX will automatically calculate the offset in the centerline of the to pipe and incorporate it into the piping model.

For lines running along the vertical axis, TRIFLEX will consider the flat side orientation angle equal to zero when aligned with the +X axis. For lines in the horizontal plane, TRIFLEX will consider the flat side orientation angle equal to zero when aligned with the +Y axis.

Reducer Length – In this field, the User must specify the desired length of the reducer, if other than the TRIFLEX default length. TRIFLEX will default to a length of one foot, if English units are specified, or .35 Meters, if metric units are specified.

Reducer Weight - In this field, the User must specify the weight of the reducer.

Immediately below the “Reducer Geometry” data group, the User will find additional data fields for miscellaneous data defined as follows:


Buoyancy - If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX to consider the effects of buoyancy on this component, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Buoyancy Calculations”. The density of the fluid surrounding the reducer should also be specified on the Setup / Modeling Defaults dialog. The default is for the effects of buoyancy not to be considered.



159

3.2.8 Rigid Joint and Structural Member

Figure3.2.8.0-1 Coding Joint Data, Rigid Input

3.2.8.1 Coding Joint Data Tab, Rigid Input

To enter a Joint component, the User must click on the Joint Icon on the Component Toolbar on the left border of the dialog or click on Components on the main menu at the top of the dialog and then on Joint on the resulting pull down menu. Upon either of these sequences of actions, a Joint dialog with a series of related dialogs will be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

The data is organized in related data groups on each and every dialog. In the upper left corner of the Joint dialog, a data group entitled “Element” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:


To Node - In this field, TRIFLEX will generate a Node Number based upon the From Node number and the node increment specified by the User in the Default Settings. If the Node Number generated by TRIFLEX is not the desired node


160

number, the User may select a node number from the drop down combo list in this field or enter any node number desired.


Rigid/Flexible – Immediately below the Name Field, the User is given the option to define whether the joint is rigid or flexible. A flexible joint is used to model structural members like angles, beams, channels, etc. A rigid joint is used to model anything that is completely rigid such as a casing for a piece of rotating equipment or a special valve, etc. The User is given two radio buttons to select from – rigid or flexible. TRIFLEX defaults to rigid. If the User wishes to select flexible, then the User must click on flexible.

Here we have selected Rigid

Immediately below the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Dimension from “From Node” to “To Node”. The dimension(s) entered in this data group define the vector from the previous node point to the To Node Point (the point where the User is placing the Node) of the Joint being entered. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:



Use the Minimum Length - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to use the Minimum Length as calculated by TRIFLEX based upon the length of the Joint and the preceding component, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Use the Minimum Length”. TRIFLEX will then replace the absolute length with the minimum required length. This is particularly useful when the User desires to place a Joint fitting make-up with the previous component (especially if the previous component is a bend or a flange,


161

valve or joint with the data point located at a point other than the end point) and it eliminates the need for the User to perform manual math calculations.


Number of Intermediate Nodes – If the User enters a number in this field, TRIFLEX will break the pipe preceding the Joint, if any, into one more segment that the number of intermediate nodes specified in this field. In other words, if the User enters a 2 in this field, TRIFLEX will place two (2) intermediate nodes between the From Node and the From End of the Joint. TRIFLEX will then break the pipe into three (3) segments.


To the immediate right of the “Element” data group, the User will find a data group entitled “Joint Properties”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Weight – This field is provided to enable the User to enter a specific weight that will be applied by TRIFLEX at the centroid of the Joint Element, excluding the preceding pipe. If the User wishes the joint to be weightless, the User can enter a zero in this field. The default values for a Rigid Joint are: Weight = 0, and Use Absolute Length.

Use Absolute Length – TRIFLEX gives the user the choice to use Absolute Length for the Joint Properties.

Length – This field is provided to enable the User to enter a specific length for the Joint Element itself. The User is not required to enter a joint length if the joint length is equal to the absolute length as entered in the delta dimensions. If the User wishes the joint to be preceded by a segment of pipe, then the User should enter the desired length in this field. The default value is Absolute Length.

Immediately below the data groups entitled “Joint Properties”, the User will find a data group entitled “Delta Dimension To “To Node””. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Near – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the Near End of the Joint, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Near”. When


162

the User selects this modeling option, the entire length of the Joint follows the Node Point. In such case, the User must not specify a delta dimension to the next Node Point of less than the Joint length.

Mid – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the Mid Point of the Joint, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Mid”. When the User selects this modeling option, one half of the Joint length precedes the Node Point and one half of the Joint follows the node point. In such case, the User must not specify a delta dimension to the next Node Point of less than one half of the Joint length

Far – If the User wishes to locate the Node Point at the Far End of the Joint, then the User should click on the radio button in front of the label “Far”. When the User selects this modeling option, the entire Joint length precedes the Node Point. The default location for the node point location on a joint is the “Far” point or the end of the joint.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Delta Dimension To “To Node”” Joint Properties

For “From Node” – If the User wishes to specify a numerical stress intensification factor on the beginning of the pipe section preceding the Joint defined in this component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Stress Intensification Factor”, the User will find additional data fields for miscellaneous data defined as follows:

Show Transparent – This box when checked will allow the Joint to be Transparent. The amount of Transparency can be changed by going to: Setup / Graphic Preferences / Transparency Adjustment.

Weight Off - If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX to consider the component being entered as weightless, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Weight Off”. TRIFLEX will treat the Joint and the preceding Pipe coded on this component, if any, as weightless, if the User places a check in this check box. The default is for weight to be considered.

Buoyancy - If the User wishes to tell TRIFLEX to consider the effects of buoyancy on this component, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Buoyancy Calculations”. The density of the fluid surrounding the pipe should also be specified on the Setup / Modeling Defaults dialog. The effects of Buoyancy will only be applied to pipe members that precede joints and will not be applied to joints themselves. The default is for the effects of buoyancy not to be considered.

Immediately below the miscellaneous data fields, the User will find a data group entitled “Pipe Size”. In this data group, the User can see the pipe Diameter and


163

schedule as entered on a different dialog for this component. If the User wishes to change either the pipe Diameter or the pipe schedule, the User must go to the Pipe Properties tab.





164

3.2.8.2 Coding Joint Tab, Flexible Input

Figure3.2.8.2-1 Coding Joint Data, Flexible Input

To the immediate right of the “Element” data group, the User will find a data group entitled “Joint Properties”. The fields in which data can be entered only when the user has selected rigid are defined below:

Weight – This field is provided to enable the User to enter a specific weight that will be applied by TRIFLEX at the centroid of the Joint Element, excluding the preceding pipe, only when the user has selected rigid. When the user has selected flexible then this field is grayed out and the user is unable to change this field. The weight is calculated as you would expect. That is (Density) x (Shape of joint) x (Length of joint).

Flexible Joint Properties – Immediately below the Name Field, the User is given the option to define whether the joint is rigid or flexible. A flexible joint is used to model structural members like angles, beams, channels, etc.

When the User in the Element Data Group selects a Flexible Joint, the third column in the right portion of the data dialog is displayed in which the User is to enter data. The data group at the top of the column is entitled “Flexible Joint Properties”. Data must be entered in this data group as follows:

Structural Shape – The Structural Shape box will allow you to choose what shape you want to use. The pull down box will allow you to choose.


165

In the Structural Steel database, TRIFLEX incorporates the AISC standard shapes, dimensions, and properties for W, M, S, H shapes, Channels, Angles, Round Bar, Square Bar, Structural Tubing, etc.

An easy to use “User Defined” tool allows the user to input new and unconventional shapes in the Steel Database. (Discussion of the “Structural Steel Database” for User Defined is covered in the next sub-section.)

Designation – The User can click on the drop down combo list in this field and then select the desired structural member from the list of available members. In the event that the desired member is not ava ilable, or in the event that the User wishes to enter a library of frequently used structural shapes, all such entries are made through “Utilities” then “Databases” then “Structural Steel”. See next sub-section for details.

Moment of Inertia about “B” Axis – When the User has selected a structural member in the field labeled “Designation”; this field will automatically be filled by TRIFLEX with the appropriate property value. When the User has selected “User Specified” in the field labeled “Designation”, the User is expected to enter the appropriate property value in this field.

Moment of Inertia about “C” Axis – When the User has selected a structural member in the field labeled “Designation”, this field will automatically be filled by TRIFLEX with the appropriate property value. When the User has selected “User Specified” in the field labeled “Designation”, the User is expected to enter the appropriate property value in this field.

Torsional Constant “K” – K is used to describe the Torsional constant. Unfortunately, this same variable is used to describe the polar moment of inertia of a shape. These are NOT the same thing. To add to the confusion, in the case of a circular member they are numerically equal. With other shapes, severe miscalculations result when the polar moment of inertia is used as the Torsional constant. The polar moment of inertia is the sum of the X and Y moments of inertia. For an I-beam where t is the element thickness. For a W8x24, the polar moment of inertia is approximately 101 in4 whereas the Torsional constant is only 0.35 in4. Since Φ is inversely proportional to J, this error could result in grossly under-calculating the stress.

Distance from Centerline to Outer Surface on “B” Axis – When the User has selected a structural member in the field labeled “Designation”, this field will automatically be filled by TRIFLEX with the appropriate property value. When the User has selected “User Specified” in the field labeled “Designation”, the User is expected to enter the appropriate property value in this field.

Distance from Centerline to Outer Surface on “C” Axis – When the User has selected a structural member in the field labeled “Designation”, this field will automatically be filled by TRIFLEX with the appropriate property value. When


166

the User has selected “User Specified” in the field labeled “Designation”, the User is expected to enter the appropriate property value in this field.

Cross Sectional Area – When the User has selected a structural member in the field labeled “Designation”, this field will automatically be filled by TRIFLEX with the appropriate property value. When the User has selected “User Specified” in the field labeled “Designation”, the User is expected to enter the appropriate property value in this field.

Orientation of B axis ccw (counter clock wise) from MNU direction vector – Orientation of the B vector. This is usually 0 degrees. Which will mean that the B vector is UP. This then will set the C axis 90 degrees to the B axis. By entering this data, the User defines to TRIFLEX how to orient the structural properties.

Mirror C axis – Flips the C axis 180 degrees. Used when you want to show the Structural Steel member 180 degrees to what TRIFLEX automatically shows.

Shear Distribution Factor for Forces Parallel to “B” Axis – This field is provided to allow the User to specify the Shear Distribution Factor for forces acting parallel to the “B” axis of the flexible joint. This factor is multiplied times the force acting along the “B” axis. This factor may be considered as a stress intensification factor for the shearing force acting on the member attachment. It is generally taken to be the area of the member defined by the component divided by the area of the attachment, for example, a beam clip:

Beam Area / Clip Area = 41.2/11.2 = 3.71

Shear Distribution Factor for Forces Parallel to “C” Axis – This field is provided to allow the User to specify the Shear Distribution Factor for forces acting parallel to the “C” axis of the flexible joint. This factor is multiplied times the force acting along the “C” axis. This factor may be considered as a stress intensification factor for the shearing force acting on the member attachment.

The following are examples to show different coordinate axes.


167

Examples of Coordinate Axes.

Figure 3.2.8.2-2 Structural Steel Coordinate Axes

TRIFLEX defines the B axis as the MNU (most nearly up) in the case of a

Channel as shown. (Note: Due to limitations of my drawing program the centroid may be shown a little off. Be careful)

Then TRIFLEX defines the C axis 90 degrees to the B axis as shown.


Above is similar to what you see in the Structural Steel Handbook.

The Y axis is up in the Structural Steel Handbook as shown.

Then similar to what is in the Structural Steel Handbook the X axis is 90 degrees to the Y axis as shown.

Note: Due to limitations of the drawing program the centroid may be shifted.


168


Now we must discuss the X axis, Y axis similar to what you see in the Structural Steel Handbook and the X axis, Y axis, Z axis shown in the bottom left corner of TRIFLEX.

The X-axis, Y-axis similar to what you see in the Structural Steel Handbook is shown above in large axes. And is identified as X and Y.

While the X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis shown in the bottom left hand corner is TRIFLEX’s coordinate axes.

Do NOT think that these two different axes representation are the same, they are NOT. They are two separate and distinct representative axes. You will note in the above example of the channel that the Structural steel handbook axes are X and Y while the TRIFLEX axes are Z and Y.

The USER must use the correct identifiers. Use the correct numbers similar to the Values from the Structural Steel Handbook and be VERY careful about the Axes.

Note: Due to limitations of the drawing program the centroid may be shifted.

Orientation of B axis CCW (Counter Clock Wise) from MNU direction vector (continued) – Orientation of the B vector. This is usually 0 degrees. Which will mean that the B vector is UP. Of course for SKEWED Steel profiles, this will NOT be zero. USER to define.

If the User puts 30 degrees (for example) then the Steel profile will be rotated about the A axis 30 degrees. B will be MNU “Most Nearly Up”.

Mirror C axis – Flips the C axis 180 degrees. Used when you want to show the Structural Steel member 180 degrees to what TRIFLEX automatically shows.


169

Shear Distribution Factor for Forces Parallel to “B” Axis – This field is provided to allow the User to specify the Shear Distribution Factor for forces acting parallel to the “B” axis of the flexible joint. This factor is multiplied times the force acting along the “B” axis. This factor may be considered as a stress intensification factor for the shearing force acting on the member attachment. It is generally taken to be the area of the member defined by the component divided by the area of the attachment, for example, a beam clip:

Beam Area / Clip Area = 41.2/11.2 = 3.71

Shear Distribution Factor for Forces Parallel to “C” Axis – This field is provided to allow the User to specify the Shear Distribution Factor for forces acting parallel to the “C” axis of the flexible joint. This factor is multiplied times the force acting along the “C” axis. This factor may be considered as a stress intensification factor for the shearing force acting on the member attachment.

Above Reference: Structural Steel Handbook.

Figure 3.2.8.2-5 Structural “Effective Shear Area”


170

Note: Shear Distribution factor for Forces Parallel to B and C axis is the Cross Sectional Area divided by the Effective Shear Area.

Shear Distribution Factor Example 1:

For a Rectangular Solid with dimensions “b x c”, the Effective Shear Area is given as “5/6 bc”.

The cross sectional area is bc.

The Shear factor in the B and in the C direction will then be

Bc/ (5/6 bc) = 1.2

(Example 1) B axis

b

C axis

c

Shear Distribution Factor Example 2:

For a Hollow Rectangular tube, c in the C direction, b in the B direction, t = wall thickness, the cross sectional area is approximately 2 (b+c)t

For shear forces parallel to B, the shear Factor is 2 (b+c)t / 2 t b = 1 + c / b.

(Example 2) B axis

b

C axis

c


171

3.2.9 Expansion Joint

Figure 3.2.9.0-1 Coding Expansion Joint, Expansion Joint Tab

3.2.9.1 Coding Expansion Joint, Expansion Joint Tab

To enter an Expansion Joint component, the User must click on the Expansion Joint Icon on the Component Toolbar on the left border of the dialog or click on Components on the main menu at the top of the dialog and then on Expansion Joint on the resulting pull down menu. Upon either of these sequences of actions, a Expansion Joint dialog with a series of related dialogs will be presented to the User. Enter the data as no ted below:

The data is organized in related data groups on each and every dialog. In the upper left corner of the Expansion Joint dialog, a data group entitled “Element” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:




172


Immediately below the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Dimension from “From Node” to “To Node”. The dimension(s) entered in this data group define the vector from the previous node point to the To Node Point (the mid point) of the expansion joint being entered. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Delta X, Delta Y and Delta Z – If the User is specifying the first component after an anchor, TRIFLEX will assume an “X” dimension equal to one foot if English units are specified or .35 Meters if metric units are specified. If the assumed length is incorrect or if the delta dimension should be along another axis or along two or more axes, the User may simply enter the desired data in the Delta X, Delta Y and/or Delta Z fields. The minimum dimension that can be entered is one half the length of the expansion joint entered by the User on this dialog.

Abs Length – TRIFLEX will automatically calculate the absolute length from the From Point to the mid point of the Expansion Joint and display it in this field. If the vector is in the same direction as the previously entered component, then the User may enter the absolute length desired and TRIFLEX will calculate the Delta X, Delta Y and Delta Z dimensions automatically and will display them in the appropriate fields.

Use the Minimum Length - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to use the Minimum Length as calculated by TRIFLEX based upon the length of any preceding component, and then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Use the Minimum Length”. TRIFLEX will then replace the absolute length with the minimum required length. This is particularly useful when the piping component being modeled follows a Bend or a Valve, Flange or Joint with the data point specified at a point other than the end point.


Number of Intermediate Nodes – If the User enters a number in this field, TRIFLEX will break the pipe preceding the expansion joint into one more segment that the number of intermediate nodes specified by the User in this field. In other words, if the User enters a 2 in this field, TRIFLEX will place two (2) intermediate nodes between the to node and the beginning of the expansion joint – TRIFLEX will break the pipe into three (3) segments.


173


Immediately below the data group entitled “Dimension from “From Node” to “To Node”, the User will find a data group entitled “Coordinate System”. The User must select one of the two coordinate systems listed below:

X, Y, and Z Coordinate System - If the User wishes to enter the expansion joint flexibilities along and about the X, Y, Z axis system, then the User accept the radio button being selected for this option.

A, B, C Coordinate System - If the User wishes to enter the expansion joint flexibilities along and about an axis system that is skewed with respect to the X, Y, Z-axis system, then the User should select this option by clicking on the radio button just to the left of the text. When this coordinate system is selected, the User will be expected to define the orientation angles as defined later in the discussion for this component.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Coordinate System”, the User will find additional data fields for miscellaneous data defined as follows:




Immediately to the right of the data group entitled “Element”, the User will find a data group entitled “Expansion Joint Stiffness”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are further defined below:

Translational Stiffness – The User may enter the desired translational stiffness along the axial direction (along the axis of the expansion joint) and along the Lateral directions (along each of the two perpendicular axes). The first of the two


174

lateral translational stiffness will be the one oriented most vertically and the second of the two lateral translational stiffness will be the one oriented most horizontally. However, if the expansion joint is oriented along the Y-axis, then the three values must be the axial (along the Y axis), the lateral along the X-axis second, and the lateral along the Z-axis third.

To define the desired translational stiffness along each of the three axes, then the User can select Free or Rigid from the drop down combo list in each of the fields or enter a numerical value in any of these fields.

Rotational Stiffness – The User may enter the desired rotational stiffness about the axial direction (torsion about the axis of the expansion joint) and about the Lateral directions (bending about the two perpendicular axes). The first of the two lateral rotational stiffness will be the one about the axis oriented most vertically and the second of the two lateral rotational stiffness will be the one about the axis oriented most horizontally. However, if the expansion joint is oriented along the Y-axis, then the three values must be the axial (about the Y axis), the lateral about the X-axis second, and the lateral about the Z-axis third.

To define the desired rotational stiffness about each of the three axes, then the User can select Free or Rigid from the drop down combo list in each of the fields or enter a numerical value in any of these fields.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Expansion Joint Stiffness”, the User will find a data group entitled “Skewed Expansion Joint Angles”. If the User has selected the A, B, C Coordinate System, then TRIFLEX will activate this data group for the User to enter the C Axis angles. Given the C Axis and the axial direction, TRIFLEX has the required data to properly orient and apply the translational and rotational stiffness. The fields in which data is to be entered in this data group are defined below:

C angle - X Axis, C angle - Y Axis and C angle - Z Axis – When the expansion joint is oriented along an axis that is skewed with respect to the X axis and/or the Y axis and/or the Z axis, the User must define the angle in degrees between the C Axis and the X axis, between the C Axis and the Y axis and between the C Axis and the Z axis. The angles should always be 180 degrees or less.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Skewed Expansion Joint Angles”, the User will find a data group entitled “Expansion Joint Physical Properties”. In the fields in this data group, the User is to enter the physical properties that describe the expansion joint. The fields in which data is to be entered in this data group are further defined below:

Length of Bellows – In this field, the User is to enter the physical length of the bellows. Since the User is to define the delta dimension to the middle of the expansion joint, the delta dimension must be greater than or equal to one half of


175

the length of the bellows. The delta dimension for the component following the expansion joint must also allow for the second half of the bellows.

Bellows O.D. – In this field, the User is to enter the physical outside Diameter of the corrugated section of the expansion point. This value is used to properly represent the expansion joint in the graphic model.

Pressure Thrust Area (Active only Without Tie-Rods) - In this field, the User is to enter the effective pressure thrust area. This value is commonly available from the manufacturer of the expansion joint being used. When tie rods do not restrain the expansion joint, the pressure thrust load will be exerted by the expansion joint on the pipe on both ends of the expansion joint. The pressure thrust load is determined by multiplying the pressure thrust area by the internal pressure.

With Tie Rods – When “With Tie Rods” is selected, TRIFLEX will make the axial spring constant as rigid and pressure thrust forces will not be applied to the pipe components on either side of the expansion joint. TRIFLEX defaults to an expansion joint with tie rods and, therefore, the radio button just to the left of the “With Tie Rods” label is selected. In the event that the User does not desire to have tie rods, the User should select the other option.

Without Tie Rods – To select this option, click on the radio button just to the left of the “Without Tie Rods” label. When “Without Tie Rods” is selected, TRIFLEX will use the axial spring constant entered by the User and pressure thrust forces will be generated and applied to the pipe components on either side of the expansion joint.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Expansion Joint Physical Properties”, the User will find a data group entitled “Pipe Size”. In this data group, the User can see the pipe Diameter and schedule as entered on a different dialog for this component. If the User wishes to change either the pipe Diameter or the pipe schedule, the User must go to the Pipe Properties tab.



Immediately below the data group entitled “Expansion Joint Physical Properties” and to the right of the data group entitled “Pipe Size”, the User will find an additional data group entitled “Stress Intensification Factor”. Data may be entered as follows:

SI Factor for “From Node” – If the User wishes to specify a numerical stress intensification factor on the beginning of the pipe section preceding the expansion


176

joint defined in this component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field.


177

3.2.9.2 Expansion Joint, Different Types

The Six types of Expansion Joints are as follows:

1. Untied single bellows

2. Tied single bellows

3. Hinged single bellows

4. Gimballed single bellows

1. Untied universal bellows

2. Tied universal bellows

Expansion Joints connect to the pipe in four possible ways:

1. Welded

2. Slip-on

3. Weld neck flange

4. Plate flange

Using these basic types the User can vary the Input to accommodate Expansion joints like “Packed Expansion Joints”.

Additional Information on Expansion joints is given in Chapter 4, Section 4.2.11


178

3.2.10 Release Element

Figure 3.2.10.0-1 Coding Joint Data, Joint Data Table

3.2.10.1 Coding Release Element, X, Y, Z coordinate axes

To enter a Release Element component, the User must click on the Release Element Icon on the Component Toolbar on the left border of the dialog or click on Components on the main menu at the top of the dialog and then on Release Element on the resulting pull down menu. Upon either of these sequences of actions, a Release Element dialog with a series of related dialogs will be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

The data is organized in related data groups on each and every dialog. In the upper left corner of the Release Data dialog, a data group entitled “Element” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:




179


Immediately below the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Release Element Type”. The data group contains three options for the User to select from. Each option has a radio button just to the left of it.

Totally Rigid – This is the default selection. When the User selects this option, TRIFLEX will treat the release element as totally rigid for all analyses processed.

Totally Free - When the User selects this option, TRIFLEX will treat the release element as totally free for all analyses processed.

User Defined - When the User selects this option; TRIFLEX will treat the release element as having the stiffness as defined by the User in a separate portion of the dialog.

Pinned Connection - When the User selects this option, TRIFLEX will treat the release element as a pinned connection for all analyses processed.

Jacketed Piping Spacer - When the User selects this option a spacer or sometimes called a spider is used. This is a spacer between the core pipe (inside pipe) and the jacket pipe (outside pipe) of a jacketed piping system. Section 3.2.2.3 covers this and Figure 3.2.2.3-5 and Figure 3.2.2.3-6 are the dialog screens to review.

Free along “Y” axis when Weight Analysis Processed for Spring Hanger Design - If the User has elected to have TRIFLEX size and select spring hangers in this analysis and wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to consider this release element to be free along the “Y” only during the Weight Analysis, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Free along “Y” axis when Weight Analysis Processed for Spring Hanger Design”. The default for this option is that it is not selected. For a further discussion about the use of this option, see the Chapter 5 – Use of Restraints.

Free along “All” axes when Weight Analysis Processed for Spring Hanger Design - If the User has elected to have TRIFLEX size and select spring hangers in this analysis and wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to consider this release element to be free along all axes only during the Weight Analysis, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Free along “All” axes when Weight Analysis Processed for Spring Hanger Design”. The default for this option is that it is not selected. For a further discussion about the use of this option, see the Chapter 5 – Use of Restraints.


180

Immediately below the two hanger design options, the User will find a data group entitled “Coordinate System”. The User must select one of the two coordinate systems listed below:

X, Y, and Z Coordinate System - If the User wishes to enter the release element flexibilities along and about the X, Y, Z-axis system, then the User accepts the radio button being selected for this option.

A, B, C Coordinate System - If the User wishes to enter the release element flexibilities along and about an axis system that is skewed with respect to the X, Y, Z-axis system, then the User should select this option by clicking on the radio button just to the left of this text. When this coordinate system is selected, the User will be expected to define the orientation angles as defined later in the discussion for this component.

Immediately to the right of the data group entitled “Element”, the User will find a data group entitled “Release Element Stiffness”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are further defined below:

Translational Stiffness – The User may enter the desired translational stiffness along the axial direction (along the axis of the release element) and along the Lateral directions (along each of the two perpendicular axes). The first of the two lateral translational stiffness will be the one oriented most vertically and the second of the two lateral translational stiffness will be the one oriented most horizontally. However, if the release element is oriented along the Y-axis, then the three values must be the axial (along the Y axis), the lateral along the X-axis second, and the lateral along the Z-axis third.




Immediately below the data group entitled “Release Element Stiffness”, the User will find a data group entitled “Skewed Release Element Angles”. If the User has


181

selected the A, B, C Coordinate System, then TRIFLEX will activate this data group for the User to enter the A Axis and C Axis angles. Given the orientation of the A Axis and the C Axis, TRIFLEX has the required data to properly orient and apply the translational and rotational stiffness. The fields in which data is to be entered in this data group are defined below:

A angle - X Axis, A angle - Y Axis and A angle - Z Axis – When the Release Element is skewed with respect to the X axis and/or the Y axis and/or the Z axis, the User must define the angle in degrees between the A Axis and the X axis, between the A Axis and the Y axis and between the A Axis and the Z axis. The angles should always be 180 degrees or less.

C angle - X Axis, C angle - Y Axis and C angle - Z Axis – When the Release Element is skewed with respect to the X axis and/or the Y axis and/or the Z axis, the User must define the angle in degrees between the C Axis and the X axis, between the C Axis and the Y axis and between the C Axis and the Z axis. The angles should always be 180 degrees or less.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Skewed Release Element Angles”, the User will find a data group entitled “Pipe Size”. In this data group, the User can see the pipe Diameter and schedule as entered on a different dialog for this component. If the User wishes to change either the pipe Diameter or the pipe schedule, the User must go to the Pipe Properties tab.




182

3.2.10.2 Coding Release Element, A,B,C coordinate axes

Figure 3.2.10.2-1 Coding Joint Data, Joint Data Table

A, B, C Coordinate System - If the User wishes to enter the release element flexibilities along and about an axis system that is skewed with respect to the X, Y, Z-axis system, then the User should select this option by clicking on the radio button just to the left of this text. When this coordinate system is selected, the User will be expected to define the orientation angles as defined later in the discussion for this component.

Immediately to the right of the data group entitled “Element”, the User will find a data group entitled “Release Element Stiffness”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are further defined below:

Translational Stiffness – The User may enter the desired translational stiffness along the axial direction (along the axis of the release element) and along the Lateral directions (along each of the two perpendicular axes). The first of the two lateral translational stiffness will be the one oriented most vertically and the second of the two lateral translational stiffness will be the one oriented most horizontally. However, if the release element is oriented along the Y-axis, then the three values must be the axial (along the Y axis), the lateral along the X-axis second, and the lateral along the Z-axis third.



183



Immediately below the data group entitled “Release Element Stiffness”, the User will find a data group entitled “Skewed Release Element Angles”. If the User has selected the A, B, C Coordinate System, then TRIFLEX will activate this data group for the User to enter the A Axis and C Axis angles. Given the orientation of the A Axis and the C Axis, TRIFLEX has the required data to properly orient and apply the translational and rotational stiffness. The fields in which data is to be entered in this data group are defined below:

A angle - X Axis, A angle - Y Axis and A angle - Z Axis – When the Release Element is skewed with respect to the X axis and/or the Y axis and/or the Z axis, the User must define the angle in degrees between the A Axis and the X axis, between the A Axis and the Y axis and between the A Axis and the Z axis. The angles should always be 180 degrees or less.

C angle - X Axis, C angle - Y Axis and C angle - Z Axis – When the Release Element is skewed with respect to the X axis and/or the Y axis and/or the Z axis, the User must define the angle in degrees between the C Axis and the X axis, between the C Axis and the Y axis and between the C Axis and the Z axis. The angles should always be 180 degrees or less.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Skewed Release Element Angles”, the User will find a data group entitled “Pipe Size”. In this data group, the User can see the pipe Diameter and schedule as entered on a different dialog for this component. If the User wishes to change either the pipe Diameter or the pipe schedule, the User must go to the Pipe Properties tab.

Angle Entry Method – There are three choices: Direction Angles, Direction Vectors, and Axis Vector and Rotation.

Select the approach, which defines your Skewed Release Element Direction Angles.


184

Set Axes to “LNG” – By clicking on this box you will get the “Longitudinal Direction Calculator as shown in Figure 3.2.10.2-2.

This will give you the ability to define your Longitudinal Direction. Which will define the LNG axes.

Figure 3.2.10.2-2 Coding Joint Data, Longitudinal Direction Calculator




185

3.2.11 Pressure Relief Valve

Figure 3.2.11-1 Coding Pressure Relief Valve, Pressure Relief Valve Tab

3.2.11.1 Pressure Relief Valve DataTab

To enter a Pressure Relief Valve component with or without a preceding Pipe, the User must click on the Pressure Relief Valve Icon on the Component Toolbar on the left border of the dialog or click on Components on the main menu at the top of the dialog and then on Pressure Relief Valve on the resulting pull down menu. Upon either of these sequences of actions, a Pressure Relief Valve dialog with a series of related dialogs will be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

The data is organized in related data groups on each and every dialog. In the upper left corner of the Pressure Relief Valve dialog, a data group entitled “Element” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:




186


Immediately below the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Dimension from “From to Mid Node”. The dimension(s) entered in this data group define the vector from the previous node point to the To Node Point (the point where the User is placing the Node) of the valve being entered. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:



Use the Minimum Length - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to use the Minimum Length as calculated by TRIFLEX based upon the length of the valve, any flanges and the preceding component, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Use the Minimum Length”. TRIFLEX will then replace the absolute length with the minimum required length. This is particularly useful when the User desires to place a valve fitting make-up with the previous component and it eliminates the need for the User to perform manual math calculations.


Number of Intermediate Nodes – If the User enters a number in this field, TRIFLEX will break the pipe preceding the valve into one more segment that the number of intermediate nodes specified in this field. In other words, if the User enters a 2 in this field, TRIFLEX will place two (2) intermediate nodes between the to node and the from end of the valve. TRIFLEX will then break the pipe into three (3) segments.


187


Immediately below the data group entitled “Dimension from “From Node” to “To Node”, the User will find a data group entitled “Valve Type”. In this data group, the User must instruct TRIFLEX whether the valve is a flanged valve or a welded valve.

Flanged Pressure Relief Valve – The flanged valve radio button is the default selection. By accepting the radio button “Flanged Valve”, the User is telling TRIFLEX that a flanged valve is desired.

Welded Pressure Relief Valve - To tell TRIFLEX that a Welded Valve is desired, by clicking on the radio button immediately preceding “Welded Valve”, the User is telling TRIFLEX that a welded valve is desired.

Threaded Pressure Relief Valve – The threaded valve radio button changes the end connection to threaded. By accepting the radio button “Threaded Valve”, the User is telling TRIFLEX that a threaded valve is desired.

To the immediate right of the “Element” data group, the User will find a data group entitled “PRV Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Type – The User must select a Pressure Relief Valve (or PRV) Type from the drop down combo list in this field. The default PRV type is the Flanged AAAT Standard PRV. From our staff’s past experience, this PRV is an average PRV. The Type of PRV, along with the Rating, allows TRIFLEX to search through the PRV database to find the desired PRV. The current TRIFLEX PRV database consists of four flanged PRV types and four welded PRV types. In addition, the User may select “User Specified” in order to be able to enter their own weight and length. The Pressure Relief Valve types available in TRIFLEX are:

Flanged – AAAT Std. PRV Valve, Crosby PRV Valve, and User Specified

Welded - AAAT Std. PRV Relief Valve, and User Specified

Class Rating - The User must select a class rating from the drop down combo list in this field. The available class ratings are 150, 300, 600, 1500, 2500, 3705 and 5000. Given the valve type and the class rating, TRIFLEX will look up the appropriate corresponding weight, length, and insulation factor to be used in the calculations.


188

PRV Height – The data shown in this field is looked up from the database by TRIFLEX or, if the User Specified valve is selected, the User can enter a desired value in this field.

Inlet Length – The data shown in this field is looked up from the database by TRIFLEX or, if the User Specified valve is selected, the User can enter a desired value in this field.

Inlet Diameter – The data shown in this field is looked up from the database by TRIFLEX or, if the User Specified valve is selected, the User can enter a desired value in this field.

Exit Length – The data shown in this field is looked up from the database by TRIFLEX or, if the User Specified valve is selected, the User can enter a desired value in this field.

Exit Diameter – The data shown in this field is looked up from the database by TRIFLEX or, if the User Specified valve is selected, the User can enter a desired value in this field.

PRV Weight – The data shown in this field is looked up from the database by TRIFLEX or, if the User Specified valve is selected, the User can enter a desired value in this field. The weight entered will be applied by TRIFLEX at the centroid of the Inlet Section of the Pressure Relief Valve.

Insulation Factor (ft, mm, m, mm) - if the User has specified the Type and Class Rating, the program will extract the insulation factor for the specified valve from the database. The User can input an insulation factor by overriding the value extracted from the database. The insulation factor is a value that when multiplied times the insulation weight per unit length will result in the weight of insulation to be placed on the valve. For example, an insulation factor of 1.5 means that the weight of insulation to be added to the valve weight will be equivalent to the weight of one foot of insulation on the adjacent pipe times a 1.5 factor when using the ENG input units.

If the User wants to enter a valve length or a valve weight or an insulation factor that is different than those selected by TRIFLEX from the TRIFLEX database, then the User should select User Specified on the Valve Type and then enter the desired values.

Directly below “PRV Data” group, the user will find a data group entitled “Direction From PRV Mid to Next Node”. The dimension(s) entered in this data group define the vector from the Mid node point to the Next Node Point (the point where the User is placing the Node) of the valve being entered. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Delta X, Delta Y and Delta Z – If the User is specifying the first component after an anchor, TRIFLEX will assume an “X” dimension equal to one foot, if


189

English units are specified, or .35 Meters, if metric units are specified. If the node being defined follows another component other than an anchor, the assumed dimension will be along the vector line defined by the previous component. If the assumed length is incorrect or if the delta dimension should be along another axis or along two or three axes, the User may enter the desired data in the Delta X, Delta Y and/or Delta Z fields.

To the immediate right of the “PRV Data” data group, the User will find a data group entitled “Flange Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Type – The User must select a Flange Type from the drop down combo list in this field. The default valve type is the AAAT Standard Flange. From our staff’s past experience, this flange is an average flange. The Type of flange, along with the Rating, allows TRIFLEX to search through the flange database to find the desired flange. The current TRIFLEX Flange database consists of five flange types. In addition, the User may select “User Specified” in order to be able to enter their own weight and length. The flange types available in TRIFLEX are:

AAAT Std. Flange, Blind Flange, Lap Joint Flange, Slip-on Flange, Weld Neck Flange and User Specified.

Flange Length – The data shown in this field is looked up from the database by TRIFLEX or, if the User Specified flange is selected, the User can enter a desired value in this field.

Flange Weight – The data shown in this field is looked up from the database by TRIFLEX or, if the User Specified flange is selected, the User can enter a desired value in this field.

Insulation Factor (ft, mm, m, mm) - if the User has specified the Type and Class Rating, the program will extract the insulation factor for the specified flange from the database. The User can input an insulation factor by overriding the value extracted from the database. The insulation factor is a value that when multiplied times the insulation weight per unit length of adjoining pipe will result in the weight of insulation to be placed on the flange. For example, an insulation factor of 1.5 means that the weight of insulation to be added to the flange weight will be equivalent to the weight of one foot of insulation on the adjacent pipe times a 1.5 factor when using the ENG input units.

If the User wants to enter a flange length or a flange weight or an insulation factor that is different than those selected by TRIFLEX from the TRIFLEX database, then the User should select User Specified on the Flange Type and then enter the desired values.


190

Flange on “From End” - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to have a flange on the beginning end or from end of the valve, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Flange on From End”.

Flange on “To End” - If the User wishes to instruct TRIFLEX to have a flange on the far end or to end of the valve, then the User should place a check in the box immediately to the left of the label “Flange on To End”.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Flange Data”, the User will find additional data fields for miscellaneous data defined as follows:

SI Factor for “From Node” – If the User wishes to specify a numerical stress intensification factor on the beginning of the pipe section preceding the valve defined in this component, then the User should enter the desired numerical value in this field.



Immediately below the data group for the miscellaneous data fields, the User will find the Property Ripple button. See Section 3.3.1.1 to learn the Ripple command.


191

3.3 Common dialogs for all Component Types

3.3.1 Pipe Properties Tab

Figure 3.3.1-1 Anchor Component, Pipe Properties Tab

For every piping system to be properly analyzed, the User must enter basic piping properties. To enter these required piping properties, the User must click on the Pipe Properties tab at the top of the screen on the first component entered. Upon clicking on the tab, a Pipe Properties dialog will be presented to the User.

The data is organized in related data groups on this dialog. In the upper left corner of the Pipe Properties dialog, a data group entitled “Pipe Size” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Nominal Dia. – In this field, TRIFLEX will display the default pipe size of 6” for the first pipe component. If the desired nominal Diameter is any size other than 6”, the User may select a different nominal Diameter from the drop down combo list in this field. In the event that the User does not find the desired nominal Diameter in the list provided, the User may select “User Specified” and enter the exact outside Diameter of the pipe for this particular pipe size and application or can add the desired nominal pipe Diameter to the library of pipe Diameters by clicking on “Utilities” then “Databases” then “Pipe”.

Outside Dia. - When the User has entered a nominal Diameter, TRIFLEX will display, in this field, the outside Diameter of the pipe that TRIFLEX looked up in the internal database for the nominal Diameter selected by the User. The field will be grayed out and inaccessible to the User, except through the Nominal Diameter field. When the User has selected “User Specified” in the Nominal


192

Diameter field, TRIFLEX will activate the field and thereby enable the User to enter an actual outside Diameter of the pipe.

Pipe Schedule – When the User has entered a nominal Diameter; the User may select the desired pipe schedule from the drop down combo list in this field. In the event that the User does not find the desired pipe schedule in the list provided, the User may select “User Specified” and enter the exact pipe wall thickness or can add the desired custom pipe Diameter and pipe schedule/wall thickness to the library of pipe Diameters by clicking on “Utilities” then “Databases” then “Pipe”.

Pipe Wall Thickness – When the User has entered a Nominal Diameter and a Pipe Schedule, TRIFLEX will display, in this field, the wall thickness of the pipe that TRIFLEX looked up in the internal database for the nominal Diameter and schedule selected by the User. In the event that the User did not find the desired pipe schedule in the list provided and the User selected “User Specified”, the User may then enter the exact pipe wall thickness in this field.

Inside Dia. - In this field, TRIFLEX will calculate and display the actual inside Diameter of the pipe. From the User-entered outside Diameter, TRIFLEX will subtract two times the pipe wall thickness. The resultant value will be displayed in this field. The field will be grayed out and inaccessible to the User, except through the appropriate pipe size fields.

Corrosion Allow. - If the User specifies a corrosion allowance in this field, TRIFLEX will perform a worst-case analysis (i.e., for calculating the forces and moments, the full un-corroded wall thickness will be assumed). For calculating stresses, the program will assume that the pipe is in the fully corroded state. The default value for this field is zero.

ü Immediately below the “Pipe Size” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Contents”. The data entered in this data group define the weight of the contents of the component defined on the node dialog. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Specific Gravity - If the User specifies a numeric value in this field, TRIFLEX will consider the value to be the liquid specific gravity of the contents of the component defined on the node dialog. TRIFLEX will calculate the weight per unit length for the contents based upon the specific gravity entered by the User and the inside Diameter of the piping component. This value will then be shown in the Weight/Unit Len. Field located immediately below this field. The default value for this field is zero. For water filled piping, the User should enter a contents specific gravity of 1.0.

Weight/Unit Len. - In this field, TRIFLEX will calculate and display the actual weight per unit length of the contents of the pipe. The field will be grayed out and inaccessible to the User, except through the specific gravity field.


193

To the immediate right of the data group entitled “Pipe Size”, the User will find a data group entitled “Pipe Material”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined in section “3.2.1.2 Anchor Component, Pipe Properties, Material Selection”. Note the difference between Generic Database and the ASME Database.


194

3.3.1.1 Rippling Property Changes (HOW TO RIPPLE)

Figure 3.3.1.1-1 Pipe Properties Tab, Ripple

Ripple - Is simply copying an attribute from the component that you are on to the component you select as a change point. That is “Ripple” from component 3 which would be the current component to component 21. The reason being that at component 22 you would have a different attribute. In figure 3.3.1.1-2 we can see that the Pipe Size changes after component 21. Therefore a Ripple from component number 1 to component number 21 could change the pipe size of all existing pipe that is 8 inches in diameter in this example.

Figure 3.3.1.1-2 Pipe Properties Tab, Ripple


195

Ripple Size – When the User has modified one or more properties in the Pipe Size data group, the User can instruct TRIFLEX to modify all subsequent occurrences of these properties that are in an unbroken series from the original revision forward by pressing the Ripple Size button.

Ripple Contents – When the User has modified one or more properties in the Contents data group, the User can instruct TRIFLEX to modify all subsequent occurrences of these properties that are in an unbroken series from the original revision forward by pressing the Ripple Contents button.

Ripple Material – When the User has modified one or more properties in the Pipe Material data group, the User can instruct TRIFLEX to modify all subsequent occurrences of these properties that are in an unbroken series from the original revision forward by pressing the Ripple Material button.

Ripple Insulation – When the User has modified one or more properties in the Pipe Insulation data group, the User can instruct TRIFLEX to modify all subsequent occurrences of these properties that are in an unbroken series from the original revision forward by pressing the Ripple Insulation button.


196

3.3.2 Process Tab

Figure 3.3.2.0-1 Anchor Component, Process Tab

For every piping system to be properly analyzed, the User must enter basic piping properties and process data. To enter the required data, the User must click on the Process tab at the top of the screen on the first component entered. Upon clicking on the tab, a Process dialog will be presented to the User.

In the upper left corner of the Process dialog, a data group entitled “Material” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Material – This field is identical to the Material field that is found on the Pipe Properties dialog, except that is not accessible. The field is a display field only and is grayed out. The information is provided for the User to see the material that the User selected on the Pipe Properties dialog. In the event that the User wishes to change this material, the User must return to the Pipe Properties dialog.

Base Temperature – In this field, the User can specify the base or ambient temperature at time of fabrication / installation. The default value assumed by TRIFLEX is 70 degrees F or 21 degrees C.

The remaining data that can be entered by the User on this dialog is requested on a case-by-case basis. In this release of TRIFLEX, six cases can be specified and processed one at a time or in combination. When a piping material is selected by the User from the database contained in TRIFLEX, the User may specify, on this dialog, the internal pressure, the temperature and whether the installed or operating modulus of elasticity is to be used. When the User selects “User Specified” for the piping material, the User may specify the modulus of elasticity


197

and the coefficient of expansion to be used in the analysis. The User can also enter the temperature when “User Specified” is selected for material; however, the temperature entry has no effect on the analysis of User Specified materials.

Pressure – In this field, the User may enter the internal pressure for each of six cases. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out). To activate a case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case. The default value is zero.

Temperature – In this field, the User may enter the temperature for each of six cases. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out). The default value is the value for ambient temperature for the system of units selected by the User. The default value is Zero.

Use Installed Modulus / Use Operating Modulus – The selection of one or the other of these options is accomplished by the provision of two radio buttons. The default selection is “Use Installed Modulus”. The User should select the Installed Modulus when performing piping code compliance studies. The User can select Use Operating Modulus in order to calculate loads on equipment if allowed by the equipment vendor. Use of the operating temperature modulus will also more accurately calculate distributed loads for the internal weight effect in an automated spring hanger sizing analyses. The resultant deflections using the operating modulus will also be more accurately calculated.

Modulus of Elasticity – When the User has selected a material from the material database contained within TRIFLEX; this field will be grayed out or inactive. In this field, the value of Modulus of Elasticity that TRIFLEX has selected from the TRIFLEX database will be displayed. When the User has selected “User Specified” for the piping material, the User may enter in this field the value of the modulus of elasticity to be used by TRIFLEX in the analysis.

Coeff. Of Expansion – When the User has selected a material from the material database contained within TRIFLEX; this field will be grayed out or inactive. In this field, the value of coefficient of expansion that TRIFLEX has selected from the TRIFLEX database will be displayed. When the User has selected “User Specified” for the piping material, the User may enter in this field the value of the coefficient of expansion to be used by TRIFLEX in the analysis.

Ripple Material – When the User has modified one or more properties in the Pipe Material data group, the User can instruct TRIFLEX to modify all subsequent occurrences of these properties that are in an unbroken series from the original revision forward by pressing the Ripple Material button.


198

3.3.3 Restraints Tab

Figure 3.3.3.0-1 Restraint Tab for General Pipe Support or Restraint

Restraints may be entered on the following components: Pipe, Bend/Elbow, Branch Connection, Valve, Flange, Reducer and Joint. A Restraint is not a component in TRIFLEX; it is an attachment to a piping component that enables an external action to be applied on the piping system. To enter a restraint on the piping system, select any of the above noted components and the Restraint tab will be displayed as one of the tabs along the top edge of the component dialogs. To enter a restraint, click on the Restraint tab at the top of the dialog and the Restraint dialog will be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

The data is organized in related data groups on the Restraint dialog. In the upper left corner of the “Restraint” dialog, a data group entitled “Element” is available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Load Case – This field is reserved for future use and is grayed out at this time.

Node Num. – In this field, TRIFLEX displays the To Node number for the component on which the restraints are to be applied. The field is grayed out since the node number may not be altered on this dialog.

Name – Entry of the name in this field is optional and is grayed out and not available for use in this case.

Immediately below the “Element” data, the User will find a data group entitled “Coordinate System”. In this data group, the User defines the axis system that will be used to describe the restraint action. TRIFLEX provides three different axis systems to choose from: 1) the standard X, Y, Z axis system, 2) the L, N, G


199

axis system which enables a User to enter restraints along the axis of the pipe and along the axes perpendicular to the pipe, 3) and the A, B, C axis system which enables a User to enter restraints along an axis system that may be skewed in relationship to the X, Y, Z axis system as well as the L, N, G axis system. The User clicks on a radio button to select the desired axis system. The options available for the User are defined below:

X, Y, Z Coord. System – The default axis system is the X, Y, and Z-axis system. The radio button to the left of this title will be selected as the default. When the User selects the X, Y, Z coordinate system, all restraint action specified by the User will be applied along the X, Y or Z-axes. No orientation angles are required when the X, Y, Z coordinate system is selected. When the X, Y, Z coordinate system is selected by the User, TRIFLEX will display the Translational Restraint Action data group and the Rotational Restraint Action data group with the X axis, Y axis and Z axis headings and orientation angles will not be accepted as input.

L, N, G Coord. System – When the User selects the L, N, G coordinate system; all restraint action specified by the User will be applied along the L, N or G axes. No orientation angles are required to be entered by the User. TRIFLEX will automatically compute the orientation angles internally when the User selects the L, N, and G coordinate system. The axis convention for the L, N, and G coordinate system is as follows:

L is along the axis of the pipe and positive in the direction of coding.

N is normal to the pipe and most vertical.

G is perpendicular to the pipe and horizontal (guide).

When the L, N, G coordinate system is selected by the User, TRIFLEX will display the Translational Restraint Action data group and the Rotational Restraint Action data group with the L axis, N axis and G axis headings.

A, B, C Coord. System – When the User selects the A, B, C coordinate system, all restraint action specified by the User will be applied along the A, B or C axes. Orientation angles must be entered by the User when the A, B, C coordinate system is selected. The A, B, C axis system is a standard right hand rule axis system that can be oriented as desired by the User. The User simply must orient the A, B, and C axis system with respect to the X, Y Z axis system. When the A, B, C coordinate system is selected by the User, TRIFLEX will display the Translational Restraint Action data group and the Rotational Restraint Action data group with the A axis, B axis and C axis headings.

Use Directional Vectors – This option is the default when the User selects the A, B, And C Coordinate System. When the User selects this option, the User must specify the vectorial direction of a skewed restraint. The length of the X, Y, and Z vectors must be coded from the point of the restraint attachment on the pipe to


200

the point of restraint attachment on the external structure. The resultant of the X, Y, and Z vectors defines the orientation of the A axis along which the restraint action will be applied. When this option is selected, the User can only enter a restraint along or about the A axis.

The User must enter the directional vectors in decimal values in the three fields provided - the X-axis, the Y-axis and the Z-axis. Note: these vectors only provide the A axis orientation and the resultant specific length has no significance.

Use Action Angles – When the User selects the A, B, C coordinate system and wishes to enter restraints along or about more than one axis; the User should select this option. This enables the User to specify the angles between the X, Y, Z coordinate system and the A, B, and C coordinate system along and about which the User can enter restraints.

The User must define the orientation of the A axis and the C axis in order for TRIFLEX to completely orient the A, B, C coordinate system in relation to the X, Y, Z coordinate sys tem. The User must specify the angles that the A-axis makes with the +X, +Y, and +Z-axes and the C-axis makes with the +X, +Y, and +Z-axes. The angles specified will be between 0 and 180 degrees.


201

Figure 3.3.3.0-3 XYZ and ABC Coordinate Systems

Immediately below the data group entitled “Coordinate System”, the User will find an individual data item defined as follows:

Friction Coefficient – The default condition for this field is grayed out and inaccessible for data entry. In order for the User to be able to enter a coefficient of frictional resistance to movement, the User must have done one of the following:

Selected the X, Y, Z Coordinate System and have selected a +Y or a +/- Y or a –Y restraint

Selected the L, N, G Coordinate System and have selected a +N or a +/- N or a –N restraint

Selected the A, B, C Coordinate System and have selected a +B or a +/- B or a –B restraint

The coefficient of frictional resistance must be determined by the User and entered in this field. If this field is left blank, the frictional resistance will be considered to be zero. The actual frictional restraining force is iteratively calculated by TRIFLEX. Section 5 in the TRIFLEX User Manual contains an in-depth discussion of modeling with frictional restraints.


202

Immediately to the right of the data group entitled “Element”, the User will find a data group entitled “Translational Restraint Action”. When the X, Y, Z coordinate system is selected by the User, TRIFLEX will display the Translational Restraint Action data group with the X axis, Y axis and Z axis headings. When the L, N, G coordinate system is selected by the User, TRIFLEX will display the Translational Restraint Action data group with the L axis, N axis and G axis headings. When the A, B, C coordinate sys tem is selected by the User, TRIFLEX will display the Translational Restraint Action data group with the A axis, B axis and C axis headings. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:


203

3.3.3.1 Restraints Tab, X, Y, Z coordinate system

Figure 3.3.3.1-1 X,Y,Z coordinate system Pipe Support or Restraint

Figure 3.3.3.1-2 X,Y,Z coordinate system Restraint Tab

Note: X Axis check can only be placed in one check box for each translational axis action.


204

+ By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the + X direction. This restraint resist movement in the negative X direction and allows movement in the positive X direction.

+ And - By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional translational restraint acting in the + and - X direction. This restraint resist movement in the positive and negative X directions. In other words, all movement along the X-axis will be prevented.

- By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply one directional restraint acting in the - X direction. This restraint resist movement in the positive X direction and allows movement in the negative X direction.

Limit Stops - By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply limit stop acting along the X-axis.

A limit stop is a device that will prevent further movement of a pipe after it has moved a specified allowed distance. This type of restraining action has also been referred to as a gap element. Through the use of limit stops and the limit fields, it is possible to code movement limits for a data point. It is also possible to code an initial movement of the pipe with the condition that if the pipe would tend to move away from this point, it may. By simply coding any one limit and zero (0) as the other limit, a one-directional limit stop may be coded. Users may code different gap spaces in each direction (positive and negative). In addition, both gaps can be specified with the same sign resulting in an initial movement being imposed and then a gap until the larger movement is encountered.

When a check is placed in the limit stop check box, the labels of the following three fields will be altered to allow the User to enter the following data:

Upper Limit – In this field, the User may specify the upper limit for the limit stop along the X-axis. The upper limit will be the most positive value for the limit stop.

Lower Limit – In this field, the User may specify the lower limit for the limit stop along the X-axis. The lower limit will be the least positive value for the limit stop.

Stiffness - In this field, the User may specify the stiffness of the limit stop along the X-axis. This stiffness will only come into effect after the pipe has deflected freely to the limit position of the limit stop. If no value for stiffness is specified by the User, TRIFLEX will assume the limit stop restraint to be totally rigid. To enter a definable value for the stiffness, the User must type the desired numerical value in this field.


205

When no check mark is placed in any of the four check boxes at the top of this column, the labels of the three fields following the Limit Stop check box will be as set forth below and will allow the User to enter the following data:

Movement - In this field, the User may define a Movement that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Movement is to be applied to the pipe in the negative X direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Movement along the X-axis, the Force and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a movement in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Movement on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.

Force - In this field, the User may define a Force that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the negative X direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the positive X direction, then the User need not enter any sign. When a User has entered a Force along the X-axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Movement field will be grayed out in order to prevent a movement from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Force in this field, TRIFLEX will imposed this force on the piping system and will continue to apply this Force no matter where the piping system moves.

Stiffness - The default for the Stiffness field is “FREE”. To enter a definable value for the stiffness, the User must type the desired numerical value in this field. To make the stiffness Free after having entered some other value, simply type F and TRIFLEX will display the word FREE.

When no check mark is placed in any of the top four check boxes and no values are entered for movement, force and stiffness, the User still has the option to instruct TRIFLEX to apply a damper at the Node Location as follows:

Damper - By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a damper acting in the + and - X direction. A damper is a two directional restraint that is considered to be totally rigid when an occasional loading case is being processed and totally free when an operating case is being processed. In other words, all movement along the X-axis will be allowed by the damper in the operating case but will be prevented in the occasional load case.

NOTE: Y-Axis check can only be placed in one check box for each translational axis action.

+ By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the + Y direction. These restraints resist movement in the negative Y direction and allow movement in the positive Y direction.


206

+ And - By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional translational restraint acting in the + and - Y direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive and negative Y directions. In other words, all movement along the Y-axis will be prevented.

- By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the - Y direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive Y direction and allow movement in the negative Y direction.

Limit Stops - By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply limit stop acting along the Y-axis. For more details concerning the application of a typical limit stop, see the discussion for limit stop acting along the X-axis.


Upper Limit – In this field, the User may specify the upper limit for the limit stop along the Y-axis. The upper limit will be the most positive value for the limit stop.

Lower Limit – In this field, the User may specify the lower limit for the limit stop along the Y-axis. The lower limit will be the least positive value for the limit stop.

Stiffness - In this field, the User may specify the stiffness of the limit stop along the Y-axis. This stiffness will only come into effect after the pipe has deflected freely to the limit position of the limit stop. If no value for stiffness is specified by the User, then TRIFLEX will assume the limit stop restraint to be totally rigid. To enter a definable value for the stiffness, the User must type the desired numerical value in this field.


Movement - In this field, the User may define a Movement that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Movement is to be applied to the pipe in the negative Y direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Movement along the Y-axis, the Force and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a movement in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Movement on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.


207

Force - In this field, the User may define a Force that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the negative Y direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the positive Y direction, then the User need not enter any sign. When a User has entered a Force along the Y-axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Movement field will be grayed out in order to prevent a movement from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Force in this field, TRIFLEX will imposed this force on the piping system and will continue to apply this Force no matter where the piping system moves.



Damper - By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a damper acting in the + and - Y direction. A damper is a two directional restraint that is considered to be totally rigid when an occasional loading case is being processed and totally free when an operating case is being processed. In other words, all movement along the Y-axis will be allowed by the damper in the operating case but will be prevented in the occasional load case.

Note: Z Axis check can only be placed in one check box for each translational axis action.

+ By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the + Z direction. This restraint resists movement in the negative Z direction and allows movement in the positive Z direction.

+ And - By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional translational restraint acting in the + and - Z direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive and negative Z directions. In other words, all movement along the Z-axis will be prevented.

- By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the - Z direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive Z direction and allow movement in the negative Z direction.


208

Limit Stops - By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply limit stop acting along the Z-axis. For more details concerning the application of a typical limit stop, see the discussion for limit stop acting along the X-axis


Upper Limit – In this field, the User may specify the upper limit for the limit stop along the Z-axis. The upper limit will be the most positive value for the limit stop.

Lower Limit – In this field, the User may specify the lower limit for the limit stop along the Z-axis. The lower limit will be the least positive value for the limit stop.

Stiffness - In this field, the User may specify the stiffness of the limit stop along the Z-axis. This stiffness will only come into effect after the pipe has deflected freely to the limit position of the limit stop. If no value for stiffness is specified by the User, TRIFLEX will assume the limit stop restraint to be totally rigid. To enter a definable value for the stiffness, the User must type the desired numerical value in this field.


Movement - In this field, the User may define a Movement that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Movement is to be applied to the pipe in the negative Z direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Movement along the Z-axis, the Force and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a movement in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Movement on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.

Force - In this field, the User may define a Force that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the negative Z direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the positive Z direction, then the User need not enter any sign. When a User has entered a Force along the Z-axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Movement field will be grayed out in order to prevent a movement from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Force in this field, TRIFLEX will imposed this force on the piping system and will continue to apply this Force no matter where the piping system moves.


209



Damper -By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a damper acting in the + and - Z direction. A damper is a two directional restraint that is considered to be totally rigid when an occasional loading case is being processed and totally free when an operating case is being processed. In other words, all movement along the Z-axis will be allowed by the damper in the operating case but will be prevented in the occasional load case.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Translational Restraint Action”, the User will find a data group entitled “Rotational Restraint Action”. When the X, Y, Z coordinate system is selected by the User, TRIFLEX will display the Rotational Restraint Action data group with the X axis, Y axis and Z axis headings. When the L, N, G coordinate system is selected by the User, TRIFLEX will display the Rotational Restraint Action data group with the L axis, N axis and G axis headings. When the A, B, C coordinate system is selected by the User, TRIFLEX will display the Rotational Restraint Action data group with the A axis, B axis and C axis headings. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

X, Y, Z coordinate system

X Axis

+ And - By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional rotational restraint acting about the X axis. These restraints resist rotation about the X-axis in the positive and negative directions. In other words, all rotations about the X-axis will be prevented.

When no check mark is placed in the + and - check box, the User may enter data in the following three fields:

Rotation - In this field, the User may define a Rotation that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Rotation is to be applied to the pipe about the X-axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Rotation about the X-axis, the Moment and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a


210

rotation in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Rotation on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.

Moment - In this field, the User may define a Moment that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the X-axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the X-axis in the positive direction, then the User need not enter any sign. When a User has entered a Moment about the X-axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Rotation field will be grayed out in order to prevent a rotation from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Moment in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this moment on the piping system and will continue to apply this Moment no matter where the piping system moves.


Y Axis

+ And - By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional rotational restraint acting about the Y axis. These restraints resist rotation about the Y-axis in the positive and negative directions. In other words, all rotations about the Y-axis will be prevented.


Rotation - In this field, the User may define a Rotation that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Rotation is to be applied to the pipe about the Y-axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Rotation about the Y-axis, the Moment and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a rotation in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Rotation on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.

Moment - In this field, the User may define a Moment that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the Y-axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the Y-axis in the positive direction, then the User need not enter any sign. When a User has entered a Moment about the Y-axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Rotation field will be grayed out in order to prevent a


211

rotation from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Moment in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this moment on the piping system and will continue to apply this Moment no matter where the piping system moves.


Z Axis

+ And - By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional rotational restraint acting about the Z axis. These restraints resist rotation about the Z-axis in the positive and negative directions. In other words, all rotations about the Z-axis will be prevented.


Rotation - In this field, the User may define a Rotation that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Rotation is to be applied to the pipe about the Z-axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Rotation about the Z-axis, the Moment and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a rotation in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Rotation on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.

Moment - In this field, the User may define a Moment that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the Z-axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the Z-axis in the positive direction, then the User need not enter any sign. When a User has entered a Moment about the Z-axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Rotation field will be grayed out in order to prevent a rotation from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Moment in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this moment on the piping system and will continue to apply this Moment no matter where the piping system moves.



212

3.3.3.2 Restraints Tab, L, N, G coordinate system

Figure 3.3.3.2-1 L,N,G coordinate system Pipe Support or Restraint

Figure 3.3.3.2-2 L,N,G coordinate system Restraint Tab

Note: L Axis check can only be placed in one check box for each translational axis action. The L axis is coincident with the axis of the pipe.


213

+ And - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional translational restraint acting in the + and - L direction. This restraint will resist movement in the positive and negative L directions. In other words, all movement along the axis of the pipe will be prevented.

Limit Stops - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply limit stop acting along the L axis.

A limit stop is a device that will prevent further movement of a pipe after it has moved a specified allowed distance. This type of restraining action has also been referred to as a gap element. Through the use of limit stops and the limit fields, it is possible to code movement limits for a data point. It is also possible to code an initial movement of the pipe with the condition that if the pipe would tend to move away from this point, it may. By simply coding any one limit and zero (0) as the other limit, an one-directional limit stop may be coded. Users may code different gap spaces in each direction (positive and negative). In addition, both gaps can be specified with the same sign resulting in an initial movement being imposed and then a gap until the larger movement is encountered.


Upper Limit – In this field, the User may specify the upper limit for the limit stop along the L axis. The upper limit will be the most positive value for the limit stop.

Lower Limit – In this field, the User may specify the lower limit for the limit stop along the L axis. The lower limit will be the least positive value for the limit stop.

Stiffness - In this field, the User may specify the stiffness of the limit stop along the L axis. This stiffness will only come into effect after the pipe has deflected freely to the limit position of the limit stop. If the User specifies no value for stiffness, TRIFLEX will assume the limit stop restraint to be totally rigid. To enter a definable value for the stiffness, the User must type the desired numerical value in this field.

Note: N Axis check mark can only be placed in one check box for each translational axis action). The N axis is normal to the pipe and the +N direction is the most vertical.

+ By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the + N direction. These


214

restraints resist movement in the negative N direction and allow movement in the positive N direction.

+ And - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional translational restraint acting in the + and - N direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive and negative N directions. In other words, all movement along the N axis will be prevented.

- By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the - Y direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive N direction and allow movement in the negative N direction.

Limit Stops - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply limit stop acting along the N axis. For more details concerning the application of a typical limit stop, see the discussion for limit stop acting along the L axis.

When a check mark is placed in the limit stop check box, the labels of the following three fields will be altered to allow the User to enter the following data:

Upper Limit – In this field, the User may specify the upper limit for the limit stop along the N axis. The upper limit will be the most positive value for the limit stop.

Lower Limit – In this field, the User may specify the lower limit for the limit stop along the N axis. The lower limit will be the least positive value for the limit stop.

Stiffness - In this field, the User may specify the stiffness of the limit stop along the N axis. This stiffness will only come into effect after the pipe has deflected freely to the limit position of the limit stop. If no value for stiffness is specified by the User, TRIFLEX will assume the limit stop restraint to be totally rigid. To enter a definable value for the stiffness, the User must type the desired numerical value in this field.

Note: G Axis check can only be placed in one check box for each translational axis action. The G axis is normal to the pipe and the most horizontal.

+ And - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional translational restraint acting in the + and - G direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive and negative G directions. In other words, all movement along the Z-axis will be prevented.


215

Limit Stops - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply limit stop acting along the G axis. For more details concerning the application of a typical limit stop, see the discussion for limit stop acting along the L axis

When a check mark is placed in the limit stop check box, the labels of the following three fields will be altered to allow the User to enter the following data:

Upper Limit – In this field, the User may specify the upper limit for the limit stop along the G axis. The upper limit will be the most positive value for the limit stop.

Lower Limit – In this field, the User may specify the lower limit for the limit stop along the G axis. The lower limit will be the least positive value for the limit stop.

Stiffness - In this field, the User may specify the stiffness of the limit stop along the G axis. This stiffness will only come into effect after the pipe has deflected freely to the limit position of the limit stop. If no value for stiffness is specified by the User, TRIFLEX will assume the limit stop restraint to be totally rigid. To enter a definable value for the stiffness, the User must type the desired numerical value in this field.

ü Immediately below the data group entitled “Translational Restraint Action”, the User will find a data group entitled “Rotational Restraint Action”. Rotational restraints may not be specified when the User has selected the L, N, G coordinate system. Therefore, all of the data fields in this data group are grayed out. The User can enter no data in this data group.


216

3.3.3.2 Restraints Tab, A, B, C coordinate system

Figure 3.3.3.3-1 A, B, C coordinate system Pipe Support or Restraint

Figure 3.3.3.3-2 A,B,C coordinate system Restraint Tab

A, B, C coordinate system (with Use Directional Vectors selected and the X vector, the Y vector and the Z vector specified)


217

Note: An Axis check mark can only be placed in one check box for each translational axis action. The resultant of the X vector, the Y vector and the Z vector defines the A axis.

+ By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the + A direction. These restraints resist movement in the negative a direction and allow movement in the positive a direction.

+ And - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional translational restraint acting in the + and - A direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive and negative a direction. In other words, all movement (plus or minus) along the A axis will be prevented.

- By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the - A direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive a direction and allow movement in the negative a direction.

Limit Stops - Limit stops may not be specified when the User has selected the A, B, C coordinate system. Therefore, this data field is grayed out.

ü When no check mark is placed in any of the check boxes at the top of this column, the labels of the three fields following the Limit Stop check box will be as set forth below and will allow the User to enter the following data:

Movement - In this field, the User may define a Movement that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Movement is to be applied to the pipe in the negative a direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Movement along the A axis, the Force and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a movement in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Movement on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.

Force - In this field, the User may define a Force that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the negative a direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the positive a direction, then the User need not enter any sign. When a User has entered a Force along the A axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Movement field will be grayed out in order to prevent a movement from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Force in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this force on the piping system and will continue to apply this Force no matter where the piping system moves.


218


Damper - Dampers may not be specified when the User has selected the A, B, C coordinate system and has selected the Use Directional Vectors option. Therefore, this data field is grayed out.

Note: That in the B Axis no data can be entered to describe a restraint acting along the B axis and therefore all data fields are grayed out.

Note: That in the C Axis no data can be entered to describe a restraint acting along the C axis and therefore all data fields are grayed out.

Immediately below the data group entitled “Translational Restraint Action”, the User will find a data group entitled “Rotational Restraint Action”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

A, B, C coordinate system (with Use Directional Vectors selected and the X vector, the Y vector and the Z vector specified)

A Axis

+ And - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional rotationa l restraint acting about the A axis. This restraint resist rotation about the A axis in the positive and negative directions. In other words, all rotations about the A axis will be prevented.


Rotation - In this field, the User may define a Rotation that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Rotation is to be applied to the pipe about the A axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Rotation about the A axis, the Moment and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a rotation in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Rotation on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.

Moment - In this field, the User may define a Moment that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the A axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the A axis in the positive direction, then the User need not enter


219

any sign. When a User has entered a Moment about the A axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Rotation field will be grayed out in order to prevent a rotation from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Moment in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this moment on the piping system and will continue to apply this Moment no matter where the piping system moves.


Note: That in the B Axis no data can be entered to describe a restraint acting about the B axis and therefore all data fields are grayed out. That in the C Axis no data can be entered to describe a restraint acting about the C axis and therefore all data fields are grayed out.

A, B, C coordinate system (with Use Action Angles selected and the A-X, A-Y, A-Z, C-X, C-Y and C-Z angles specified)

Note: That in the A Axis a check mark can only be placed in one check box for each translational axis action.

+ By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the + A direction. These restraints resist movement in the negative a direction and allow movement in the positive a direction.

+ And - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional translational restraint acting in the + and - A direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive and negative a direction. In other words, all movement along the A axis will be prevented.

- By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the - A direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive a direction and allow movement in the negative a direction.




220

Movement - In this field, the User may define a Movement that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Movement is to be applied to the pipe in the negative a direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Movement along the A axis, the Force and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a movement in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Movement on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.

Force - In this field, the User may define a Force that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the negative a direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the positive a direction, then the User need not enter any sign. When a User has entered a Force along the A axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Movement field will be grayed out in order to prevent a movement from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Force in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this force on the piping system and will continue to apply this Force no matter where the piping system moves.


Damper -Dampers may not be specified when the User has selected the A, B, C coordinate system. Therefore, this data field is grayed out.

Note: That in the B Axis a check mark can only be placed in one check box for each translational axis action.

+ By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the + B direction. These restraints resist movement in the negative B direction and allow movement in the positive B direction.

+ And - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional translational restraint acting in the + and - B direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive and negative B directions. In other words, all movement along the B axis will be prevented.

- By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the - B direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive B direction and allow movement in the negative B direction.


221



Movement - In this field, the User may define a Movement that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Movement is to be applied to the pipe in the negative B direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Movement along the B axis, the Force and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a movement in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Movement on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.

Force - In this field, the User may define a Force that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the negative B direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the positive B direction, then the User need not enter any sign. When a User has entered a Force along the B axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Movement field will be grayed out in order to prevent a movement from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Force in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this force on the piping system and will continue to apply this Force no matter where the piping system moves.


Damper - Dampers may not be specified when the User has selected the A, B, C coordinate system. Therefore, this data field is grayed out.

Note: That in the C Axis a check mark can only be placed in one check box for each translational axis action.

+ By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the + C direction. These restraints resist movement in the negative C direction and allow movement in the positive C direction.

+ And - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional translational restraint acting in the + and - C direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive and


222

negative C directions. In other words, all movement along the C axis will be prevented.

- By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a one directional restraint acting in the - C direction. These restraints resist movement in the positive C direction and allow movement in the negative C direction.


When no check mark is placed in any of the check boxes at the top of this column, the labels of the three fields following the Limit Stop check box will be as set forth below and will allow the User to enter the following data:

Movement - In this field, the User may define a Movement that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Movement is to be applied to the pipe in the negative C direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Movement along the C axis, the Force and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a movement in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Movement on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.

Force - In this field, the User may define a Force that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the negative C direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Force is to be applied to the pipe in the positive C direction, then the User need not enter any sign. When a User has entered a Force along the C axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Movement field will be grayed out in order to prevent a movement from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Force in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this force on the piping system and will continue to apply this Force no matter where the piping system moves.


Damper - Dampers may not be specified when the User has selected the A, B, C coordinate system. Therefore, this data field is grayed out.

ü Immediately below the data group entitled “Translational Restraint Action”, the User will find a data group entitled “Rotational Restraint Action”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:


223

A, B, C coordinate system (with Use Action Angles selected and the A-X, A-Y, A-Z, C-X, C-Y and C-Z angles specified)

A Axis

+ And - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional rotational restraint acting about the A axis. This restraint resist rotation about the A axis in the positive and negative directions. In other words, all rotations about the A axis will be prevented.


Rotation - In this field, the User may define a Rotation that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Rotation is to be applied to the pipe about the A axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Rotation about the A axis, the Moment and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a rotation in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Rotation on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.

Moment - In this field, the User may define a Moment that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the A axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the A axis in the positive direction, then the User need not enter any sign. When a User has entered a Moment about the A axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Rotation field will be grayed out in order to prevent a rotation from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Moment in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this moment on the piping system and will continue to apply this Moment no matter where the piping system moves.


B Axis

+ And - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional rotational restraint acting about the B axis. This restraint resists rotation about the B axis in the positive and negative directions. In other words, all rotations about the B axis will be prevented.


224


Rotation - In this field, the User may define a Rotation that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Rotation is to be applied to the pipe about the B axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Rotation about the B axis, the Moment and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a rotation in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Rotation on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.

Moment - In this field, the User may define a Moment that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the B axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the B axis in the positive direction, then the User need not enter any sign. When a User has entered a Moment about the B axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Rotation field will be grayed out in order to prevent a rotation from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Moment in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this moment on the piping system and will continue to apply this Moment no matter where the piping system moves.


C Axis

+ And - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply a two directional rotational restraint acting about the C axis. This restraint resists rotation about the C axis in the positive and negative directions. In other words, all rotations about the C axis will be prevented.


Rotation - In this field, the User may define a Rotation that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Rotation is to be applied to the pipe about the C axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. When the User has entered a Rotation about the C axis, the Moment and Stiffness fields are grayed out in order to prevent the User from entering data in these fields. When the User enters a


225

rotation in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this Rotation on the piping system and will hold the piping system at that position in the analysis.

Moment - In this field, the User may define a Moment that the User wishes to impose on the pipe at the restraint location. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the C axis in the negative direction, then the User must enter the numerical value preceded by a negative sign. If the Moment is to be applied to the pipe about the C axis in the positive direction, then the User need not enter any sign. When a User has entered a Moment about the C axis, the Stiffness field will default to Free and the Rotation field will be grayed out in order to prevent a rotation from being entered in this field by the User. When the User enters a numerical value for the Moment in this field, TRIFLEX will impose this moment on the piping system and will continue to apply this Moment no matter where the piping system moves.


Immediately below the data group entitled “Rotational Restraint Action”, the User will find a data group entitled “Spring Hanger”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined in sub-section “3.3.3.3 Springs”.


226

3.3.3.3 Spring Hanger/Support

Figure 3.3.3.3-1 Springs - Restraints Tab, Size a Spring Hanger

Size a Spring Hanger - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User can instruct TRIFLEX to size a spring hanger at this node location. When the X, Y, Z coordinate system is selected, the spring hanger will be considered to act along the Y-axis. When the L, N, G coordinate system is selected by the User, the spring hanger will be considered to act along the N axis. When the A, B, C coordinate system is selected by the User, the spring hanger will be considered to act along the B axis. Please note that the User may not place a check mark in the “Existing Spring Hanger” check box if a check mark has been placed in this “Size a Spring Hanger” check box.

Allowed Load Variation – The default value that appears in this field is 25 percent. The User can enter any other desired numerical value in this field.

No. Of Spring Hangers - The default value that appears in this field is “1” which means that TRIFLEX will default to sizing one spring hanger at this location. The User can enter another desired numerical value in this field to indicate the number of spring hangers that the User wants TRIFLEX to size at this location. If a number of two or more is entered by the User, TRIFLEX will divide the total load carried at this node location by the number of desired spring hangers and will size the hangers based upon the resulting loads.

Existing Spring Hanger - By placing a check mark in this check box, the User can instruct TRIFLEX to use the existing spring hanger data entered by the User in the following two fields at this node location. When the X, Y, Z coordinate system is selected, the spring hanger will be considered to act along the Y-axis. When the L, N, G coordinate system is selected by the User, the spring hanger will be considered to act along the N axis. When the A, B, C coordinate system is


227

selected by the User, the spring hanger will be considered to act along the B axis. Please note that the User may not place a check mark in the “Size a Spring Hanger” check box if a check mark has been placed in this “Existing Spring Hanger” check box.

Installed Load - When modeling an existing spring, the User should enter the installed load and the spring rate (in the following field) for the spring hanger. If the installed load is unknown, the User should enter the operating load with a spring rate of 1. By specifying the operating load as essentially a constant load, the load applied to the piping system by TRIFLEX at this location at operating conditions will be equal to the load found in the field at operating conditions. The movement from this type of analysis may be used to re-size the spring hanger, if the User desires.

Spring Rate – The User should enter the spring rate for the spring hanger only when the existing installed load is known. If the installed load is unknown, the User should enter the operating load with a spring rate of 1.


228

3.3.4 Wind Load and Uniform Load Tab

Figure 3.3.4.0-1 Anchor Component, Wind Load Tab

3.3.4.1 Wind Loading, Specifying Wind Speed

Figure 3.3.4.1-1 Wind Load Tab, X axis, Specifying Wind Speed


229

Figure 3.3.4.1-2 Wind Load Tab, Z axis, Specifying Wind Speed

For every piping system where wind or uniform loads are to be considered, the User must enter the wind load data or the uniform load data. To enter the required data, the User must click on the Wind Loads tab at the top of the screen on the first component on which the wind or uniform loads are to be applied. Upon clicking on the tab, a Wind Load dialog will be presented to the User.

The data is organized in related data groups on this dialog. On the first line of the Wind Load dialog, TRIFLEX®Windows provides three radio buttons for the User to select from. The default is “None”. If the User wishes to enter Wind Loads, the User should click on the Wind Loading radio button. If the User wishes to enter Uniform Loads, the User should click on the Uniform Loading radio button.

If the “None” radio button is selected, all fields on the dialog will be grayed out and inaccessible by the User.

ü If the User selects Wind Loading, the Wind Loading data group will be made active as will the Load Angles data group. Immediately below the three radio buttons and in the left column of the Wind Loads dialog, a data group entitled “Wind Loading” will be available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Wind Speed – In this field, the User may enter a numerical value for the Wind Speed. When a value is entered in this field, TRIFLEX®Windows will calculate the Wind Load based upon the projected pipe shape. In the event that the pipe is insulated, the projected pipe shape will include the insulation.

From ANSI A58.1 (1982) Para. - 6.5 Velocity Pressure


230

Velocity Pressure (lbs/ft5) @ height z = 0.00256 x KHz (IV)5

Where:

KHz = Velocity pressure exposure (Table 6)

I = Importance Factor (Table 5)

V = Wind speed (MPH) (Fig 1 or Table 7)

Wind Load: (lbs per linear inch of pipe) calculated by TRIFLEX:

Where:

V1 = Wind speed supplied by User in the Wspeed field to accommodate extraneous factors.

Hz x I x V speed WindSuggested =

When the User enters Wind Speed, TRIFLEX will automatically calculate additional loads and stresses that result from the wind loads. The true effect of the wind loads will be projected onto the piping system.

Wind Pressure – In this field, the User may enter a numerical value for the Wind Pressure. When a value is entered in this field, TRIFLEX will calculate the resulting Wind Load based upon the projected pipe area and the shape factor. In the event that the pipe is insulated, the projected pipe shape will include the insulation.

Shape Factor – The factor for a flat surface is 1.0. The factor for a cylinder is typically considered to be 0.6. See the latest version of the ANSI A58.1 Standard for further data.

Wind Load – In this field, the User may enter the actual numerical value for the Wind Load that is to be applied to each unit length of the pipe. When a value is entered in this field, TRIFLEX will simply apply the entered load. No calculations for projected area will be performed, no shape factor will be considered and entering pipe insulation will have no effect. Wind load must be entered as a positive number.

If the User selects Uniform Loading, the Uniform Loading data group will be made active as will the Load Angles data group. Immediately below the data


231

group entitled “Wind Loading”, a data group entitled “Uniform Loading” will be available for User data entry. The field in which data can be entered in this data group is defined below:

Uniform Load – In this field, the User may enter the actual numerical value for the Uniform Load that is to be applied to each unit length of the pipe. When a value is entered in this field, TRIFLEX will simply apply the entered load. No calculations for projected area will be performed, no shape factor will be considered and entering pipe insulation will have no effect. Uniform load must be entered as a positive number.

When the User selects Wind Loading or Uniform Loading, the Load Angles data group will be made active. Immediately to the right of the data group entitled “Wind Loading”, a data group entitled “Load Angles” will be available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Wind or Uniform Loading Angles – In this data group, the User may enter the angles between the wind or uniform load vector and the actual numerical value for the global X, Y, and Z-axes. These angles must be between 0 and 180 degrees.

Load - Angles

X - Axis 90 degrees

Y - Axis 90 degrees

Z - Axis 0 degrees

Figure 3.3.4.1-3 Wind Loads for the Z plane of action

Load Vector – In this data group, the User may enter 1 or -1 for the plane which the wind actually acts onto the pipe. Plus 1 follows for that plane and minus 1 is against that plane.

Load Vector

X - Axis 0

Y - Axis 0

Z - Axis 1



232


233

Figure 3.3.4.1-5 Winds Loads along the X plane

The load angles for this figure are:

L-angles-X=180.00

L-angles-Y=90.00

L-angles-Z=90.00


234

Figure 3.3.4.1-6 Wind Loads along the Z plane


L-angles-X=90.00

L-angles-Y=90.00

L-angles-Z=0.00

Ripple– When the User has modified one or more data entries on the Wind Loads dialog, the User can instruct TRIFLEX to modify all subsequent occurrences of these data entries that are in an unbroken series from the original revision forward by pressing the Ripple button.


235

3.3.4.2 Wind Loading, Pressure Force and Shape Factor

Figure 3.3.4.2-1 Wind Load Tab, X axis, Pressure Force and Shape Factor

Figure 3.3.4.2-2 Wind Load Tab, Z axis, Pressure Force and Shape Factor


The data is organized in related data groups on this dialog. On the first line of the Wind Load dialog, TRIFLEX®Windows provides three radio buttons for the User to select from. The default is “None”. If the User wishes to enter Wind Loads,


236

the User should click on the Wind Loading radio button. If the User wishes to enter Uniform Loads, the User should click on the Uniform Loading radio button.



Load Angles – In this data group, the User may enter the angles between the wind or uniform load vector and the actual numerical value for the global X, Y, and Z-axes. These angles must be between 0 and 180 degrees.

Load - Angles

X - Axis 90 degrees

Y - Axis 90 degrees

Z - Axis 0 degrees



Load Vector

X - Axis 0

Y - Axis 0

Z - Axis 1



237



L-angles-X=180.00

L-angles-Y=90.00

L-angles-Z=90.00


238



L-angles-X=90.00

L-angles-Y=90.00

L-angles-Z=0.00



239

3.3.4.3 Wind Loading, Actual Load

Figure 3.3.4.3-1 Wind Load Tab, X axis, Actual Load

Figure 3.3.4.3-2 Wind Load Tab, Z axis, Actual Load




240





Load - Angles

X - Axis 90 degrees

Y - Axis 90 degrees

Z - Axis 0 degrees



Load Vector

X - Axis 0

Y - Axis 0

Z - Axis 1



241



L-angles-X=180.00

L-angles-Y=90.00

L-angles-Z=90.00


242



L-angles-X=90.00

L-angles-Y=90.00

L-angles-Z=0.00



243

3.3.4.4 Uniform Load

Figure 3.3.4.4-1 Uniform Load Tab, X axis

Figure 3.3.4.4-2 Uniform Load Tab, Z axis




244




Uniform Load – In this field, the User may enter the actual numerical value for the Uniform Load that is to be applied to each unit length of the pipe. When a value is entered in this field, TRIFLEX will simply apply the entered load. No calculations for projected area will be performed, no shape factor will be considered and entering pipe insulation will have no effect. Uniform load must be entered as a positive number.

When the User selects Wind Loading or Uniform Loading, the Load Angles data group will be made active. Immediately to the right of the data group entitled “Wind Loading”, a data group entitled “Load Angles” will be available for User data entry. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:


Load - Angles

X - Axis 90 degrees

Y - Axis 90 degrees

Z - Axis 0 degrees



245


Load Vector

X - Axis 0

Y - Axis 0

Z - Axis 1



246



L-angles-X=180.00

L-angles-Y=90.00

L-angles-Z=90.00


247



L-angles-X=90.00

L-angles-Y=90.00

L-angles-Z=0.00



248

3.3.5 Soil Load Tab

Figure 3.3.5.0-1 Anchor Component, Soil Loads Tab

3.3.5.1 Overview of Soil Modeling

In this section we will discuss one of the strengths of TRIFLEX®Windows, that is modeling underground piping. To do this we need to understand soil and soil modeling.

Soil resistance to pipe movement is specified as a system of variable spring stiffness. As the pipe moves against the soil, the soil will offer a resistance to that movement. Since soil is non- linear in nature, the resistance may vary as the movement increases. TRIFLEX allows up to four sets of movements / stiffness for each direction considered in the analysis. This enables the user to better define the soil properties.

However before we jump into this subject we must consider the steps we must take to approach this problem. We must follow the following checklist or when we get to the end and want to see our underground piping system and find that it is modeled as an above ground piping system we will get frustrated to say the least.

Checklist for Underground Pipe Modeling.

1. Go to Setup in the Main Menu.


249

2. If you are starting a Project, then it would be a good time to Input the Project Data under the Setup Pull Down menu, and select Project.

3. If you are starting an analysis, then select the Input Units under the Setup Pull Down menu, and select Input Units. (Always check your Units)

4. Do the same for the Output Units. (Always check your Units)

5. Next under the Setup Pull Down menu, select Modeling Defaults, or what code you want to use. The Piping Code used most often for underground piping is B31.8 – (DOT Guidelines) ASME Gas Transmission & Distribution System Code .

A. To start with make sure the “density of surrounding fluids” is input as zero. )ftlbs/ 0 3( If you input the density of water )ftlbs/ 34.62( then you are modeling offshore piping and not underground piping.

B. If this is a High Pressure Gas Transmission line then checking the following is recommended.

• Include rotational pressure deformation.

• Include translational pressure deformation.

• Include pressure stiffening effects.

C. Also the “User Defined maximum number of iterations allowed to solve for non-linear restraints” should be a high number like 200.

D. Friction deviation tolerance in Percent (%). This will be referenced later in this section on soil modeling. Default is 20.

E. Maximum spacing with respect to Diameter is input as zero. This will be referenced later in this section on soil modeling.

6. Next under the Setup Pull Down menu, select Case Definition Data. By skipping this before beginning soil modeling you will miss the fact that YOU the USER must check “Soil Interaction” in this screen or you will NOT have underground piping but above ground piping. Remember the frustration I mentioned. Well this is where it comes from. Therefore check off “Soil Interaction” under LOAD CASE # 1 and continue.

7. If you have Seismic to consider then you will go to the “Occasional Loading” selection next. For more on Seismic see section 3.3.5 Occasional Loading Data and section 3.4.6 Mode Shapes and Frequencies. Also see pages 28 thru 45 of this manual and the check boxes discussed.

8. Note: When you model underground piping the piping shown in your model will look like it has whiskers or small fins or heat exchangers attached to


250

the piping. Do not worry this is correct and is shown in TRIFLEX®Windows this way. The soil spring effect or “system of variable spring stiffness” where shown in the original DOS version of TRIFLEX with spring symbols. This will become very important to determine where your underground piping ends and where you’re above ground piping begins.

3.3.5.2 Understanding the Soil Load Tab

For every piping system where soil loading is to be considered, the User must enter the soil related data. To enter the required data, the User must click on the Soil Loads tab at the top of the screen on the first component on which the soil loads are to be applied. Upon clicking on the tab, a Soil Loads dialog will be presented to the User.

Figure 3.3.5.2-1 Soil Loads Tab (Use method in ASME B31.1- 2001)

The data is organized in related data groups on this dialog. On the first line of the Soil Loads dialog, TRIFLEX®Windows provides three radio buttons for the User to select from. The default is “None”. If the User wishes to consider Soil Loads, the User can select between the middle radio button and the right radio button. Each radio button and resultant option is explained in the following text.

If the User selects the left most radio button (“None”), all fields on the dialog will be grayed out and inaccessible by the User.

If the User selects the middle radio button (Use method specified in ASME B31.1 - 2001), all the fields in the ASME B31.1 Appendix VII Soil Parameters data


251

group will be made active and available for data entry. See Figure 3.3.5.2-1. Immediately below the three radio buttons, a data group entitled “ASME B31.1 - 2001 Appendix VII Soil Parameters” will be available for User data entry. The data group entitled Table of Soil Loads and Stiffness will be grayed out and inaccessible for data entry.

Figure 3.3.5.2-2 Soil Loads Tab (User Defined Loads and Stiffness)

If the User selects the right-most radio button (User Defined Loads and Stiffness), all the fields in the Table of Soil Loads and Stiffness data group will be made active and available for data entry. See Figure 3.3.5.2-2 above. The data group entitled “ASME B31.1 - 2001 Appendix VII Soil Parameters” will be grayed out and inaccessible for data entry.

The fields in which data can be entered in these data groups are defined below:


252

First, the middle radio button (Use method specified in ASME B31.1 - 2001)

Figure 3.3.5.2-3 Soil Loads Tab (Use method in ASME B31.1 - 2001)

The middle radio button (Use method specified in ASME B31.1 - 2001), data can be entered by the User in the following fields in the ASME B31.1 - 2001 Appendix VII Soil Parameters data group:

Density – In this field, the User may enter a numerical value for the density of the soil surrounding the pipe. This value is used to calculate vertical load and stiffness.

Density Units: lbs/ft3., N/m3, kg/m3, kg/m3 (Always check your Units)

Backfill - In this field, TRIFLEX®Windows will display the default backfill – “NONE”. The User must select the desired backfill from the drop down combo list in this field. The backfill type must be entered if the User wants TRIFLEX to use the data found in Table VII-3.2.3 in Marston's formula for pipes buried below three times the pipe Diameter. The available selections are:

ü Damp Top Soil

Saturated Top Soil

Damp Yellow Clay

Saturated Yellow Clay

Dry Sand


253

Wet Sand

Depth – In this field, the User must enter the depth – the distance from grade to the centerline of the pipe. This value is needed for the calculation of the vertical load and the soil stiffness. The User may enter the load coefficient, undoing the effect of depth on the load calculation.

Depth Units: in, mm, cm, mm (Always check your Units)

Trench Width - In this field, the User must enter the trench width – the width of the trench that was dug in which the pipe is buried. This value is needed if the User wishes TRIFLEX to apply Marston's formula for pipes buried below three times the pipe Diameter.

Trench Width: in, mm, cm, mm (Always check your Units)

As soon as the vertical load is calculated, it appears in the Vertical Load field in the Table of Soil Loads and Stiffness data group. The User can modify any of the values displayed in the Table of Soil Loads and Stiffness data group.

Load Coefficient – In this field, the load coefficient calculated by TRIFLEX®Windows according to Table VII-3.2.3 of the ASME B31.1 - 2001 Appendix VII will be displayed. The User may override the value by entering a different numerical value in this field. The load coefficient is used for the calculation of vertical loads and applied to pipes buried more than three pipe Diameters below grade.

Horizontal Stiffness Factor - In this field, the User must enter the horizontal stiffness factor. This value is needed in order to calculate the lateral stiffness. Recommended values below are from ASME B31.1 - 2001, Appendix VII-3.2.2:

ü Loose soil 20

Medium soil 30

Dense or compact soil 80

Axial Friction Coefficient - In this field, the User may specify the upper limit for the axial frictional force as a fraction of the resultant normal forces acting on the pipe. The normal forces consist of the lateral and transverse components, each dependent on the respective stiffness and movement. The total weight of the soil above the pipe, the pipe, and the pipe contents are loads that would be considered in these forces acting on the pipe.

As the User enters the above listed data variables, TRIFLEX®Windows performs calculations in accordance with the procedures set forth in the ASME B31.1 - 2001 Appendix VII Soil Parameters. As the data is entered and the calculations


254

performed, TRIFLEX places the calculated values in the data fields in the Table of Soil Loads and Stiffness data group located at the bottom of the dialog.

Second, the right-most radio button (User Defined Loads and Stiffness)

Figure 3.3.5.2-4 Soil Loads Tab (User Defined Loads and Stiffness)

If the User selects the right-most radio button (User Defined Loads and Stiffness), all the fields in the Table of Soil Loads and Stiffness data group will be made active and available for data entry. The data group entitled “ASME B31.1 - 2001 Appendix VII Soil Parameters” will be grayed out and inaccessible for data entry.

Axial Friction Coefficient - In this field, the User may specify the upper limit for the axial frictional force as a fraction of the resultant normal forces acting on the pipe. The normal forces consist of the lateral and transverse components, each dependent on the respective stiffness and movement. The total weight of the soil above the pipe, the pipe, and the pipe contents are loads that would be considered in these forces acting on the pipe.

Vertical Load - In this field, the User may specify the desired vertical load. The vertical load is parallel to the pull of gravity (the direction the force of weight acts), regardless of the orientation of the pipe. The User may estimate the load (per unit length) from the weight of backfill (density, depth, width).

Vertical Load Units: lbs/in, N/mm, kg/cm, N/mm (Always check your Units)

The remainder of the data that can be entered in the fields in the Table of Soil Loads and Stiffness data group is divided into four additional sub-groups as described below. Each sub-group contains the stiffness for the specified range of movements. The soil resistance to pipe movement is specified by the User as a system of variable spring stiffness. As the pipe moves against the soil, the soil will offer a resistance to that movement. Since soil is non-linear in nature, the


255

resistance may vary as the movement increases. TRIFLEX®Windows allows up to four pairs of movements and stiffness for each direction considered in the analysis. This enables the User to more accurately define the soil properties.

Movements and Stiffness Units: (inches, lbs/ft/ft), (mm, N/m/m), (cm, kg/m/m), (mm, N/m/m)

The significance of movement and stiffness pairs is best explained by considering the following example. Consider the following Table (regardless of units).

Movement Stiffness

1 1000

3 500

4 -200

Figure 3.3.5.2-5 Movement

All forces in the following are per unit length of the piping.

For movement ? 1 resistance is (1000)(1 unit of movement), up to 1000 force

for 1 < movement ? 3 resistance is (1000 + (500)(3 units - 1) up to 2000 force

For 3 < movement ? 4 resistance is (2000 - (200)(4 units - 3) up to 1800 force

For movement > 4 resistances is 1800 force (implied zero stiffness).

NOTE: The negative stiffness indicates soil loses strength.

Axial Direction - The axial direction is determined by the pipe direction, or tangent to the bend. When values are specified by the User in the movement and soil stiffness fields, as well as the Axial Friction coefficient field, both will be used in the analysis.

Lateral Direction - The lateral direction for a run of pipe is perpendicular to the axis of the pipe and horizontal. For an elbow (bend), this direction is in the radial direction. The bend beginning and bend end points will be treated as bend points and, therefore, will use the radial direction.


256

Transverse Up - The transverse up direction for a run of pipe is the upward direction and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. For an elbow (bend), this direction is perpendicular to the axial and radial direction.

Transverse Down - The transverse down direction for a run of pipe is the downward direction and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. For an elbow (bend), this direction is perpendicular to the axial and radial direction.

The stiffness for the Transverse Down direction may be altered to reflect a well-packed condition. A value such as 1,000,000 pounds per foot per foot length of pipe may be used to indicate a well-packed condition. The coding of this number may be accomplished by entering the numerical value in the following fashion, 1E6.

Ripple – When the User has modified one or more data entries on the Soil Loads dialog, the User can instruct TRIFLEX®Windows to modify all subsequent occurrences of these data entries that are in an unbroken series from the original revision forward by pressing the Ripple button.


257

3.3.5.3 Soil/Pipe Interaction

Soil / Pipe interactions in TRIFLEX®Windows are simulated by using spring stiffness to simulate the elastic / plastic properties of the soil that surrounds the pipe. An axial coefficient of soil friction is also available.

The soil spring stiffness that will be applied at the end of each element to simulate soil resistance, k(i, j), (lbs/ft), is a function of the stiffness of the soil per unit length of the pipe (k), i.e. pounds per foot stiffness per foot of pipe length.

kl = k j) (i, (Equation 1)

where:

k = stiffness of soil per unit length of the pipe, lbs/ft/(ft of pipe length)

l = element length, feet (one half of the element lengths of both elements terminating at this point)

Reference ASME B31.1-2001, Appendix VII-4.2 The stiffness of the soil (lbs/ft) defines the resistance of the soil or backfill to pipe movement due to the bearing pressure at the pipe / soil interface. It must be noted that the above k is a combination of the k and the d in VII-4.2.2, equation 12. (Note the Units)

TRIFLEX offers the guidelines provided in Appendix VII of the ASME B31.1 - 2001 Power Piping Code Book to automatically calculate soil stiffness. Alternatively, TRIFLEX®Windows also allows users to input their own stiffness values. The user may input predetermined soil stiffness. Up to four stiffness for each soil / pipe interaction along with a range of movement for each stiffness may be input by the user.

Suggested element lengths (l) when performing an analysis of underground pipe depends completely upon the piping system being coded. In the area where movement against the soil is expected to be significant, the element length should be shorter than in the area where movement is not expected to be significant.


258

ASME B31.1 - 2001, in these areas of high movements, suggest that the element length be between 2 and 3 pipe Diameters.

The coding of an underground piping system in TRIFLEX®Windows does not require users to code these short element lengths. Coding in TRIFLEX for underground piping only requires the coding of anchors, elbows, tees, reducers, valves, and / or flanges. Extremely long lengths will be coded on many data points. The breaking up of the buried portions into elements of convenient lengths is internally performed by the TRIFLEX®Windows program based on the default values set by the user.

Soil Spring Stiffness

There are many methods that have been developed to determine the soil spring stiffness. TRIFLEX®Windows offers an automatic calculation of this spring stiffness based on the methods specified in the ASME B31.1 - 2001 Appendix VII and an alternate method of inputting up to four soil spring stiffness for up to four possible movements of the pipe against the soil. This second type of method provides a means to improve the definition of the soil / pipe interactions. Each soil spring stiffness may have it's own yield displacement value. TRIFLEX offers these four ranges because, testing has shown that soil is stiffest for very small movements, but becomes less stiff as the pipe movements increase.

The following set of charts help to describe the expression, Soil Spring Stiffness. The first chart is the most basic. It demonstrates the soil resistance (R) against the soil displacement (δ). After the soil has reached ultimate yield displacement, the soil will offer an Ultimate Soil Resistance (Ru) (a constant force).

Figure 3.3.5.3-1 Soil Displacement Curve


259

The second chart shows a model that reflects four different soil spring stiffness. Each of the straight lines reflected indicate a continuing softening of the soil until it reaches its ultimate yield displacement.


TRIFLEX®Windows also allows for the coding of any soil spring stiffness. The values may be for progressive softening, softening and stiffening, or even a stiffness with a negative value to indicate that the soil has a strength loss. These possible methods are demonstrated in the following diagrams.


260

1 2

3

(1) Progressive Softening (2) Stiffening and Softening (3) Strength Loss

Soil Models


Element Lengths

The length of a piping element to be analyzed is dependent on whether the element is within a critical area or not. Elbows and tees may be classified as critical areas.

A critical area is that area where the soil will have an influence on the movement of the pipe.

Critical areas will required more points to better simulate the soil. In TRIFLEX®Windows, only the total critical and non-critical lengths need to be coded. TRIFLEX will break up these total lengths into the needed convenient lengths to properly simulate the soil properties based on spacing data provided by the user.

ASME B31.1 - 2001 recommends a spacing of no more than 3 pipe Diameters for critical areas.

To determine the length of pipe for which this critical spacing should be used, ASME B31.1 - 2001 recommends applying the following formula:


261

in ,43

= lβπ

(Equation 2)

where

β = is calculate using equation (4) in paragraph VII-3.2.4 of the ASME B31.1-2001, Appendix VII.

4EIk

= 1/4

β (Equation 3) (in-1, mm-1, cm-1, mm-1)

where

k = soil stiffness, (lbs/in/in, N/mm/mm, kg/cm/cm, N/mm/mm)

E = Young's modulus for pipe, (lbs/in2, N/mm2, kg/cm2, N/mm2)

I = area moment of inertia for pipe, (in.4, mm.4, cm.4, mm.4)

Non-critical areas may have any spacing that the user prefers.

Soil Spring Orientation

Simulation of soil stiffness is accomplished by using spring stiffness within the TRIFLEX®Windows program. Four spring stiffness are used at each point on the piping system modeled by the user and generated by the TRIFLEX program. These spring orientations are discussed below:

Run of Pipe, Valve, Flange, Joint

The orientation of the set of springs to simulate soil for these elements are as follows:

1) Axial direction of the pipe

2) Transverse horizontal direction of the pipe (perpendicular to the axis of the pipe and horizontal)


262

3) The transverse Up direction

4) The transverse Down direction

The actual direction of the up and down direction is the direction that is perpendicular to the axial direction and the transverse horizontal directions.

The element is set up with one set of springs to simulate the soil. This will be at the end of the element.

Elbow

The orientation of the set of springs to simulate soil for an elbow is as follows:

1) Axial direction of the elbow

2) Radial direction (transverse)

3) The Up direction

4) The Down direction

The actual direction of the up and down direction is the direction that is perpendicular to the axial and radial directions.

The elbow is set up with three sets of springs. The first at the beginning of the elbow (near juncture of the run pipe and the beginning of the elbow). The second at the mid point of the declared bend. The third at the end point of the elbow (far juncture of the elbow and the beginning of the run pipe).

NOTE: The up and down direction are along the same axis. TRIFLEX®Windows allows a user to code different stiffness for the up and down direction. The movement of the pipe determines which stiffness TRIFLEX should use for the analysis.

Spacing and Data Point Numbering for Run Pipes and Elbows

Run Pipes


263

Users are encouraged to code only the minimum number of required data screens to input a job with soil properties. The breaking up of each user coded element will be performed by TRIFLEX®Windows. The length of each element will be based on one of three parameters.

The first parameter is a Global Value . It will apply to all coded delta dimensions unless overridden through use of a Local Value . This is the field, Maximum spacing on the ”Elbow Data Tab” or “Pipe Data Tab” screens . If this field is left blank and soil parameters have been input, this parameter will default to 3 pipe Diameters, even though it will have zero in the Max. Spacing . 0 . ft box.

The second parameter is a Local Value . It will be used only on the element where it was coded. This is the Maximum Spacing field found on each ”Elbow Data Tab” or “Pipe Data Tab” screen. Use of this parameter will override the Maximum Spacing. Users may find it convenient to use this field on non-critical lengths.

The third parameter is also a Local Value . It will be used only on the element where it was coded. This is the Number of Intermediate Data Points field found on each ”Elbow Data Tab” or “Pipe Data Tab” screen. Use of this parameter will also override the Maximum Spacing.

Elbows (Bends)

When an elbow is specified, three sets of soil springs will be placed on that elbow. The first set is placed on the bend beginning point, the second at the bend mid-point, and the third at the bend end point. All three of these points will have the orientation of these springs for elbows as defined in the following section.

When three points on an elbow will not adequately define the soil / pipe interaction for an elbow, the elbow may be broken up in to as many as nine elbows, which would result in 19 sets of springs beings used on that elbow. Users may tell TRIFLEX®Windows how many elbows to break up an elbow by placing a value in the field No of Bends on the bend detail screen.


264

The following equation may be used to determine how many sets of springs will be placed on an elbow where the user has specified No of Bends .

1 + 2* Bends) of (No = setsSpring


265

3.3.5.4 Coding Underground Piping

The following input screens demonstrate through a tutorial how to code a piping system for underground piping in the TRIFLEX®Windows program.

Given Information

The following soil characteristics for the soil were obtained from the ASME B31.1 - 2001, Appendix VII, paragraph VII-6.1.2:

Soil density (w) = 130 lbs/ft3 Trench width (Bd) = 36in.= (12 ft)

Pipe depth (H) = 144 in. = (12 ft) Coeff. of Friction ( µ ) = 0.3 to 0.5 max.

Backfill = Dry sand Horizontal Stiff Fact(Ck)= 80

The following screens are shown only to reflect the input of each of these values.

Figure 3.3.5.4-1 Anchor Data, Type/Location Tab

Pipe

Size =12 inch (nominal) Sch. = Std. Thickness (t) = 0.375 inch

Corrosion = 0 Insulation = none Specific Gravity = 0

Material = CS = Carbon Steel Pipe.

Operating Conditions


266

T ambient = 70 °F T1 = 140 °F P1 = 100 psig

Figure 3.3.5.4-2 First Anchor, Pipe Properties Tab

Figure 3.3.5.4-3 First Anchor, Process Tab


267

Figure 3.3.5.4-4 First Anchor, Initial Mvt/Rots Tab

Figure 3.3.5.4-5 First Anchor, Wind/Uniform Tab


268

Figure 3.3.5.4-6 First Anchor, Soil Loads Tab

First, the middle radio button (Use method specified in ASME B31.1)

Remember the given information.

Soil density (w) = 130 lbs/ft3 Trench width (Bd) = 36in.= (12 ft)

Pipe depth (H) = 144 in. = (12 ft) Coeff. of Friction ( µ ) = 0.3 to 0.5 max.

Backfill = Dry sand Horizontal Stiff Fact(Ck)= 80


269

The density of the soil, 130 lbs/ft3 is input into the Density field. This value will be used to calculate the vertical load of the soil on the pipe.

Figure 3.3.5.4-7 Soil Loads Tab

The depth of the pipe below grade, 144 in. (12 ft), should be coded in the Depth field.



270

The type of backfill should be coded in the next field. Use the pull down menu to select the backfill. This type indicator (Dry Sand) is used for looking up the Cd value when using the Marston's equation.


The trench width is coded into the next field, 36 inches (3 ft).



271

With the given data TRIFLEX is able to determine the Load coefficient value Cd.

Note how the Load Coefficient is now calculated for you, note “2.22’.


Next the user should code in the axial coefficient of friction between the soil and the pipe, “0.3’. See screen below.



272

The user should now code in the horizontal stiffness factor of the soil. Horizontal stiffness = 80 (This example).


TRIFLEX®Windows calculates the soil stiffness based on the data provided by the user. This data is calculated and shown in the screen below in the appropriate fields. The values shown have the units of pounds per foot of pipe per foot length of pipe. See Table of Soil Loads and Stiffness in screen below.



273

Determining Length or Critical Length Example

In determining the length to code for the piping system, the determination of whether this is in a critical area or not is important. Since elbows are considered to be critical areas we will use the equation provided by the ASME B31.1 - 2001 to determine the length of a critical area.

Equation 5 and 15 will be used to determine this delta dimension. See length in Equation 20.

wDNC = k hkh (Equation 4)

80 = CK (Equation 5)

4.3 + H/D 0.285 = N h (Equation 6)

)ft/in /(1728ftlbs/ 130 = w 333 (Equation 7)

inlbs/ 0.0752 = w 3 (Equation 8)

in 12.75 = D (Equation 9)

12.75))(0.0752)((80)(7.519 = k h (Equation 10)

lbs/in 577 = K H (Equation 11)

TRIFLEX®Windows uses the soil stiffness in units of lbs/ft/ft.

)ft/in )(144inlbs/ (577 = k 222h (Equation 12)

lbs/ft/ft 83,088 = k (Equation 13)


274

]/(4EI)k[ = 1/4hβ (Equation 14)

]in psi)(279.3 10 x psi/4(27.9 [577 = 46β (Equation 15)

in 0.01166 = -1β (Equation 16)

Critical length is now based on the following equation.

βπ 4 3

(Equation 17)

(0.01166) (4) 3

= lπ

(Equation 18)

inches 202 = l (Equation 19)

For this job we have selected 20 feet. This value is greater than the critical length figure of 202 inches or 16.83 feet.

This critical length (Note we have a 12 inch pipe) will be divided into equal lengths of no more than 3 pipe Diameters (36 inches for a 12 inch pipe), the default of TRIFLEX®Windows for pipe underground. This default setting may be overridden on the Job Defaults Screen if the user desires.


275

See the bottom left hand corner of the screen shown below. “Number of Intermediate Nodes” can be changed. Or the Maximum spacing can be changed. Therefore these are the locations to change your defaults. TRIFLEX®Windows calculates the intermediate nodes, but the User can override that number. See screen below.

Figure 3.3.5.4-15 Elbow Data Tab, Node Point 10 to 100

The user would therefore only have to code one screen to represent this 20 ft.

Assuming the User did not change the default values mentioned above.


276

As this same critical length should be coded when leaving an elbow, the same length (20 ft) is coded for the next data point.

Figure 3.3.5.4-16 Pipe Data Tab, Node Point 100 to 200

The total length of the segment (From node 100 to node 400) running along the X-axis is 100 ft between elbows. With 2 elbows each having a critical length of 20 ft, the user is left to code 60 ft of pipe (From node 200 to node 300) as not being a critical length. Coding this segment of 60 feet will allow the user to tell TRIFLEX®Windows what spacing to used between generated data points. Doing this will allow the user to control the spacing between each generated data point on this non-critical length of 60 ft.


277

The following screen shows that the user has indicated that an override of the default value of 3 pipe Diameters (36 inches for a 12 inch pipe) is requested. This requested spacing on this data point is that no data point should have a delta dimension greater than 15 feet. See bottom left corner of the screen shown below, max spacing.



278

The following screen continues with the modeling of the piping system. This element coded with 20 feet is the critical area before the bend. Since no overrides of data point spacing are indicated, TRIFLEX®Windows will use the default of 3 pipe Diameters (36 inches for a 12 inch pipe).

Figure 3.3.5.4-18 Elbow Data Tab, Node Point 300 to 400

This next screen shows the 20 feet coded for the critical length after the elbow.



279

The next screen coded shows the remaining 380 feet of non-critical length. The critical spacing of no more than 3 pipe Diameters is again overridden with the request to have data point spacing at a distance no greater than 15 feet for all generated nodes. The end point of this length of pipe is considered to be a free ended pipe.


Although the user coded just 7 input screens (From Anchor node point 10 to free pipe end node point 600), a total of 66 data points and 186 springs will be generated by TRIFLEX®Windows to more accurately model the soil / pipe interaction.


280

Output of this Critical Length Example

The first report shown in this discussion is the Piping System Geometry. From this report, the user may see the generated data points and their respective lengths. TRIFLEX®Windows does generate a data point to be one pipe Diameter from all anchors and branch points. This is seen as data point 11 with a segment length of 1.00 feet. Three springs called SOIL REST., for soil restraint, are also shown for data point 11. Data point 12 has a piping segment length of 2.92 feet. This length is less than the maximum spacing set up by default or the user's input of no more than 3 pipe Diameters (3 feet for a 12 inch pipe). Spacing between data points will always be divided up into equal segment lengths.

Figure 3.3.5.4-21 Input Spreadsheet, Previously Coded Model

The second report shown on the following page is the Piping Restraint Description. This report has many labels for each column indicating what the value in that column represents. The columns of interest when soil properties have been specified are the axis of the soil restraint, coefficient of friction, resultant frictional percentage of the actually specified coefficient of friction times the two normal forces acting on the pipe, and the stiffness (lbs/in) of the resultant spring used to simulate friction.


281

When more than one stiffness and range of movements are input, the stiffness that was last used in the analysis will be the one shown in the stiffness column.

Calculation of stiffness shown in the stiffness column follows the following equation:

( )L + L 21

* inches 12foot 1

* pipe of foot / footlbs

) Stiffness(Soil = inlbs

used Stiffness 21

(Equation 20)

where

L1 = Length of segment preceding the data point (feet)

L2 = Length of segment following the data point (feet)

Reference: ASME B31.1-2001, Appendix VII-4.1 thru VII-6.5

Figure 3.3.5.4-22 Output, View Analysis Results, Restraint Description


282

All restraints for soil are modeled as skewed restraints. This skewness allows for soil properties to be considered on a piping system when it follows the X, Y, Z axis system or it is skewed with respect to this axis system. The A – SOIL will always be the axial restraint, representing the direction the pipe was coded.

The B - SOIL will always be the transverse up and transverse down. On an elbow B - SOIL will be perpendicular to the axial and radial direction. The C - SOIL will always be the lateral on a run of pipe and the radial direction within an elbow. The angles of these restraints to the X, Y, Z axis system may be seen on the report named Axis Description (Skewed Angles).

Figure 3.3.5.4-23 Output, View Analysis Results, Axial Descriptions


283

The final screen shown in this discussion is the Restraint Forces and Moments on System. This report will print out the forces exerted on the piping system along each one of the previously described axes. Each data point will therefore be seen with three line of loads. The first line for each data point will be the axial loads with respect to the X, Y, Z axis system. The second line will be the transverse up or transverse down (perpendicular to the axial and radial direction on an elbow). The third line will be the lateral direction for a run element and the radial direction for an elbow. The axial force shown may be comprised of one or two different effects. One the axial frictional force, the second the forces experienced when a user coded Soil Stiffness and a Range of Movement.

The values seen in these columns are the forces that the soil is exerting on the pipe while the pipe tries to move against the soil.

Figure 3.3.5.4-24 Output, View Analysis Results, Restraint Forces & Moments

A review of data point 13 shows that the axial force due to friction had an opposing force of 1148 lbs. The transverse down force is 4024 lbs. This is the soil force exerted on the pipe to keep it from moving downward. The lateral force is 181 lbs.


284

The calculated friction force of 1148 lbs is generated as follows:

F + F = pipe on force Normal 2y

2x (Equation 21)

22 1814024 + = NF (Equation 22)

00.4028 = NF (Equation 23)

NF*0.3 = FF (Equation 24)

4028* 0.3 = FF (Equation 25)

1208 = FF (Equation 26)

Note: 1148 lbs. given in the output is within the 20% range of the value of 1208 given in equation 27 above.

Remember we have a min. friction of ‘0.3” and a max. friction of “0.5”

And on the Modeling Default Screen we allowed 20% for the friction tolerance.


285

Model of Piping System

Figure 3.3.5.4-25 Piping System Model, Node points 10 to 300

Node points 10 to 100 (Starting Anchor point to First Elbow)



Node points 100 thru 400 (First Elbow to Second Elbow)


286



Node points 400 thru 600 (Second Elbow to End of Pipe)


287

3.3.6 Code Compliance Tabs

3.3.6.0.1 Fatigue (An Option in Code Compliance)

To Perform Fatigue Analysis

Suggestion use Tutorial01.DTA file located in the Demo Samples folder with the following path: C:\Program Files\PipingSolutions\TRIFLEXWindows\Demo Samples folder as a test file and then:

1) Go to Setup, Modeling Default and check the Perform Fatigue Analysis box.

2) Go to Setup and Cyclic Loading. Enter the projected number of cycles from the manufacture. (600,000).

3) Make sure that you are not running a Mode Shape & Frequency Case. Go to Setup and Case Definition makes sure the last button is NOT checked for Mode Shapes & Frequencies.

4) Calculate using the Green Calculate Arrow or Calculate Base Calculation.

5) Go to Output, Piping Code Compliance and move the bottom slide bar to the right to bring the next three columns into view. These columns are: Maximum allowable cycle, Usage Factor (This Case); and Cumulative Usage Factor.

(Double click on the column heading to sort in ascending or descending order.)

6) Find the node number that Usage Factor >1 (or if you prefer .80). Double click on that component (1030). The Input Dialog sheet will be brought up. Click on the Code Compliance Tab and look for The Fatigue Curve that suite the situation. If no Fatigue curves exist then click on Define Fatigue Curve and enter the Fatigue curve that fits the situation. Once define save and rerun the analysis using the new definition.


288

3.3.6.1 ASME B31.1 Code Compliance

For a piping system code compliance analysis to be processed, the User must enter the necessary pipe material data. To enter the required data, the User must click on the Code Compliance tab at the top of the screen on the first component entered. Upon clicking on the tab, a Code Compliance dialog will be presented to the User.

The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “B31.1 Power Piping Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Figure 3.3.6.1-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, B31.1

Conservative Allowable, C – This field is a check box field. The default is with this check box checked – in other words, TRIFLEX defaults to the application of conservative stress allowable. If the user wishes TRIFLEX to add the unused portion of the primary stress allowable to the allowable value for the secondary stress allowable value, then the User should eliminate the check in the check box. Please note that this election can only be made on the first component in the piping system.

Joint Factor, E – In this field, the User should enter the weld joint factor for the welding process used in the manufacture of the pipe. The default value is 1.0.

Allowable Cold Stress, Sc – In this field, the User must enter a value for the allowable cold stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User.


289

The remaining allowable stress data that can be entered by the User on this dialog is requested on a case-by-case basis. In this release of TRIFLEX, six cases can be specified and processed one at a time or in combination. When the User has elected to activate a load case, the User must specify the hot allowable stress value for that particular load case. To activate a case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case.

Note: Sc, Sh for B31.1 & B31.3 will automatically change if the Material is from the B31.1 / B31.3 Database.

Allowable Hot Stress, Sh – In this field for each activated load case, the User must enter a value for the allowable hot stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out). To activate a case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case.

Stress Range Reduction Factor, F – The User should enter the desired stress range reduction factor based upon the number of cycles the piping system is expected to be subjected to. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor.

Coefficient in Code Book, Y - The User should enter the desired “Y” factor, based upon the Code Book. A default value of 0.4 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor. See Table 304-1.1 of the B31.1 Power Piping Code Book for reference.

Occasional Load Factor, K – The User can enter a value for the occasional load factor, if desired. A value of 1.15 should be entered for occasional loads acting less than 10 percent of the operating period and a value of 1.2 should be entered for loads acting for less than one percent of the operating period. A value of 1.2 will be assumed, if the User does not specify the factor.

Mill Tolerance, Mt – The User may enter a value for the mill tolerance in percent. The default is 12 1/2 percent.

Ripple – When the User has modified one or more data entries on the Code Compliance dialog, the User can instruct TRIFLEX to modify all subsequent occurrences of these data entries that are in an unbroken series from the original revision forward by pressing the Ripple button.


290



The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “B31.3 Process Plant and Refinery Piping Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Figure 3.3.6.2-1 Anchor component, code compliance Tab, B31.3



Allowable Cold Stress, Sc – In this field, the User must enter a value for the allowable cold stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User.

The remaining allowable stress data that can be entered by the User on this dialog is requested on a case-by-case basis. In this release of TRIFLEX, six cases can be specified and processed one at a time or in combination. When the User has


291

elected to activate a load case, the User must specify the hot allowable stress value for that particular load case. To activate a case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case.

Note: Sc, Sh for B31.1 & B31.3 will automatically change if the Material is from the B31.1 / B31.3 Database.

Allowable Hot Stress, Sh – In this field for each activated load case, the User must enter a value for the allowable hot stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out). To activate a case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case.


Coefficient in Code Book, Y - The User should enter the desired “Y” factor, based upon the Code Book. A default value of 0.4 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor. See Table 304-1.1 of the B31.3 Process Plant and Refinery Piping Code Book for reference.



For minimum wall thickness calculation according DIN 2413 Code - to activate the DIN calculations the user need to check the box “Calculate the minimum design wall thickness according DIN”

Degree of utilization of design stress in the weld - In this field, the User should enter the degree of utilization of design stress in the weld used in the manufacture of the pipe. The default value is 1.0.

Pipe rated for a temperature over 120oC (258oF) – In this check box the USER can enter the service condition for piping system. By default the box is unchecked. In this case the calculations will be done according the formulae for


292

load case I. If the check box is checked the calculation will be done according the formulae for load case II. (DIN 2413 – Part 1 – Table 3)

Maximum permissible stress under static loading– In this field for all activated load case the User must enter a value for the maximum permissible stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User. The default value is 20,000 psi.

Fatigue - In this check box the USER can enter the service condition for piping system. If the check box is checked the calculations will be done according the formulae for load case I and III. The higher value for minimum thickness will be displayed. (DIN 2413 – Part 1 – Table 3)

Pressure Amplitude - In this field for all activated load case the User must enter a value for the stress amplitude. Equation (4) (DIN 2413 – Part 1 – Table 3) shall be used to account for fatigue failure at constant stress amplitude. The default value is 1000 psi.



293



The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “B31.4 Liquid Petroleum Piping Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:


Restrained – This field is a check box field. The default is with this check box not checked – in other words, TRIFLEX defaults to unrestrained piping. In general, restrained piping is underground piping with the soil restraining free movement of the piping. If the User wishes to define a portion of a piping system as “restrained piping”, then the User should place a check in the check box by clicking on the box. For restrained piping, TRIFLEX will compute the longitudinal expansion stress from the equation given in B31.4 Section 419.6.4(b).

SMYS – In this field, the User must enter a value for the specified Minimum Yield Strength of the pipe to be covered by the Code Compliance. The default value is 20,000 psi.



294



295



ü The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “B31.5 – Refrigeration Piping Code Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:




Allowable Cold Stress, Sc – In this field, the User must enter a value for the allowable cold stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User. The default value is 20,000 psi.


296

Allowable Hot Stress, Sh – In this field for each activated load case, the User must enter a value for the allowable hot stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out). To activate a case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case. The default value is 20,000 psi.



Coefficient in Code Book, Y - The User should enter the desired “Y” factor, “Coefficient for Materials” based upon the Code Book. A default value of 0.4 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor. See sub-section 504.1.1 (b) of the B31.5 Refrigeration Piping & Heat Transfer Components Code Book for reference.

Occasional Load Factor, K – The User should enter the desired Occasional Load Factor as defined in the piping code. A default value of 1.33 will be assumed if the User does not enter a numerical value in this field.




297



ü The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “B31.8 or DOT Guidelines – Gas Transmission & Distribution Systems Code Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:


SMYS – In this field, the User must enter a value for the specified Minimum Yield Strength of the pipe to be covered by the Code Compliance. The default value is 35,000 psi.

Design Factor, F – In this field, the User should enter the design factor for steel pipe as described in DOT Section 192.111. The default value is 1.0.


Temperature De-rating Factor, T – In this field, the User should enter the temperature de-rating factor as described in DOT Section 192.115. The default value is 1.0.

Offshore – This field is a check box field. The default is with this check box not checked – in other words, TRIFLEX defaults to onshore piping. If the User


298

wishes TRIFLEX to analyze a portion of a piping system using the offshore criteria, then a check should be placed in the check box for the first component to be analyzed using the offshore criteria.

Design Factor for Hoop Stress, F1 – The User should enter the desired design factor for Hoop Stress as defined in the piping code. A default value of 0.72 will be assumed if the User does not enter a numerical value in this field.

Design Factor for Longitudinal Stress, F2 – The User should enter the desired design factor for Longitudinal Stress as defined in the piping code. A default value of 0.8 will be assumed if the User does not enter a numerical value in this field.

Design Factor for Combined Stress, F3 – The User should enter the desired design factor for Combined Stress as defined in the piping code. A default value of 0.9 will be assumed if the User does not enter a numerical value in this field.

The last two lines of this dialog are radio buttons that provide the User with the ability to select between the two stress equations that are available in TRIFLEX for calculating combined stresses. The first radio button is “Use the Tresca Combined Stress - Offshore”. When the User selects Offshore, TRIFLEX will default to “Use the Tresca Combined Stress - Offshore” radio button being selected. The second radio button is “Use the Von Mises Combined Stress - Offshore”. If the User desires the combined stresses to be calculated using the Von Mises equation, then the User should check the second radio button.



299

3.3.6.6 U.S Navy General Specifications for Ships, Section 505


The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “U.S. Navy General Specifications for Ships, Section 505”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Figure 3.3.6.6-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, US Navy

Allowable Operating Stress, SE – In this field, the User must enter a value for the allowable operating stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User. The default value is 20,000 psi.

Allowable Cold Stress, Sc – In this field, the User must enter a value for the allowable cold stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User. The default value is 20,000 psi.



300

Allowable Hot Stress, Sh – In this field for each activated load case, the User must enter a value for the allowable hot stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out). To activate a case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case. The default value is 20,000 psi.

Stress Range Reduction Factor, F – The User should enter the desired stress range reduction factor, based upon the number of cycles the piping system is expected to be subjected to. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor.


Coefficient in Code Book, Y - The User should enter the desired “Y” factor, based upon the Code Book. A default value of 0.4 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor. See Table 304-1.1 of Section 505 of the U.S. Navy Piping Code.

Occasional Load Factor, K – The User can enter a value for the occasional load factor, if desired. A value of 1.15 should be entered for occasional loads acting less than 10 percent of the operating period and a value of 1.2 should be entered for loads acting for less than one percent of the operating period. A default value of 1.2 will be assumed, if the User does not specify the factor.



301

3.3.6.7 ASME Section III, Division I (Subsection NC) – Class 2

ü For a piping system code compliance analysis to be processed, the User must enter the necessary pipe material data. To enter the required data, the User must click on the Code Compliance tab at the top of the screen on the first component entered. Upon clicking on the tab, a Code Compliance dialog will be presented to the User.

Figure 3.3.6.7-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, Class 2

The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “ASME Class 2, Section III, Subsection NC Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

SMYS – In each of the fields for each of the active cases, the User must enter a value for the specified Minimum Yield Strength of the pipe to be covered by the Code Compliance. The default value is 35,000 psi to activate a case; the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case.

Allowable Hot Stress, Sh – In this field for each activated load case, the User must enter a value for the allowable hot stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out). The default value is 15,000 psi

Allowable Stress at Room Temperature, Sc – In this field, the User must enter a value for the allowable stress at room temperature based upon the piping materials selected by the User. The default value is 15,000 psi

Stress Range Reduction Factor, F – The User should enter the desired stress range reduction factor, based upon the total number N of full temperature cycles


302

over total number of years during which system is expected to be in service, from Table NC-3611.2 (e)-1. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor.

Building Settlement - When the User places a check in the check box entitled “BS”; TRIFLEX will perform the stress analysis considering the specified anchor movements to be non-repeated anchor movements. In other words, TRIFLEX will treat the entered anchor movements as predicted building settlement and TRIFLEX will apply equation (10a) rather than equation (10).

Level – In accordance with NC-3611.1, the User may select one of the leve ls of service from the drop down combo list in this field. The choices for the Stress Limits are A, B, C, or D. The default is Stress Limit A.

ECH - ASME CLASS 1 NB-3672.5 allows the use of the operating modulus to determine the actual moments and forces. In this field, the User should enter the ratio of the installed modulus of elasticity over the operating modulus of elasticity. In order to generate the correct stress values, TRIFLEX will multiply the calculated expansion stresses by this ratio. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor.

Coefficient Y - The User should enter the desired “Y” factor, based upon the piping Code Book. A default value of 0.4 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor.

MTP - Mill Tolerance Percentage – The User may enter a value for the mill tolerance in percentage of the wall thickness. The default is 12 1/2 percent.

MT - Mill Tolerance – The User may enter a value for the mill tolerance in percent. The default is 0.05 inches or 1.27 mm.



303

3.3.6.8 ASME Section III, Division I (Subsection ND) – Class 3


Figure 3.3.6.8-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, Class 3

The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “ASME Class 3, Section III, Subsection ND Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

SMYS – In each of the fields for each of the active cases, the User must enter a value for the specified Minimum Yield Strength of the pipe to be covered by the Code Compliance. The default value is 35,000 psi to activate a case; the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case.

Allowable Hot Stress, Sh – In this field for each activated load case, the User must enter a value for the allowable hot stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out). The default value is 15,000 psi

Allowable Stress at Room Temperature, Sc – In this field, the User must enter a value for the allowable stress at room temperature based upon the piping materials selected by the User. The default value is 15,000 psi.

Stress Range Reduction Factor, F – The User should enter the desired stress range reduction factor, based upon the total number N of full temperature cycles


304

over total number of years during which system is expected to be in service, from Table ND-3611.2 (e)-1. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor.

Building Settlement - When the User places a check in the check box entitled “BS”; TRIFLEX will perform the stress analysis considering the specified anchor movements to be non-repeated anchor movements. In other words, TRIFLEX will treat the entered anchor movements as predicted building settlement and TRIFLEX will apply equation (10a) rather than equation (10).

Level – In accordance with ND-3611.1, the User may select one of the levels of service from the drop down combo list in this field. The choices for the Stress Limits are A, B, C, or D. The default is Stress Limit A.

ECH - ASME CLASS 1 NB-3672.5 allows the use of the operating modulus to determine the actual moments and forces. In this field, the User should enter the ratio of the installed modulus of elasticity over the operating modulus of elasticity. In order to generate the correct stress values, TRIFLEX will multiply the calculated expansion stresses by this ratio. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor.

Coefficient Y - The User should enter the desired “Y” factor, based upon the piping Code Book. A default value of 0.4 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor.

MTP - Mill Tolerance Percentage – The User may enter a value for the mill tolerance in percentage of the wall thickness. The default is 12 1/2 percent.

MT - Mill Tolerance – The User may enter a value for the mill tolerance in percent. The default is 0.05 inches or 1.27 mm.



305

3.3.6.9 SPC1 - Swedish Piping Code (Method 1, Section 9.4)


Figure 3.3.6.9-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, SPC1

The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “Swedish Piping Code (Method 1 Section 9.4) Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

The allowable stress data that can be entered by the User on this dialog is requested on a case-by-case basis. In this release of TRIFLEX, six cases can be specified and processed one at a time or in combination. When the User has elected to activate a load case, the User must specify the hot allowable stress value for that particular load case. To activate a case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case.

Allowable Hot Stress, Sh – In this field for each activated load case, the User must enter a value for the allowable hot stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out). The default value is 20,000 psi.

Strength Factor for Circumferential Welds, Zc – The User should enter the desired strength factor for Circumferential Welds as defined in the piping code. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter a numerical value in this field.


306

Strength Factor for Longitudinal Welds, Zl – The User should enter the desired strength factor for Longitudinal and Spiral Welds as defined in the piping code. A default va lue of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter a numerical value in this field.

Mill Tolerance, Mt – The User may enter a value for the mill tolerance in percent in the field provided on the left or in inches / mm in the field provided on the right. A numerical value may only be entered one of the two fields. The default value is 12 1/2 percent.



307

3.3.6.10 SPC2 - Swedish Piping Code (Method 2, Section 9.5)


Figure 3.3.6.10-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, SPC2

The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “Swedish Piping Code (Method 2 Section 9.5) Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

M - When the User places a check in the check box entitled “M”; TRIFLEX will perform the stress analysis using the alternate method of determining Sr (allowable range of stress). The program will select the smaller of Sr? and Sr? as calculated by equations 9:43 and 9:44 respectively.

L - When the User places a check in the check box entitled “L”; TRIFLEX will perform the stress analysis using the liberal equation in determining the Allowable for Loads related to displacement [equation (9:40)].

P - When the User places a check in the check box entitled “P”, TRIFLEX will perform the stress analysis using the alternate pressure term, as shown in paragraph 9.5.3.2, in equations 9:37, 9:38, and 9:40.

RM – In this field, the User must enter a value for the Ultimate Tensile Strength of the pipe at room temperature to be covered by the Code Compliance. The default value is 35,000 psi.


308

Allowable Cold Stress, F1 – In this field, the User must enter a value for the allowable stress at room temperature based upon the piping materials selected by the User. The default value is 20,000 psi.

ü The allowable hot stress data that can be entered by the User on this dialog is required on a case-by-case basis. In this release of TRIFLEX, six cases can be specified and processed one at a time or in combination. When the User has elected to activate a load case, the User must specify the allowable hot stress value for that particular load case. To activate a case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case.

Allowable Hot Stress, F2 – In this field for each activated load case, the User must enter a value for the allowable hot stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out). The default value is 20,000 psi.

Stress Range Reduction Factor, FR – The User should enter the desired stress range reduction factor, based upon the total number N of full temperature cycles over total number of years during which the piping system is expected to be in service. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor.



Strength Factor for Longitudinal Welds, Zl – The User should enter the desired strength factor for Longitudinal and Spiral Welds as defined in the piping code. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter a numerical value in this field.


Ripple – When the User has modified one or more data entries on the Code Compliance dialog, the User can instruct TRIFLEX to modify all subsequent


309

occurrences of these data entries that are in an unbroken series from the original revision forward by pressing the Ripple button.


310

3.3.6.11 TBK5-6 - Norwegian General Rules for Piping System (Annex D- Alternative Method)


The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “Norwegian Piping Code TBK 5 – 6 Alternative Method”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Figure 3.3.6.11-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, TBK, 56

The allowable stress data that can be entered by the User on this dialog is requested on a case-by-case basis. In this release of TRIFLEX, six cases can be specified and processed one at a time or in combination. When the User has elected to activate a load case, the User must specify the hot allowable stress value for that particular load case. To activate a case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case.

Allowable Hot Stress, Sh – In this field for each activated load case, the User must enter a value for the allowable hot stress based upon the piping materials selected by the User. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out). The default value is 20,000 psi.


311






312

3.3.6.12 TBK5-6 - Norwegian General Rules for Piping System (Section 10.5)


The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “Norwegian Piping TBK 5 – 6 (Method 2) Code Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Figure 3.3.6.12-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, TBK 5-6 Method 2

M - When the User places a check in the check box entitled “M”; TRIFLEX will perform the stress analysis using the lower temperature equations for Sr

Lesser of:

Sr = 1,25 f1 + 0,25 f2 or Sr = fr Rs – f2

ü Based on the corresponding information in Table 2 from the TBK5-6, 1990 Code Book.

Rs

1 = Carbon Steel - 290 N/mm2

2 = Austenitic Stainless Steel - 400 N/mm2


313

3 = Copper alloys, annealed - 150 N/mm2

4 = Copper alloys, cold worked - 100 N/mm2

5 = Aluminum - 130 N/mm2

6 = Titanium - 300 N/mm2

When the User leaves the check box entitled “M” unchecked or blank, TRIFLEX will perform the stress analysis using the following equation for high temperatures.

Sr = fr (1,25 R1 + 0,25 R2)

The default is with this check box checked – in other words, TRIFLEX uses the lower temperature equations for Sr.

L - When the User places a check in the check box entitled “L”; TRIFLEX will perform the stress analysis using the liberal equation in determining the Allowable for Loads related to displacement [equation (9:35)]. The default is with this check box checked – in other words, TRIFLEX defaults to using the liberal equation

P - When the User places a check in the check box entitled “P”, TRIFLEX will perform the stress analysis using the alternate pressure term, as shown in paragraph 9.5.3.2, in equations 9:32, 9:33, and 9:35. The default is with this check box checked – in other words, TRIFLEX defaults to using the alternate pressure term.

RM – In this field, the User must enter a value for the Ultimate Tensile Strength of the pipe at room temperature to be covered by the Code Compliance. The default value is 35,000 psi

Allowable Cold Stress, F1 – In this field, the User must enter a value for the allowable stress at room temperature based upon the piping materials selected by the User. The default value is 20,000 psi.

ü The allowable hot stress data that can be entered by the User on this dialog is required on a case-by-case basis. In this release of TRIFLEX, six cases can be specified and processed one at a time or in combination. When the User has elected to activate a load case, the User must specify the allowable hot stress value for that particular load case. To activate a case, the User must go to Setup on the main menu, then Case Definition and then must place a check mark in the Process this Case check box for the desired case.

Allowable Hot Stress, F2 – In this field for each activated load case, the User must enter a value for the allowable hot stress based upon the piping materials


314

selected by the User. Data can only be entered in an active field (one that is not grayed out). The default value is 20,000 psi.

Stress Range Reduction Factor, FR – The User should enter the desired stress range reduction factor, based upon the total number N of full temperature cycles over total number of years during which the piping system is expected to be in service. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter this factor.







315

3.3.6.13 DNV - DnV Rules for Submarine Piping System (1981 Edition)…..


The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “DnV Rules for Submarine Pipeline Systems Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Figure 3.3.6.13-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, DNV 1981

Specific Material Yield Strength, F – In this field, the User must enter a value for the Specific Material Yield Strength of the pipe to be covered by the Code Compliance. A default value of 35,000 psi will be assumed if the User does not enter a value.

Weld Joint Factor, KW – In this field, the User should enter the weld joint factor for the welding process used in the manufacture of the pipe. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter a value.

Temperature Reduction Factor, KT – In these fields, the User should enter the temperature reduction factor(s) applicable for this piping component. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter a value.

Hoop Stress Design Factor, NH – The User should enter the desired hoop stress design factor as defined in the piping code. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter a numerical value in this field.


316

Equivalent Stress Design Factor, NEP – The User should enter the desired equivalent stress design factor as defined in the piping code. A default value of 1.0 will be assumed if the User does not enter a numerical value in this field.

Mill Tolerance in Percent, MTP – The User may enter a value for the mill tolerance in percent in this field. The default value is zero percent. A numerical value may only be entered in this field or in the following mill tolerance field, but not both.

Mill Tolerance in Dimensional Unit, MT – The User may enter a value for the mill tolerance in inches, mm or cm in this field. The default value is zero. A numerical value may only be entered in this field or in the previous mill tolerance field, but not both.

1996 Edition (can only be checked at first component) - When the User places a check in this check box; TRIFLEX will perform the stress analysis using the equations set forth in the 1996 edition of the DnV Rules for Submarine Pipeline Systems. The default is with this check box checked – in other words, TRIFLEX defaults to the 1996 edition.



317

3.3.6.14 DNV - Submarine Pipeline System -DnV, 1996 Edition



The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “DnV Rules for Submarine Pipeline Systems Compliance Data, 1996 Edition”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:




318





Mill Tolerance in Dimensiona l Unit, MT – The User may enter a value for the mill tolerance in inches, mm or cm in this field. The default value is zero. A numerical value may only be entered in this field or in the previous mill tolerance field, but not both.



319

3.3.6.15 DNV - Offshore Standard OSF-101 Submarine Pipeline System - DnV, 2000 Edition



The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “OSF 101”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:





320







321

3.3.6.16 Polska Norma PN-79 / M-34033

Figure 3.3.6.16-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, Polska Norma


DT – Design Temperature is Higher

This field is used to indicate that the design temperature is higher (H) if the check box is checked or lower (L) than the limit temperature for the pipe material if the check box is unchecked.

HRS – Working Time above 100,000 hrs

This check box will be checked when the user should specify that the piping system will have a working time above 100,000 hrs.

RM

(psi, N/mm2, kg/cm2, N/mm2)

RM is the Specified Minimum Tensile strength (minimal value) at room temperature( Rm ).


322

Reto

(psi, N/mm2, kg/cm2, N/mm2)Reto is Real Yield point (minimal value) at design temperature ( Ret o

).

Rz(2e5)to (psi, N/mm2, kg/cm2, N/mm2)

Rz(2e5)to is the Specified Temporary Creep Strength (average value) at 2*105 hours in

Design temperature to ( R t)10*z(2 o5 ).

Rz(1e5)to (psi, N/mm2, kg/cm2, N/mm2)

Rz(1e5)to is the Specified Temporary Creep Strength (average value) at 105 hours in design

temperature to ( R t)10z( o5 ).

R1(1e5)to (psi, N/mm2, kg/cm2, N/mm2)

R1(1e5)to is the Specified Creep Strength limit (average value) with 1% permanent

elongation, at 105 hours and in design temperature to ( R t)101( o5 ).

Z (Default: 1)

Strength factor of weld connection

1.0 - for seamless pipe

0.9 -for pipes with longitudinal double-sided wall

0.8 -for pipes with longitudinal one side weld as well as for pressure welded


323

M (Default: 0)

Pipe material (for reference, see table 2) shall be specified as:

0 - Boiler steel pipes 1 - Quality pipes made from C.S. with specified impact strength

2 - Other C.S. pipes

L (Default: 0)

Pressure level (for reference, see table 2) shall be specified as:

0 - pipes destined for pipelines where internal pressure and additional external loads occur.

1 - pipes destined for pipelines where only internal pressure occurs

X1 and X2

X1and X2 is coefficients – accordingly to Table 2 (Chapter 8-Polish Code) – depending on material grade (quality) and working conditions.

Mill Tolerance Percentage for C1 (Default: 12.5%)

Mill tolerance specified as a percent.

Delta %

The maximum minus allowance for creep stress value in time of 2x105 hrs at design temperature to. (Rz(2e5)to)


324

C2 – CA, from Prop. Tab (in, mm, cm, mm)

C2 - Allowance taking account at corrosion influence. For nonagressive water and steam (with no solid particles, which can cause wall thickness abrasion - equals

C2 = ( 0.3 up to 1.0 mm )

X4

X4 = see table 3 (Chapter 8 – Polish Code)

If working time is less than or equal to 100,000 hours X4 =1.65.

C3 (in, mm, cm, mm)

Allowance for wall thickness taking into account because of thinning during bending process. There are 3 options:

C3- Mechanical Bending

C3- Electric Induction Bending

C3- Input by User

Wall Thickness Equation

Dz –Ext. Dia – the thickness for wall pipe will be calculated using external Diameter Dz

Dw – Int. Dia - the thickness for wall pipe will be calculated using internal Diameter Dw

Special Allowable

The user can specify 20, 21, or 22 to indicate the equation to be used to calculate the allowable stress value.


325

Eq. 20

Equation (20) -For design conditions at indicated pipeline points for periodic material creep control.

Eq. 21

Equation (21) -For a case of maximum short-lived pressure or temperature increase.

Eq. 22

Equation (22) -For hydrostatic test.

Rz(1e5)to+dt

Creep strength (mean value) – when permanent elongation equals to 1% in time of 105 hrs at design temperature to+dt (Rz(10

5 ) to + ∆t )


326

3.3.6.17 SNIP 2.05-06-95 FSU Transmission Piping Code

Figure 3.3.6.17-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, Russian SNIP


LF

Loading Factor

There are two options:

- Loads are factored

- Loads are nominal

The default option is “Loads are factored”

LC

Loading Condition

There are two options:

- Above ground


327

- Under ground

The default option is “Above ground”.

M

Coefficient for pipeline category Sec 2.3 Table 1 - M

This filed is used to specify the Coefficient for pipeline category Sec 2.3 Table 1.

K1

Coefficient for pipeline category Sec 2.3 Table 1

This field is used to specify the material dependent reliability coefficient (K1) Sec 8.3 Table 9.

K2

Material dependent reliability coefficient Sec8.3 Table 10 - K2

This field is used to specify the material dependent reliability coefficient (K2) Sec 8.3 Table 10.

KN

Reliability coefficient for pipeline characteristic - KN

This field is used to specify the reliability coefficient for pipeline characteristic (KN) Sec 8.3 Table 11.

R1N

Ultimate Tensile Strength - R(1,n) psi, N/mm2, kg/cm2, N/mm2

This field is used to specify the Ultimate Tensile Strength.


328

R2N

Yield Strength - R(2,n) psi, N/mm2, kg/cm2, N/mm2

This field is used to specify the Yield Strength.


329

3.3.6.18 BS7159 Glass Reinforced Plastic Piping Code

When creating a piping system using Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe the user needs to select the Modeling Defaults dialog under the Setup command under the Main Menu. Once the user has selected the Modeling Defaults screen, there are three changes that need to be implemented:

1) Change the Piping Code to read “BS7159- Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe”;

2) Select the “Includes Translational Pressure deformations” box;

3) Select the “Includes Rotational Pressure Deformation” box. The later two action items tell TRIFLEX that the Bourdon Pressure Effect will be considered in the analysis.

Figure 3.3.6.18-1 – Modeling Default, FRP


330

Note: Bourdon Pressure Effect-

The Bourdon pressure effect causes: straight pipes to displace along the x axis (elongate) and bends to elongate along the line that connects the bend near and far nodes. The Bourdon effect is always considered when plastic pipe is used. The impact of the Bourdon effect can be appreciable in long pipe runs or high pressures or large diameter bends (especially next to sensitive equipment). The two Bourdon options that are available are:

Option #1 Include rotational pressure deformations

If the elbows or bends are fabricated using ho t or cold bending then this will cause a slight oval shape of the bend cross section. This will cause the bend to straighten out when pressurized. Fixed end moments are associated with the opening that do not exist when the original shape of the bend cross section is circular.

Option #2 Include translational pressure deformation

If bend or elbow has a circular cross section such as a system that has forged or welded fitting on the bend or elbow.

Bourdon Effect and TRIFLEX

TRIFLEX allows the user to control two effects of internal pressure. These are the translational deformation due to pressure, and INDEPENDENTLY, the rotational deformation due to pressure. The latter comes to play within the context of elbows. So, the user may control the translationa l or the rotational effects through the defaults screen.

With a bend, both in-plane directions participate because there is NO unique preferred direction. Actually, there are two, such as entry to the bend, and exit from it. Usually, programs take the entry and an in plane normal.

The next set is to build the piping model. As always TRIFLEX starts each model with an Anchor. However, under the Piping Properties of the Anchor dialog screen, Reinforced Fiberglass pipe material needs to be checked to do the BS-7159 analysis.


331

Figure 3.3.6.18-2 - Anchor Component, Pipe Properties Tab, FRP

Recent research has been conducted that shows that physical properties calculated by using the equations given in BS 7159 are likely to yield properties substantially different in magnitude from those you will obtain from the manufacturer of the FRP/GRP pipe you may be using. Therefore, it is highly recommended that each user obtain these properties from the appropriate FRP/GRP pipe manufacturer and use only these properties in the analysis of FRP/GRP piping systems.

Pipe Density (lbs/in3, N/mm3 104, g/cm3, kg/m3)

The user is to enter the density of the FRP/GRP material as obtained from the manufacturer.


332

Figure 3.3.6.18-3 - Anchor Component, Process Tab, FRP

Pressure (psig, k-N/m2, kg/cm2, bars)

Modulus of Elasticity

Eaxial (m-PSI, k-N/m2 x 10-6, m-kg/cm2, m-N/mm2)

The user is to enter the modulus of elasticity in the axial direction of the Fiber Reinforced Plastic Pipe being modeled.

Ehoop (m-PSI, k-N/m2 x 10-6, m-kg/cm2, m-N/mm2)

The user is to enter the modulus of elasticity in the circumferential (hoop) direction of the Fiber Reinforced Plastic Pipe being modeled.

Gax/hoop (m-PSI, k-N/m2 x 10-6, m-kg/cm2, m-N/mm2)

The user is to enter the modulus of elastic shear between the radial and the hoop directions of the Fiber Reinforced Plastic Pipe being modeled, as it pertains to torsion.


333

Coefficient of Expansion

Exp (in/100 ft, mm/m, cm/100 m, mm/m)

The coefficient of expansion is to reflect the amount of growth per unit length of pipe. This value is available from the FRP/GRP pipe vendor’s catalog. While modeling a fiber reinforced plastic piping system you may only specify T1 in the load case combinations field on the case data screen.

The following guidelines may assist you in properly analyzing your piping systems:

1. The design temperature change for non- insulated pipe systems containing liquids is generally recommended to be eighty-five (85) percent of the difference between the ambient temperature and the process temperature.

2. The design temperature change for non insulated pipe systems containing gases is generally recommended to be eighty (80) percent of the difference between the ambient temperature and the process temperature.

3. The design temperature change for insulated pipe systems containing liquids or gases is generally recommended to be one hundred (100) percent of the difference between the ambient temperature and the process temperature.

4. For piping systems operating at temperatures above the ambient temperature, your base temperature should be taken to be the lowest encountered ambient temperature.

5. For piping systems operating at temperatures below the ambient temperature, your base temperature should be taken to be the highest encountered ambient temperature.

6. The coefficient of expansion for unlined FRP/GRP piping varies between 1.7 and 2.5 times that of carbon steel depending on the type of reinforcement in


334

the pipe wall. Obtain the proper coefficient of expansion from the manufacturer of the FRP/GRP pipe you are using.

7. The coefficient of expansion for lined FRP/GRP piping systems operating at a relatively low temperature (40 degrees C) is found to be significantly higher than that for unlined FRP/GRP pipe. As the operating temperature increases to 60 degrees C, the effect of the PVC lining decreases. At 60 degrees C and above, the influence of the PVC lining can be ignored.

Poisson's ratio

This ratio is defined by the formula:

Axial strain = [ (axial stress / Eaxial)] - [( Pois ratio) x (hoop stress / Ehoop)]

For FRP/GRP pipe, the flexibility and stress intensification factors for smooth and mitered bends are calculated by TRIFLEX based upon the guidelines provided in BS 7159 as follows:


For FRP/GRP pipe, the flexibility and stress intensification factors for molded and fabricated tees are calculated by TRIFLEX based upon the guidelines provided in BS 7159 as follows:

A piping system may consist of both fiberglass reinforced plastic pipes as well as metal (isotropic) pipes. In such cases, take care to change properties at the point where the transition occurs. The applicable stresses for the steel pipes will be found in the stress report following the forces and moments reports and the applicable stresses for the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipes will be found in the BS 7159 Code Compliance report following the standard output.

Remember that it is highly recommended that you contact the manufacturer of the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipes that you are using in your piping system for the exact values for the properties you must use to obtain an accurate piping analysis!

ü For a piping system code compliance analysis to be processed, the User must enter the necessary pipe material data. To enter the required data, the User must click on the Code Compliance tab at the top of the screen on


335

the first component entered. Upon clicking on the tab, a Code Compliance dialog will be presented to the User.

The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “DnV Rules for Submarine Pipeline Systems Compliance Data, 1981 Edition”. The

fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Figure 3.3.6.18-4 - Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, FRP


336

Design Stress (psi, k-N/m2, kg/cm2, N/mm2)

The design stress to be entered by the user is the numeric value of the Maximum Combined Stress as obtained from the FRP/GRP pipe manufacturer.

Design Strain (Unit less)

The design strain (,Ν) to be entered by the user is the numeric value of the maximum allowed strain as obtained from the FRP/GRP pipe manufacturer. The sum of the circumferential strain induced by pressure and the circumferential tensile strain resulting from the longitudinal compressive stress induced by temperature change shall not exceed the design strain.

Laminate Type (1, 2 or 3)

For specific details concerning the laminate types, please consult the BS 7159 Code for the Design and Construction of Glass Reinforced Plastics Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites. Section four of BS 7159 describes the three types of laminates and section seven of BS 7159 describes the flexibility factors and stress intensification factors for bends and branch connections for each laminate type.

Laminate Type 1 - All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with an internal and an external surface tissue reinforced layer.

Laminate Type 2 - Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with an internal and an external surface tissue reinforced layer.

Laminate Type 3 - Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi- filament roving construction with an internal and an external surface tissue reinforced layer.


337

3.3.6.19 BS8010 British Standard Piping Code

Figure 3.3.6.19-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, BS 8010

For a piping system code compliance analysis to be processed, the User must enter the necessary data on the Code Compliance dialog. To enter the required data, the User must click on the Code Compliance tab at the top of the screen on the first component modeled in the piping system. Upon clicking on the tab, the BS8010 Piping Code Compliance dialog will be presented to the User.

The data group in which the required data is to be entered is entitled “BS8010 Code for Pipelines Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this dialog are defined below:

SMYS – In this field, the User must enter a value for the Specified Minimum Yield Strength of the pipe to be covered by the Code Compliance. If the User does not enter a value in this field, TRIFLEX will assume the default value of 35,000 psi for the SMYS.

Hoop Stress Design Factor, FDH – In this field, the User should enter the Hoop Stress Design Factor (FDH) as described in the BS8010 Code for Pipelines. If the


338

User does not enter a value in this field, TRIFLEX will assume the default value of 1.0.

Equivalent Stress Design Factor, FD – In this field, the User should enter the Equivalent Stress Design Factor (FD) as described in the BS8010 Code for Pipelines. If the User does not enter a value in this field, TRIFLEX will assume the default value of 1.0.

Mill Tolerance in Percent, MTP – The User may enter a value for the mill tolerance in percent in this field. The default is 12 1/2 percent. This field will be grayed out if the User enters mill tolerance in a fixed amount in the following field.

Mill Tolerance in Dimensional Units, MT – The User may enter a value for the mill tolerance in inches / mm. There is no assumed default value in this field. This field will be grayed out if the User enters mill tolerance as a percentage of the entered wall thickness in the previous field.



339

3.3.6.20 UKOOA -UK Offshore Operator Association

When creating a piping system using Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe the user needs to select the Modeling Defaults dialog under the Setup command under the Main Menu. Once the user has selected the Modeling Defaults screen, there are three changes that need to be implemented:

4) Change the Piping Code to read “BS7159- Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe”;

5) Select the “Includes Translational Pressure deformations” box;

6) Select the “Includes Rotational Pressure Deformation” box. The later two action items tell TRIFLEX that the Bourdon Pressure Effect will be considered in the analysis.

Figure 3.3.6.20-1 – Modeling Default, FRP


340

Note: Bourdon Pressure Effect-

The Bourdon pressure effect causes: straight pipes to displace along the x axis (elongate) and bends to elongate along the line that connects the bend near and far nodes. The Bourdon effect is always considered when plastic pipe is used. The impact of the Bourdon effect can be appreciable in long pipe runs or high pressures or large diameter bends (especially next to sensitive equipment). The two Bourdon options that are available are:

Option #1 Include rotational pressure deformations

If the elbows or bends are fabricated using hot or cold bending this will cause a slight ovalization of the bend cross section. This will cause the bend to straighten out when pressurized. Fixed end moments are associated with the opening that do not exist when the original shape of the bend cross section is circular.

Option #2 Include translational pressure deformation

If bend or elbow has a circular cross section such as a system that has forged or welded fitting on the bend or elbow.

Bourdon Effect and TRIFLEX

TRIFLEX allows the user to control two effects of internal pressure. These are the translational deformation due to pressure, and INDEPENDENTLY, the rotational deformation due to pressure. The latter comes to play within the context of elbows. So, the user may control the translational or the rotational effects through the defaults screen.

With a bend, both in-plane directions participate because there is NO unique preferred direction. Actually, there are two, such as entry to the bend, and exit from it. Usually, programs take the entry and an in-plane normal.

The next set is to build the piping model. As always TRIFLEX starts each model with an Anchor. However, under the Piping Properties of the Anchor dialog screen, Reinforced Fiberglass pipe material needs to be checked to do the BS-7159 analysis.


341

Figure 3.3.6.20-2 - Anchor Component, Pipe Properties Tab, FRP

Recent research has been conducted that shows that physical properties calculated by using the equations given in BS 7159 are likely to yield properties substantially different in magnitude from those you will obtain from the manufacturer of the FRP/GRP pipe you may be using. Therefore, it is highly recommended that each user obtain these properties from the appropriate FRP/GRP pipe manufacturer and use only these properties in the analysis of FRP/GRP piping systems.

Pipe Density (lbs/in3, N/mm3 104, g/cm3, kg/m3)

The user is to enter the density of the FRP/GRP material as obtained from the manufacturer.


342

Figure 3.3.6.20-3 - Anchor Component, Process Tab, FRP

Pressure (psig, k-N/m2, kg/cm2, bars)


Eaxial (m-PSI, k-N/m2 x 10-6, m-kg/cm2, m-N/mm2)

The user is to enter the modulus of elasticity in the axial direction of the Fiber Reinforced Plastic Pipe being modeled.

Ehoop (m-PSI, k-N/m2 x 10-6, m-kg/cm2, m-N/mm2)

The user is to enter the modulus of elasticity in the circumferential (hoop) direction of the Fiber Reinforced Plastic Pipe being modeled.

Gax/hoop (m-PSI, k-N/m2 x 10-6, m-kg/cm2, m-N/mm2)

The user is to enter the modulus of elastic shear between the radial and the hoop directions of the Fiber Reinforced Plastic Pipe being modeled, as it pertains to torsion.


343


Exp (in/100 ft, mm/m, cm/100 m, mm/m)

The coefficient of expansion is to reflect the amount of growth per unit length of pipe. This value is available from the FRP/GRP pipe vendor’s catalog. While modeling a fiber reinforced plastic piping system you may only specify T1 in the load case combinations field on the case data screen.

The following guidelines may assist you in properly analyzing your piping systems:

1. The design temperature change for non- insulated pipe systems containing liquids is generally recommended to be eighty-five (85) percent of the difference between the ambient temperature and the process temperature.

2. The design temperature change for non insulated pipe systems containing gases is generally recommended to be eighty (80) percent of the difference between the ambient temperature and the process temperature.

3. The design temperature change for insulated pipe systems containing liquids or gases is generally recommended to be one-hundred (100) percent of the difference between the ambient temperature and the process temperature.

4. For piping systems operating at temperatures above the ambient temperature, your base temperature should be taken to be the lowest encountered ambient temperature.

5. For piping systems operating at temperatures below the ambient temperature, your base temperature should be taken to be the highest encountered ambient temperature.

6. The coefficient of expansion for unlined FRP/GRP piping varies between 1.7 and 2.5 times that of carbon steel depending on the type of reinforcement in


344

the pipe wall. Obtain the proper coefficient of expansion from the manufacturer of the FRP/GRP pipe you are using.

7. The coefficient of expansion for lined FRP/GRP piping systems operating at a relatively low temperature (40 degrees C) is found to be significantly higher than that for unlined FRP/GRP pipe. As the operating temperature increases to 60 degrees C, the effect of the PVC lining decreases. At 60 degrees C and above, the influence of the PVC lining can be ignored.

Poisson's ratio

This ratio is defined by the formula:

Axial strain = [ (axial stress / Eaxial)] - [( Pois ratio) x (hoop stress / Ehoop)]



For FRP/GRP pipe, the flexibility and stress intensification factors for molded and fabricated tees are calculated by TRIFLEX based upon the guidelines provided in BS 7159 as follows:

A piping system may consist of both fiberglass reinforced plastic pipes as well as metal (isotropic) pipes. In such cases, take care to change properties at the point where the transition occurs. The applicable stresses for the steel pipes will be found in the stress report following the forces and moments reports and the applicable stresses for the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipes will be found in the BS 7159 Code Compliance report following the standard output.

Remember that it is highly recommended that you contact the manufacturer of the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipes that you are using in your piping system for the exact values for the properties you must use to obtain an accurate piping analys is!

ü For a piping system code compliance analysis to be processed, the User must enter the necessary pipe material data. To enter the required data, the User must click on the Code Compliance tab at the top of the screen on


345

the first component entered. Upon clicking on the tab, a Code Compliance dialog will be presented to the User.

The data group where all of the required data is to be entered is entitled “DnV Rules for Submarine Pipeline Systems Compliance Data, 1981 Edition”. The fields in which data can be entered in this data group are defined below:

Figure 3.3.6.20-4 - Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, FRP


346

Design Stress (psi, k-N/m2, kg/cm2, N/mm2)

The design stress to be entered by the user is the numeric value of the Maximum Combined Stress as obtained from the FRP/GRP pipe manufacturer.

Design Strain (Unit less)

The design strain (,Ν) to be entered by the user is the numeric value of the maximum allowed strain as obtained from the FRP/GRP pipe manufacturer. The sum of the circumferential strain induced by pressure and the circumferential tensile strain resulting from the longitudinal compressive stress induced by temperature change shall not exceed the design strain.

Laminate Type (1, 2 or 3)

For specific details concerning the laminate types, please consult the BS 7159 Code for the Design and Construction of Glass Reinforced Plastics Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites. Section four of BS 7159 describes the three types of laminates and section seven of BS 7159 describes the flexibility factors and stress intensification factors for bends and branch connections for each laminate type.

Laminate Type 1 - All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with an internal and an external surface tissue reinforced layer.

Laminate Type 2 - Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with an internal and an external surface tissue reinforced layer.

Laminate Type 3 - Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi- filament roving construction with an internal and an external surface tissue reinforced layer.


347

3.3.6.21 NPD Guidelines for Submarine Pipelines and Risers

Figure 3.3.6.21-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, NPD

For a piping system code compliance analysis to be processed, the User must enter the necessary data on the Code Compliance dialog. To enter the required data, the User must click on the Code Compliance tab at the top of the screen on the first component modeled in the piping system. Upon clicking on the tab, the Submarine Pipelines and Risers Norwegian Petroleum Directorate for Piping Code Compliance dialog will be presented to the User.

The data group in which the required data is to be entered is entitled “Norwegian Petroleum Directorate for Submarine Pipelines and Risers” Code for Pipelines Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this dialog are defined below:




348








349

3.3.6.22 Statoil Design, Specifications Offshore Pipeline Systems

Figure 3.3.6.22-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, STOL

For a piping system code compliance analysis to be processed, the User must enter the necessary data on the Code Compliance dialog. To enter the required data, the User must click on the Code Compliance tab at the top of the screen on the first component modeled in the piping system. Upon clicking on the tab, the "Design, Specification Offshore Installations-Offshore Pipeline Systems -F-SD-101", 1987 by Statoil for Piping Code Compliance dialog will be presented to the User.

The data group in which the required data is to be entered is entitled “Statoil Specification Offshore Pipeline Systems” Code for Pipelines Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this dialog are defined below:




350





Mill Tolerance in Dimensional Unit, MT – The User may enter a value for the mill tolerance in inches, mm or cm in this field. The default va lue is zero. A numerical value may only be entered in this field or in the previous mill tolerance field, but not both.



351

3.3.6.23 EURO CODE European Standard prEN 13480-3

Figure 3.3.6.23-1 Anchor Component, Code Compliance Tab, EUROCODE

For a piping system code compliance analysis to be processed, the User must enter the necessary data on the Code Compliance dialog. To enter the required data, the User must click on the Code Compliance tab at the top of the screen on the first component modeled in the piping system. Upon clicking on the tab, the "European Code prEN 13480-3", the Piping Code Compliance dialog will be presented to the User.

The data group in which the required data is to be entered is entitled “Euro Piping Code Compliance Data”. The fields in which data can be entered in this dialog are defined below:

Minimum Cold Stress (fc)

The basic material allowable stress value at room temperature.


352

Maximum Hot Stress (fh)

The material allowable stress at temperature consistent with the loading under consideration.

Stress Range Reduction Factor U

The stress range reduction factor for cyclic conditions for total number N of full temperature cycles over total number of years during which system is expected to be in service from Table 12.1.3-1

Occasional Load Factor k

Factor specified by the analyst, based upon the duration of the occasional loads (12.3-3)

Joint Coefficient Z

The joint coefficient z shall be used in the calculation of the thickness of components, which include one of several butt welds, other than circumferential (4.5)

Mill Tolerance

Manufacturer mill tolerance in percent or millimeters.

Temp Over 120o C

If the design temperature is above 120o C the User must check this check box

Ripple When the User has modified one or more data entries on the Code Compliance dialog, the User can instruct TRIFLEX to modify all subsequent occurrences of these data entries that are in an unbroken series from the original revision forward by pressing the Ripple button.


353

3.4 General Setup Dialogs

3.4.1 Modeling Default

The purpose of this section is to demonstrate the entry of data into the TRIFLEX® Windows dialogs and to build a small piping model.

A piping model will be generated using the interactive screen capabilities. This model will illustrate a portion of the TRIFLEX® Windows features and will provide a solid basis for utilizing all of the TRIFLEX® Windows capabilities.

Begin by double clicking on the TRIFLEX® Windows icon on your desktop.

After the logo screen appears for a few seconds, the main screen of TRIFLEX® Windows will be displayed.

Figure 3.4.1-1 Main Screen – Setup Options


354

From Setup menu, select Project as shown in Figure 3.4.1-1, complete the fields to define Project Name, Project Account No., Project Cost Code, Engineer’s Name/Initials, etc., as shown in Figure 3.4.1-2. These fields are not mandatory to execute an analysis the above model. A detail discussion appears below.

Figure 3.4.1-2 Project Data

The first step in creating a new piping model data file is to provide TRIFLEX® with descriptive information about the piping system being modeled. To access the Project Data dialog, the User must click on Setup on the main menu and then Project on the drop down combo list. A Project dialog will then be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

Project – In this field, the User should enter a descriptive title for the piping system being modeled. This line of title will appear at the top of every page of output.

Project Account No. – In this field, the User may enter a project account number, if desired.

Project Cost Code – In this field, the User may enter a project cost code, if desired.

Engineer’s Name / Initials – In this field, the User may enter his or her initials.

Engineer’s Employee No. – In this field, the User may enter his or her employee number.

Client’s Name - In this field, the User may enter the name of the client for whom the work is being performed.


355

Plant’s Name - In this field, the User may enter the name of the plant at which the piping system being analyzed is located.

Plant’s Location - In this field, the User may enter the location of the plant where the piping system is being analyzed.

Current Line Num. - In this field, the User may enter the line number of the piping system being analyzed.

Note: - In order to Save a TRIFLEX file. The use of “Project” is not required, however the use of “Project” is recommended if you have multiple Projects or wish to Archive multiple Projects in the future.


356

3.4.2 Setup Input /Output English units

Figure 3.4.2.0-1 Input English Units

Figure 3.4.2.0-2 Output English Units

The next step in creating a new piping model data file is to select the system of units that will be used throughout the piping model to define the piping system and all related data. The systems of units may not be changed once the piping model is started. To access the Input Units dialog, the User must click on Setup on the main menu and then Input Units on the drop down combo list. An Input Units dialog will then be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

System of Units – In this field, a drop down combo list is provided for the User to click on and select the desired system of units. Four systems of units are available:


357

3. English (Imperial)

4. SI Metric

5. MKS Metric

6. IU1 Metric

ü When the User selects the desired system of units, the screen immediately below the drop down combo list will display the variables in the calculations performed by TRIFLEX and the units that TRIFLEX will use for each. To see the units used by TRIFLEX for each variable, simply select the system of units and then see the desired field for the units that will be used by TRIFLEX for the specific variable.

Note: After a User has selected a system of Units, then the User must continue with that system of Units in his model. A User cannot flip-flop with different system of Units in his model. For example, if a user chooses English for his system of Units and builds his model, then after partially through his model he decides to change to SI Metric he will NOT be able to do so.


358

3.4.3 Setup Modeling Defaults

Figure 3.4.3.0-1 Main Screen – Setup Options

Note:

User Input Component Numbers cannot exceed 998.

User Input Node Numbers cannot exceed 9999.

TRIFLEX Input (computer generated) Node Numbers cannot exceed 32,000.

ü The next step in creating a new piping model data file is to define the modeling defaults that will be used throughout the piping model as the User defines it. If the modeling defaults are changed after the initial modeling has been completed, then the new values will be applied on all cases processed after the defaults were changed. To access the Modeling Defaults dialog, the User must click on Setup on the main menu and then Modeling Defaults on the drop down combo list. A Modeling Defaults dialog will then be presented to the User. Enter the data as noted below:

Piping Code – TRIFLEX contains the guidelines and rules for computing the deflections, rotations, forces, moments and stresses in a piping system based upon a number of different piping codes. Each piping code has its own unique rules for performing the calculations to determine if a piping system meets the code requirements. For instance, stress intensification and flexibility factors are


359

calculated by TRIFLEX in accordance with the piping code selected by the User and applied at bends, miters, reducers and branch connections through out the piping system. A piping code must be selected by the User from the drop down combo list in this field, even if a code compliance analysis is not requested. The piping codes currently included in TRIFLEX Windows are as follows:

B31.1 - ASME Power Piping Code

B31.3 - ASME Process Piping Code

Fatigue – Fatigue Analysis. This currently applies to piping systems designed using B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, B31.5, and B31.8 piping codes.

B31.4 - ASME Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquid Hydrocarbons and

Other Liquids Code

B31.5 - ASME Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components Code.

B31.8 - (DOT Guidelines) ASME Gas Transmission & Distribution Systems Code

U.S. Navy - General Specifications for Ships, Section 505

Class 2 – ASME Section III, Subsection NC Code

Class 3 – ASME Section III, Subsection ND Code

SPC1 - Swedish Piping Code (Method 1 - Section 9.4)

SPC2 - Swedish Piping Code (Method 2 - Section 9.5)

TBK51 - Norwegian General Rules for Piping Systems (Annex D - Alternative

Method)

TBK52 - Norwegian General Rules for Piping Systems (Section 10.5)

DNV - DnV (Det Norske Veritas) Rules for Submarine Pipeline Systems, 1981 & 1996

DNV – DnV Offshore Standard OS-F101 Submarine Pipeline System, 2000 Edition

POL1 – Polska Norma PN-79 / M34033 Steam and Water Piping

SNIP - (Russian Piping Code) 2.05-06-95 FSU Transmission Piping Code

BS7159 – Glass Reinforced Plastic Piping Code


360

BS8010 – British Standard Piping Code

UKOOA- UK Offshore Operator Association

NPD - (Norwegian) Guidelines for Submarine Pipelines and Risers

Statoil Design, Specifications Offshore Pipeline Systems

EURO CODE - European Standard prEN 13480-3

Additional piping codes will be incorporated in TRIFLEX Windows in the near future.

Use Maximum Stress Intensification Factors in all Cases - When a check is placed in this check box, TRIFLEX will apply the larger of the in plane and out-of-plane stress intensification factors for each node point in the analysis. This also applies to any Code Compliance Analysis calculations requested. The default is with the check box unchecked.

Include Rotational Pressure Deformations - When a check is placed in this check box, TRIFLEX will consider the effect of internal pressure on the elbow or bend to cause the elbow to rotate to an angle that is greater than the installed angle. In essence, the elbow or bend opens up because of the effect of internal pressure. The default is with a check in the check box.

Include Translational Pressure Deformations - When a check is placed in this check box, TRIFLEX will consider the effect of internal pressure on the pipe to cause the pipe to elongate or lengthen. The default is with a check in the check box.

Include Pressure Stiffening Effects - When a check is placed in this check box, TRIFLEX will consider, in accordance with the appropriate Piping Code, the stiffening effect of internal pressure on bends and elbows. The default is with the check box unchecked.

Multiple Cases for Displacement Stress Range - When a check is placed in this check box, TRIFLEX will calculate the thermal stress range by computing thermal loads in two or more operating analyses in combination and then using the largest stress range between all load sets as the thermal stress range for the code compliance calculations. The default is with the check box unchecked.

Relax Material Minimum Temperature Limit (Piping Codes May Require Additional Material Testing) - Just as it states. When selecting this box the material minimum temperature will be relaxed.

Sea Level (Feet) - The User can enter the Elevation if known.


361

Density of Surrounding Fluid - This field is provided to enable a User to enter the density of the fluid surrounding the pipe when buoyancy effects are to be considered. The default is with this field blank as most piping stress analyses are of piping systems in an open-air environment.

Spring Hanger Manufacturer - If spring hangers are to be sized and selected in this piping stress analysis, then the manufacturer of the spring hangers from whose product line the selection and sizing is to be based must be selected by the User from the drop down combo list in this field. When one of the following vendors is selected, TRIFLEX will choose the proper size and series spring hangers from the selection available from the selected vendor. The selection of the required hangers will be based upon the load being carried and the required installed to operating travel as determined by TRIFLEX. Spring hangers from the following manufacturers are available in TRIFLEX:

Basic Engineers Bergen & Paterson Bergen - Power Piping

Comet Support Springs Carpenter & Paterson Equal (AAA Technology)

Flexider (Table 5) Flexider (Table 6) Flexider (Table 5 revised)

Grinnell (Anvil) Inoflex Lisega

Nordon NPS Stalowa Wola

Figure 3.4.3.0-2 Spring Hanger Manufacturers

Size Spring Hangers For All positive Loads - To size spring hangers, TRIFLEX will first perform a Weight Analysis to determine the loads at each support point where the spring hangers are to be sized. When a check is placed in this check box and the support loads in the Weight Analysis are found to be positive (greater than zero), TRIFLEX will proceed with the Operating Case Analysis to determine the required support movements. For a detailed explanation of the procedure used by TRIFLEX to properly size spring hangers, see Section 5 of this User’s manual.

When this check box is left unchecked and the support loads in the Weight Analysis are found to be less than fifty (50) pounds, TRIFLEX will not proceed with the Operating Case Analysis to determine the required support movements. TRIFLEX will stop with the results of the Weight Analysis and will allow the User to make the necessary spring support decisions. Note that some spring hanger manufacturers do not supply spring hangers to carry loads less than 50 pounds. The default assumption made by TRIFLEX is with the check box unchecked.


362

Use M iddle 75% of Available Travel Range to Size Spring Hangers - When the User places a check mark in this check box, TRIFLEX will eliminate twelve and one half percent from the top of the working range and the same twelve and one half percent from the bottom of the working range. Then, TRIFLEX will size the spring hangers using the resultant seventy-five percent of the working range as shown on the Spring Hanger Size and Series Selection Table. Using this process, the User will typically get a more conservative spring hanger for the application. The default assumption is with the check box unchecked.

User Defined Maximum Number of Iterations Allowed to Solve for Non-linear Restraints - In this field, the User may specify the maximum number of iterations to be allowed for TRIFLEX to converge on a solution. When using non- linear restraints in a piping system (one-way restraints, limit stops, soil properties, or when considering friction), TRIFLEX must iterate to find the resulting restraint action. The program defaults to a maximum of ten (10) iterations unless the desired number of iterations is entered in this field.

When coding jobs with soil parameters, it is recommended that the number of iterations be increased. Increasing the number of iterations does not significantly increase the time used to perform the analysis. It only increases the possibility of a more accurate solution. With a higher number of iterations specified, TRIFLEX will be allowed to iterate more times when trying to converge on a solution. For typical piping system analysis, twenty (20) iterations is generally more than enough to allow TRIFLEX to converge on a reasonably accurate solution.

Friction Deviation Tolerance (Percent) - The frictional force computed by TRIFLEX must satisfy the following conditions:

1. If the displacement is zero (or negligible), then the frictional force must be less than or equal to the limit.

2. Else, if sliding occurs, then the frictional force must be equal to the limit.

Coulomb as the product of the normal reaction, multiplied by the coefficient of friction, has established the above-mentioned “limit”.

While checking for condition (2) above, TRIFLEX allows for a tolerance. That is, if the User specifies a tolerance of 20%, any frictional force in the range of 0.8 to 1.2 times the limit will be accepted by TRIFLEX in the calculations.

Considering friction in a piping stress analysis is not an exact science. Specifying a very low friction deviation tolerance is generally not recommended unless the piping stress analyst has specific engineering data to support such assumptions.

Max. Spacing with Respect to Diameter - In this field, the User may specify the default maximum spacing between consecutive node points as a multiple of the nominal pipe Diameter. When the Number of Intermediate Node Points or the Maximum Spacing between Node Points is specified on node point dialogs, such


363

entries will override the value entered in this field. The Maximum Spacing with Respect to Diameter on this dialog defaults to zero (no automatic spacing of node points will be imposed) except when soil properties have been specified. Then, the Maximum Spacing with Respect to Diameter on this dialog defaults to three (3) nominal pipe Diameters.

TRIFLEX will add the newly created node points to the input and use node point numbers that were generated by adding one to the previous To node point number for each node point to be generated. In cases where many node points will be generated by TRIFLEX, it is strongly recommended that the increment between node point numbers coded by the User be sufficiently large so that the generated node point numbers will not be numerically larger than the following Bold node points. (See Note at the beginning of Section 3.4.3)

This feature is also very useful when building a piping model for dynamic (Modal) analysis. By stating the Diameter spacing with respect to the nominal Diameter, TRIFLEX will create intermediate node points at a spacing no greater than this value times the nominal pipe Diameter. For instance, if a value of 7 is specified as the spacing with respect to the nominal pipe Diameter and an 8-inch nominal pipe Diameter is specified, there will be a maximum distance between node points of 56 inches.

Initial Node Number - In this field, the User may specify the desired node number for the first node point. TRIFLEX will default to an initial node number of “5”.

Node Increment - In this field, the User may specify a number that TRIFLEX is to add to the previous To node point to determine the next To node point number. It is highly recommended that an increment of at least three, if not five, be specified. TRIFLEX will default to an increment of 5, if the User does not enter a value in this field.

Specify the Vector from Intersection Point to Exit Point on Elbow Dialog - The User helps the program and makes the flow easier by checking this box. It makes the User provide the information on each elbow, as it is being input. And provides the next vector for ease of graphics presentation.


364

3.4.4 Setup Case Definition Data

Figure 3.4.4.0-1 Setup Case Definition

In order for TRIFLEX to perform a piping flexibility analysis properly, the User must define what analyses are to be performed and what conditions and data are to be considered. To enter the required data, the User must click on Setup on the Main Menu and then on Case Definition on the drop down list. Upon clicking Case Definition, a Case Definition Data dialog will be presented to the User.

In the left column, the conditions and data that can be considered are listed. To the right of the left most columns, six columns of check boxes are provided for the User to define the conditions and data that are to be considered in each case. The conditions and data that may be considered in case number one can be checked in the number one column of check boxes. The conditions and data that may be considered in case number two can be checked in the number two column of check boxes, etc. The conditions and data that the User can instruct TRIFLEX to consider on a case-by-case basis are defined below:

Process this Case - When a check mark is placed in this check box, TRIFLEX will execute the analysis or analyzes specified with the load conditions selected in the column of check boxes directly below this check box. When this check box is


365

left blank, no analysis will be processed for this load case. The default will be with the check box left blank.

Perform Operating Case Analysis - When a check mark is placed in this check box, TRIFLEX will set up the options to process an operating case analysis when the execute command is pressed after the piping model is built. When a check is placed in this check box, TRIFLEX automatically places a check in the following check boxes:

q Perform Hydrotest Case Analysis – Grayed out/Not available.

q Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis – The User may also place a check in this box if a piping code compliance report is desired.

ü Temperature – Checked when the Perform Operating Case is checked.

ü Pressure – Checked when Perform Operating Case is checked.

ü Pipe Weight – Checked when Perform Operating Case is checked.

ü Contents Weight Included – Checked when Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Insulation Weight Included – Checked when Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Anchor Movements Included – Checked when Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Restraint Movements Included – Checked when Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Restraint Loads Included – Checked when Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

q Soil Interaction Included – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to consider Soil Modeling, if desired.

q Wind included with Weight – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of Wind in combination with weight, if desired.

Note: The User can only select one of the two Wind options – not both.

q Wind Loading as Occasional Load – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of Wind as an occasional load, if desired.


366

q Seismic Loads – Static Equivalent – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of Seismic Loads, if desired. The User may not select Seismic Loads if Wind loads have been selected.

q Mode Shapes and Frequencies – Grayed out/Not available.

TRIFLEX automatically grays out the fields that the User is not permitted to select. The User may select any of the conditions listed above so long as the program does not gray out the check boxes.

Perform Hydrotest Case (P+Wt w/1.0) –A check should be placed in this box if the User wants TRIFLEX to process a pressure plus weight analysis with the piping system filled with water and the temperature set to 70 degrees F or 21 degrees C. When this option is selected, the check boxes with and without checks will be as follows:

q Perform Operating Case Analysis – Grayed out/Not available.

ü Perform Hydrotest Case Analysis – The User has placed a check mark in this check box.

q Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis – Grayed out/Not available.

q Temperature – Grayed out/Not available.

ü Pressure – Grayed out with check mark.

ü Pipe Weight - Grayed out with check mark.

ü Contents Weight Included – Grayed out with check mark.

q Insulation Weight Included - The User may place a check mark in this box if insulation is on the pipe when the hydrotest case is processed.

q Anchor Movements Inc luded - The User may place a check mark in this box if entered anchor movements are to be considered. Generally, no anchor movements are included in hydrotest cases.

q Restraint Movements Included - The User may place a check mark in this box if entered restraint movements are to be considered. Generally, no restraint movements are included in hydrotest cases.

ü Restraint Loads Included – TRIFLEX places a check mark in this box so that restraint loads, such as spring hanger initial loads, will be considered.

q Soil Interaction Included – The User may place a check mark in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to consider soil modeling, if desired.


367

q Wind included with Weight – The User may place a check mark in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to add the effects of Wind directly with the effect of weight.

q Wind Loading as Occasional Load – Grayed out/Not available.

q Seismic Loads – Static Equivalent – Grayed out/Not available.


Note: In all cases above where the fields are defined as “grayed out”, the User will be prohibited from entering a check mark in these check boxes. Where it is stated that the User will be allowed to place a check the check box, if desired, the User will be allowed to do so.

Perform Piping Code Compliance Analyses – By placing a check in this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to process the analyses necessary for TRIFLEX to generate a code compliance report. This is a pre-packaged combination of runs combined according to a pre-prescribed set of rules within TRIFLEX. The User can process only the analyses required for a code compliance analysis or the User can process an operating case analysis as well as the analyses required for a code compliance analysis. The check box combinations for each of these two scenarios are as follows:

With No Operating Case Analysis

q Perform Operating Case Analysis – When the Perform Piping Code Compliance option is selected by the User, a check mark is placed in this box by TRIFLEX. When the User does not want an operating cases analysis, the User can remove the check mark from this check box.


ü Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis – The User has placed a check in this box to obtain a piping code compliance report.

q Temperature – Checked automatically when Piping Code Compliance is checked. When Piping Code Compliance and Perform Operating Case are unchecked, this box will be available for the User to select.

q Pressure – Checked automatically when Perform Operating Case is checked. When Piping Code Compliance and Perform Operating Case is unchecked, this box will be available for the User to select.

q Pipe Weight – Checked automatically when Piping Code Compliance is checked. When Piping Code Compliance and Perform Operating Case are unchecked, this box will be available for the User to select.


368

ü Contents Weight Included – Checked automatically when Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Insulation Weight Included – Checked automatically when Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Anchor Movements Included – Checked when the Piping Code Compliance is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Restraint Movements Included - Checked when the Piping Code Compliance is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Restraint Loads Included - Checked when the Piping Code Compliance is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

q Soil Interaction Included – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to consider Soil Modeling, if desired.




q Seismic Loads – Static Equivalent – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of Seismic Loads, if desired.

Note: The User may not select Seismic Loads if Wind Loads have been selected.


With Operating Case Analysis

ü Perform Operating Case Analysis – By placing a check mark in this box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to perform an operating case analysis, including the effects of temperature, pressure and system weight.


ü Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis – The User has placed a check in this box to obtain a piping code compliance report.


369

ü Temperature – Checked automatically when the Piping Code Compliance or Perform Operating Case is checked. When Piping Code Compliance and Perform Operating Case are unchecked, this box will be available for the User to select.

ü Pressure – Checked automatically when the Piping Code Compliance or Perform Operating Case is checked. When Piping Code Compliance and Perform Operating Case are unchecked, this box will be available for the User to select.

ü Pipe Weight – Checked automatically when the Piping Code Compliance or Perform Operating Case is checked. When Piping Code Compliance and Perform Operating Case are unchecked, this box will be available for the User to select.

ü Contents Weight Included – When the Perform Piping Code Compliance option is selected by the User, a check mark is placed in this box by TRIFLEX. When the User does not want an operating cases analysis, the User can remove the check mark from this check box.

ü Insulation Weight Included – When the Perform Piping Code Compliance option is selected by the User, a check mark is placed in this box by TRIFLEX. When the User does not want an operating cases analysis, the User can remove the check mark from this check box.

ü Anchor Movements Included – Checked when Piping Code Compliance is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Restraint Movements Included – Checked when Piping Code Compliance is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Restraint Loads Included –Checked when Piping Code Compliance is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

q Soil Interaction Included – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to consider Soil Modeling, if desired





370




Note: In all cases above where the check boxes are defined as “grayed out”, the User will be prohibited from entering a check mark in these check boxes. Where it is stated that the User will be allowed to place a check mark in the check box, if desired, the User will be allowed to do so. In addition, the User is allowed to remove any of the check marks that the program generates automatically as a result of the selection of the pre-packaged “Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis” option.

Temperature – In this field, the User may place a check mark to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of a change in temperature. This field will automatically be checked when the User checks the Perform Operating Case Analysis option. When this option has been selected, the check mark will appear in this check box. When the User places a check mark in the Perform Hydrotest Case check box. When the User places a check mark in the Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis check box, a check mark will be placed in this field. When the User places a check mark in this field, mode shapes and frequencies may not be selected. Therefore, the mode shapes and frequencies check box will be grayed out.

A check mark may be placed in this check box by the User to request that TRIFLEX process an analysis considering the effects of temperature change only. In addition, the User may place a check mark in this check box as well as either or both of the check boxes labeled Pressure and Pipe Weight. In such a case, the User can specify a Temperature plus Pressure analysis by placing a check mark in the Temperature and Pressure check boxes, or the User can specify a Temperature plus Pipe Weight analysis by placing a check mark in the Temperature and Pipe Weight check boxes, or the User can specify a Temperature plus Pressure plus Pipe Weight analysis by placing a check mark in the Temperature, Pressure and Pipe Weight check boxes

Pressure – In this field, the User may place a check mark to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of a change in pressure. This field will automatically be checked when the User checks any of the following options: Perform Operating Case and Perform Hydrotest Case. When these options have been selected, the check mark will appear in this check box and will be grayed out.

When the User places a check mark in this field, mode shapes and frequencies may not be selected. Therefore, the mode shapes and frequencies check box will


371

be grayed out. See the last paragraph under Temperature for combinations of Temperature, Pressure and Pipe Weight for a discussion of combination loadings.

Pipe Weight – In this field, the User may place a check mark to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of weight. This field will automatically be checked when the User checks any of the following options: Perform Operating Case and Perform Hydrotest Case. When these options have been selected, the check mark will appear in this check box and will be grayed out.

When the User places a check mark in this field, mode shapes and frequencies may not be selected. Therefore, the mode shapes and frequencies check box will be grayed out. See the last paragraph under Temperature for combinations of Temperature, Pressure and Pipe Weight for a discussion of combination loadings.

Contents Weight - In this field, the User may place a check mark to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of the weight of the contents in the piping. This check box can be checked along with any other option including the mode shapes and frequencies so long as pipe weight is also checked. In other words, the User cannot specify contents weight to be considered without specifying that pipe weight be part of the piping analysis.

Insulation Weight - In this field, the User may place a check mark to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of the weight of the insulation on the piping. This check box can be checked along with any other option including the mode shapes and frequencies so long as pipe weight is also checked. In other words, the User cannot specify insulation weight to be considered without specifying that pipe weight be part of the piping analysis.

Anchor Movements - In this field, the User may place a check mark to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of anchor movements. A check mark is automatically placed in this check box when the User checks either of the following options: Perform Operating Case and Perform Piping Code Compliance. This check box is left unchecked for all other cases, but the User can place a check in this check box in combination with all other check boxes.

Restraint Movements - In this field, the User may place a check mark to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of restraint movements. A check mark is automatically placed in this check box when the User checks either of the following options: Perform Operating Case and Perform Piping Code Compliance. This check box is left unchecked for all other cases, but the User can place a check in this check box in combination with all other check boxes.

Restraint Loads - In this field, the User may place a check mark to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of restraint loads. A check mark is automatically placed in this check box when the User checks any of the following options: Perform Operating Case, Perform Hydrotest Case and Perform Piping Code Compliance. This check box is left unchecked for all other cases, but the


372

User can place a check in this check box in combination with all other check boxes.

Soil Interaction – In this field, the User may place a check mark to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of the soil springs generated by TRIFLEX as a result of the User’s soil specification data. This check box can be checked along with any other option other than the mode shapes and frequencies.

With Operating Case Analysis specified with no Code Compliance selected

ü Perform Operating Case Analysis – By placing a check mark in this box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to perform an operating cases analysis including the effects of temperature, pressure and system weight.


q Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis – The User may also place a check in this box if a piping code compliance report is desired. For this example, the check box will be left blank.

ü Temperature – Checked automatically when the Perform Operating Case is checked. When the Perform Operating Case is unchecked, this box will be available for the User to select.

ü Pressure –– Checked automatically when the Perform Operating Case is checked. When Perform Operating Case is unchecked, this box will be available for the User to select.

ü Pipe Weight – Checked when the Perform Operating Case is checked. When the Perform Operating Case is unchecked, this box will be available for the User to select.

ü Contents Weight Included – Checked when the Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Insulation Weight Included – Checked when the Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Anchor Movements Included – Checked when Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Restraint Movements Included – Checked when Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Restraint Loads Included - Checked when Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.


373

ü Soil Interaction Included – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to consider Soil Modeling, if desired.






With Operating Case Analysis with Piping Code Compliance Analysis

ü Perform Operating Case Analysis – By placing a check mark in this box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to perform an operating case analysis, including the effects of temperature, pressure and system weight.

q Perform Hydrotest Case Analysis – Grayed out.

ü Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis – By placing a check mark in this box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to perform a Piping Code Compliance Report.

ü Temperature - Checked automatically when the piping Code Compliance or Perform Operating Case is checked.

ü Pressure – Checked automatically when the Piping Code Compliance or Perform Operating Case is checked.

ü Pipe Weight – Checked automatically when the Piping Code Compliance or Perform Operating Case is checked.

ü Contents Weight Included – Checked when the Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Insulation Weight Included – Checked when Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.


374

ü Anchor Movements Included – Checked when Piping Code Compliance or Perform Operating Case are selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Restraint Movements Included – Checked when Piping Code Compliance or Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Restraint Loads Included – Checked when Piping Code Compliance or Perform Operating Case is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Soil Interaction Included – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to consider Soil Modeling, if desired

q Wind included with Weight – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to add the effects of Wind directly with the effects of weight. Wind cannot be considered if Soil is.

q Wind Loading as Occasional Load – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to add the effects of Wind directly with the effects of Wind as an occasional load. Wind cannot be considered if Soil is.

q Seismic Loads – Static Equivalent – The User may check this box if the Piping Code Compliance option is selected.


With Piping Code Compliance Analysis – No Operating Case Analysis

q Perform Operating Case Analysis – By placing a check mark in this box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to perform an operating case analysis, including the effects of temperature, pressure and system weight. For the noted option, this check box will be left blank.


ü Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis – The User has placed a check in the check box to obtain a Piping Code Compliance Report. For the noted option, this check box will be checked.

q Temperature – Checked automatically when the Piping Code or Perform Operating Case is checked. When Piping Code Compliance and Perform Operating Case are unchecked, this box will be available for the User to select.


375

q Pressure – Checked automatically when the Piping Code or Perform Operating Case is checked. When Piping Code Compliance and Perform Operating Case are unchecked, this box will be available for the User to select.

q Pipe Weight Included – Checked automatically when the Piping Code or Perform Operating Case is checked. When Piping Code Compliance and Perform Operating Case are unchecked, this box will be available for the User to select.

ü Contents Weight Included – When the Perform Piping Code Compliance option is selected by the User, a check mark is placed in this box by TRIFLEX. When the User does not want an operating cases analysis, the User can remove the check mark from this check box.

ü Insulation Weight Included – When the Perform Piping Code Compliance option is selected by the User, a check mark is placed in this box by TRIFLEX. When the User does not want an operating cases analysis, the User can remove the check mark from this check box.

ü Anchor Movements Included – Checked when Piping Code Compliance is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Restraint Movements Included – Checked when Piping Code Compliance is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Restraint Loads Included – Checked when Piping Code Compliance is selected. The User can remove the check mark.

ü Soil Interaction Included – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to consider Soil Modeling, if desired.

q Wind included with Weight – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of Wind in combination with weight, if desired. Wind cannot be considered if Soil interaction is.

Note: The User can only select one of the two Wind options -- not both.

q Wind Loading as Occasional Load – The User may place a check in this box to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of Wind as an occasional load, if desired. Wind cannot be considered if Soil interaction is.




376


Wind included with Weight – In this field, the User may place a check mark to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of wind loads in conjunction with the pipe weight. If a check mark is placed in this check box, the User may specify a: Perform Operating Case Analysis or a Perform Hydrotest Case Analysis or a Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis.

For piping code compliance analyses where only an operating case analysis is processed and results are compared with a code allowable, the User is encouraged to select this option. For piping code compliance analyses where multiple analyses are processed and results are taken selectively from these analyses, the User should not select this option

When the Wind included with Weight is checked, the Load Case options may be elected as follows:

ü Perform Operating Case Analysis – The User may place a check mark in this check box.

q Perform Hydrotest Case Analysis – If Perform Operating Case Analysis or if Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis is checked, then this check box will be grayed out and may not be checked.

ü Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis – The User may place a check mark in this check box, if desired.

ü Temperature – The User may place a check mark in this check box if any of the check boxes listed above in this column are not checked.

ü Pressure – The User may place a check mark in this check box if any of the check boxes listed above the Temperature option in this column are not checked.

ü Pipe Weight – The User may place a check mark in this check box is any of the check boxes listed above the Temperature option in this column are not checked.

ü Contents Weight Included – The User may place a check mark in this check box if the Pipe Weight is checked.

ü Insulation Weight Included - The User may place a check mark in this check box if the Pipe Weight is checked.

ü Anchor Movements Included - The User may place a check mark in this check box.


377

ü Restraint Movements Included – The User may place a check mark in this check box.

ü Restraint Loads Included – The User may place a check mark in this check box.

ü Soil Interaction Included – The User may place a check mark in this check box.

Wind Included with Weight

q Wind Loading as Occasional Load – Grayed out/Not available.

q Seismic Loads – Option not available with Wind Included with Weight.

q Mode Shapes and Frequencies –. Option not available with Wind Included with Weight.

Wind Loads as an Occasional Load – In this field, the User may place a check mark to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of wind loads as an occasional load. This should only be selected when a User has requested a Piping Code Compliance analysis with or without an Operating Case Analysis. If this check box is checked, the User may not specify any of the following analyses (Perform Hydrotest Case Analysis.

In addition, when Wind Loads as an Occasional Load is checked, the Load Case options are as follows:

ü Perform Operating Case Analysis – The User may place a check mark in this check box.


ü Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis – The User must place a check mark in this check box.

ü Temperature – TRIFLEX automatically places a check mark in this check box.

ü Pressure – TRIFLEX automatically places a check mark in this check box..

ü Pipe Weight – TRIFLEX automatically places a check mark in this check box.

ü Contents Weight Included – The User may place a check mark in this check box.


378

ü Insulation Weight Included – The User may place a check mark in this check box.

ü Anchor Movements Included - The User may place a check mark in this check box.




q Wind included with Weight – Not available with Wind Loads as Occasional Load.

ü Wind Loading as Occasional Load – The User has placed a check mark in this check box.

q Seismic Loads – Not available with Wind Loads as Occasional Load.


Static Equivalent Seismic Loading – In this field, the User may place a check mark to instruct TRIFLEX to consider the effects of User Specified percentages of gravity along the X, Y and Z-axes as an occasional load. By checking this check box, the User instructs TRIFLEX to apply the gravity loading multiplied by the factors entered by the User on the occasional loading dialog. This check box must only be selected when the User has checked the Piping Code Compliance Analysis.

With Operating Case Analysis specified – This option is not available.

With Operating Case Analysis with Piping Code Compliance Analysis

ü Perform Operating Case Analysis – The User has placed a check mark in this check box.


ü Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis – The User must place a check mark in this check box.

ü Temperature –TRIFLEX automatically places a check mark in this check box.


379

ü Pressure – TRIFLEX automatically places a check mark in this check box.

ü Pipe Weight – TRIFLEX automatically places a check mar k in this check box.

ü Contents Weight Included – TRIFLEX automatically places a check mark in this check box.

ü Insulation Weight Included – TRIFLEX automatically places a check mark in this check box.

ü Anchor Movements Included – TRIFLEX automatically places a check mark in this check box.

ü Restraint Movements Included – TRIFLEX automatically places a check mark in this check box.

ü Restraint Loads Included – TRIFLEX automatically places a check mark in this check box.


q Wind included with Weight – Not available with Seismic Loading.

q Wind Loading as Occasional Load – Not available with Seismic Loading.

ü Seismic Loads – Static Equivalent – The User may place a check mark in this check box.


With Piping Code Compliance Analysis – No Operating Case Analysis

q Perform Operating Case Analysis – The User has not placed a check mark in this check box.


ü Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis – The User can place a check mark in this check box and in this example, it is selected.

q Temperature – The User may place a check mark in this check box if any of the check boxes listed above in this column are not checked.

q Pressure – The User may place a check mark in this check box if any of the check boxes listed above the Temperature option in this column are not checked.


380

q Pipe Weight – The User must place a check mark in this check box if any of the check boxes listed above the Temperature option in this column are not checked.

ü Contents Weight Included – The User may place a check mark in this check box.

ü Insulation Weight Included – The User may place a check mark in this check box.

ü Anchor Movements Included – The User may place a check mark in this check box.




q Wind included with Weight – Grayed out/Not available. Wind cannot be considered if Soil is.

q Wind Loading as Occasional Load – Grayed out/Not available. Wind cannot be considered if Soil is.

ü Seismic Loads – Static Equivalent – The User may place a check mark in this check box.


Mode Shapes and Frequencies – In this field, the User may place a check mark to instruct TRIFLEX to perform a modal analysis. Checks may be placed in the fields where check marks are shown.

q Perform Operating Case Analysis – Grayed out/Not available.


q Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis – Grayed out/Not available.

q Temperature – Grayed out/Not available.

q Pressure – Grayed out/Not available.

q Pipe Weight – Grayed out/Not available.


381

ü Contents Weight Included – Grayed out/Not available.

ü Insulation Weight Included – Grayed out/Not available.

q Anchor Movements Included - Grayed out/Not available.

q Restraint Movements Included - Grayed out/Not available.


q Soil Interaction Included – Grayed out/Not available.

q Wind included with Weight – Grayed out/Not available. Wind cannot be considered if Soil is.

q Wind Loading as Occasional Load – Grayed out/Not available. Wind cannot be considered if Soil is.

q Seismic Loads – Static Equivalent – Gray out/Not available.

ü Mode Shapes and Frequencies – The User may place a check mark in this check box.


382

3.4.5 Occasional Loading Data

Figure 3.4.5.0-1 Setup Occasional Loading Data

When the User wishes to simulate an occasional load as a percentage of gravity along one, two or three axes, the User should place a check in the Seismic Loads – Static Equivalent field on the Load Case dialog for the desired load case. When the check is properly placed in the Load Case dialog for a specific load case, the X, Y and Z Gravity Factor fields for that specific load case in the Occasional Loading Data dialog will be made active.

X, Y and Z fields - the User may enter the desired magnitude of the gravity factor. Gravity factors may be positive or negative to indicate the application direction of the occasional loading.

Note: The User may enter different gravity factors for each load case, if desired. In order to obtain a piping code compliance analysis, the User must also request that TRIFLEX process this analysis on the Load Case dialog by placing a check in the Perform Piping Code Compliance Analysis check box.


383

Operating + RSA = Operating Case + the Response Spectrum Analysis

Operating – RSA = Operating Case - the Response Spectrum Analysis

Operating + Max RSA = Operating Case + the Maximum Response Spectrum Analysis

Note: Available ONLY when RSA analysis is selected.


384

3.4.6 Modal Analysis

Refer to Chapter 9, TRIFLEXWindows Dynamic Capability for FULL description.

However the basic dialog is given below.

Figure 3.4.6.0-1 Dynamic Data Entry

In order for TRIFLEX to perform a modal analysis of a piping system, the User must define several items of information in addition to the basic piping model. To enter the required data, the User must click on Setup on the Main Menu and then on Modal Analysis on the drop down list. Upon clicking Modal Analysis, a Modal Analysis Data dialog will be presented to the User. The User must accept the default values or enter the data desired as follows:

No. of Mode Shapes – In this field, the User is to enter the desired number of modes or frequencies to be calculated. The default is 10.

Maximum Frequency – In this field, the User is to specify the cut-off (maximum) frequency (default value = 100 Hz.) for the analysis in Hertz or cycles/sec. When TRIFLEX processes the analysis, it will stop determining frequencies when the frequency exceeds the cut-off frequency entered by the User.

3.4.7 Response Spectrum Analysis

Refer to Chapter 9, TRIFLEXWindows Dynamic Capability.

3.4.8 Time History Analysis


385

Refer to Chapter 9, TRIFLEXWindows Dynamic Capability.


386

3.4.9 Configure Graphics Colors

Figure 3.4.9.0-1 Configure Graphics Colors

Graphic Color Preferences can be selected for:

1. Background

2. Text

3. Any Graphic Component

Once one of the above items is selected, the User can then select from a predetermined selection of “Basic Colors” or create a custom color for use.


387

Figure 3.4.9.0-2 Background Color Selection

To select a “Basic Color” click on the “Basic Color” and select OK.

To create a “Custom Color” depress the Define Custom Color Bar and select the color by clicking on the color in the box above the Hue, Sat., Lum, Red, Green, Blue boxes in the lower right hand side of the dialog box.

Note: When Cutting graphics to a final report it may be useful to change the background to white and the Text to Black.

To make coarse adjustments use the sliding color scale on the right next to the color box. To make fine adjustments to the color use the Hue, Sat., Lum, Red, and Green, Blue input controls.

To save this color as a custom color, depress the Add to the Custom Colors bar.


388

3.4.10 Graphic Preferences

Figure 3.4.10.0-1 Graphic Preferences

The User may select the following:

1. Continuous All Views - This allows the User to automatically have the graphics centered on the screen every time a new component is selected.

2. Adjust Axis Scale – The User can select an integer between 1 and 100 for the X, Y, and Z leg of the axis indicator.

3. Adjust Restraint Scale – This enables the User to select an integer between 1 and 100 to adjust the relative size of the restraint indicator with respect to the dimension of the pipe or fitting to which they are attached. The options are used to indicate the value in the Nominal Restraint field and the Spring field.

In the Restraint Scale Adjustment dialog box - The default values for the Restraints, springs, and Soil parameters are given. The check boxes to the right of the values will toggle them on or off.


389


4. Set Graphic Font Size – The User can select the Graphic Font Size , using an integer from 4 to 72.

Use of the radio buttons for Node Labels as well as Component Labels is explained next to the radio button.


Note the Default Values Shown.


390

3.4.11 Save Graphic Setting

This allows the User to save the settings previously chosen from Graphic Color Settings and Graphic Preferences. This setting is stored as an TRIFLEXWindows.ini file in the User’s specified path.

3.4.12 Restore Setting

This allows the User to restore the previously saved setting (TRIFLEXWindows.ini file) from a path determined by the User.


391

3.5 Importing Interfaces

Import/Export Capabilities

TRIFLEX® Windows can import and export old TRIFLEX® DOS keyword and job files.

TRIFLEX® Windows has multiple import interfaces (see table below).

IMPORT

Company Product Extension What is Imported

AAA Technology

TRIFLEX DOS *.IN Geometry, Units,

Material Properties,

Insulation, Temperature, Restraints

Pressure,

Occasional Loads.

ALIAS I-Sketch *.PCF Geometry, Units,



Pressure,

AVEVA / CADCentre

PDMS *.PDM Geometry, Units,



Pressure,

CALMA CALMA *.CLM Geometry, Units,


392



Pressure,

DASSULT / IBM

CATIA IV STEP 227 Geometry, Units,

DASSULT / IBM

CATIA IV *.PCF Geometry, Units,



Pressure,

INTERGRAPH PDS *.PDS Geometry, Units,



Pressure,

ORANGE SYSTEMS

CADPipe *.ude Geometry, Units,



Pressure,

TRIFLEX® Windows can export to tab-delimited TXT files as well. This allows SQL database applications such as Access or ORACLE to import the results directly from TRIFLEX® Windows into their proprietary format (column header names are also exported).


393

Graphics can be exported to high-quality image files in the JPEG, BMP, HPGL and PS (PostScript) formats. The resolution can be set dynamically so that the files may be used for poster printing.

Since TRIFLEX format (isoout file) Windows version 2.3.1 it is possible to export directly to PCF. These files can be read by I-Sketch and then converted to any other format that is available including *.dxf.

TRIFLEX® Windows can export a 3D model of your piping system to any program that can read the DXF format.

TRIFLEX® Windows can export in html and .xls file formats.

(For Export Interfaces See Chapter 3, section 3.6)

Figure 3.5.0-1 Importing Interfaces

IMPORT FILES SUB MENU DESCRIPTION

DOS TRIFLEX Job Enables the User to define all data required to import a TRIFLEX DOS File

(*.JOB) Format

TRIFLEX Keyword Defines all data required to convert an existing TRILFEX file (Old Revision) to the TRIFLEX® Windows program (latest Revision).

(*.IN) TRIFLEX Keyword Format

SpreadSheet Input Enables the User to define the settings for the


394

current project. This feature is fashioned after a compass that allows the User to set the directions of the X, Y, Z coordinates, and also to specify a starting node number.

USER DEFINED INPUT

Spreadsheet Input

Surveyors GPS data from Pipelines, Onshore and Offshore applications, etc.

Limited only by the User.

ALIAS Enables the User to define all data required to import an ALIAS file.

(*.PCF) Format (I-Sketch)

AutoPLANT This field enables the User to define all data required to import an AutoPLANT neutral file. (Bentley – Rebis)

(*.PCF) ALIAS Piping Component Format

CADPipe This field enables the User to define all data required to import a CADPipe neutral file.

(*.ude) ORANGE SYSTEMS Format

CALMA Enables the User to define all data required to import a CALMA neutral file.

(*.CLM) CALMA Format

CATIA IV This field enables the User to define all data required to import a CATIA IV neutral file.

(STEP 227) DASSULT / IBM Format

STEP (ISO 10303) AP227 file.

(*.PCF) DASSULT / IBM Format

PDMS Enables the User to define all data required to import a PDMS neutral file.

(*.PDM) AVEVA / CADCentre Format


395

PDS Files Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a PDS File

(*.PDS) INTERGRAPH Format

Plant 4D This field enables the User to define all data required to import a Plant 4D neutral file. (CEA Systems).

(*.PCF) ALIAS Piping Component Format

Import Error Messages

Enables the User to have a view of the error messages created during the importing procedure


396

3.5.1 Import TRIFLEX® DOS

To open a previously created piping model, click on File in the Main Menu, select option Open and then select the file you wish. By default, the extension of TRIFLEX® data files is “.dta”. The complete path is:

c:\ProgramFiles\PipingSolutions \TriflexWindows\Samples\Tutorial01\Tutorial01.dta

To import a previously created TRIFLEX® DOS piping model, click on Utilities in the Main Menu, select option Import File and then click on DOS Triflex Job. By default, the extension of DOS TRIFLEX® data files is “.job”.

Job files created by DOS.

To display the spreadsheet and the piping model simultaneously on a split screen as shown in Figure 2.2.0-1, open a piping model. The piping model will be displayed on the screen. Click on Windows on the Main Menu and select Tile Vertical. The User will see two windows; one with the piping model and the other will be blank. The User should then click on the Spreadsheet Icon in the Main Menu to obtain the spreadsheet in the blank screen. Click on any component in the piping model and the data for that component will be highlighted in the spreadsheet. Similarly, by clicking on a node in the spreadsheet, the component on the piping model will be highlighted. This is useful in identifying components in a piping model for copying, inserting and deleting.

Note: Models may be built using the spreadsheet and/or in graphic mode as described in section 2.3.0 of this User’s Manual.


397

Figure 3.5.1-1 Display of an Imported Model

If the User is Importing into TRIFLEX by the spreadsheet approach he should consider going to the first component and cycling through each dialog screen.

TRIFLEX will not be able to catch errors that come about by building a model through the spreadsheet approach since it bypasses all error checking. Cycling through the dialog screens will show the User many things the User may have forgotten. For example the elbows may need to be long radius and the dialog screen will show the User that they are short radius and the User may need to correct this in the model.


398

3.5.2 Import a TRIFLEX keyword file

Defines all data required to convert an existing TRILFEX® file (Old Revision) to the TRIFLEX® Windows program (latest Revision).

(*.IN) TRIFLEX® Keyword Format

Importing a TRIFLEX Keyword File, Editing the Resulting Data & Processing the Analysis Using TRIFLEXWindows

1. Start up TRIFLEXWindows

2. Click on UTILITIES

3. Click on IMPORT FILES

4. Click on TRIFLEX Keyword

5. Locate the path where the old revision of your file resides.

6. Scan the balance of the data to insure that it is correct. Make any of the desired changes and process the analysis.

7. Execute the analysis by either of the following methods:

a) On the Main Menu, select Calculate and then from the pull down Menu, select Basic Calculation, or

b) Click on the Green Calculate Arrow icon located just below the Help item on the Main Menu.


399

3.5.3 Import SpreadSheet Input

To Import a Spreadsheet with values, which correspond to, values used in TRIFLEX do the following:

1. Create an Excel Spreadsheet like the one shown below.

2. Note that your Excel spreadsheet columns will be values for the following:

Component Column A

From Node point Column B

To Node point Column C

Delta X distance Column D

Delta Y distance Column E

Delta Z distance Column F

Nominal Pipe Size Column G

Pipe Wall Thickness. Column H

Figure 3.5.3-1 Importing Spreadsheet Input

3. When you have a ANCHOR component make both the From Node Point

and the To Node Point the same node point number.


400

4. The TRIFLEX file will then look like the one below after you have gone through the steps to Import your spreadsheet.

5. Simply:

a) Utilities

b) Import Files

c) Spreadsheet Input

6. Up comes the screen you see below.


7. Go to your Excel spreadsheet file and Copy the portion of your Excel spreadsheet file to the clipboard.


401


8. Go to TRIFLEX’s Spreadsheet Input and put the cursor in the Upper Left hand corner of TRIFLEX’s Spreadsheet and Click on “Paste”.


9. Click on “Convert to Components”.

10. And view the TRIFLEX piping model. Both in spreadsheet mode and graphics mode.


402



11. Now is where you will want to check all the components to see if you have want you want. That is Material, Process conditions, Restraints, Soil loads, etc. But you have successfully Imported a spreadsheet into TRIFLEX.

12. Go through the dialog screens and double-check all your values.

13. When satisfied with the Input, Run the file.


403

3.5.4 Import a Global Positioning system (GPS) file

The following will show you how to import a surveyor’s G.P.S. tabulated table of information, which in this case is for a cross-country underground pipeline, into TRIFLEX. However you could use this with Off Shore pipelines or any large piping system, which a surveyor can provide a mapping for.

The surveyor provided the G.P.S. data listed below in a tabular form:

Figure 3.5.4-1 Surveyor G.P.S. tabulated information.

As in section 3.5.3 on Importing Spreadsheet Input, do the following:

1. The user MUST now rearrange the surveyor’s data into the TRIFLEX input spreadsheet format; note that the ground elevation corresponds to the Y direction, and no additional information is used.

2. Reformatting the data can be done using Microsoft EXCEL program.


404

Figure 3.5.4-2 EXCEL Spreadsheet converted information.

3. Start TRIFLEX

4. Simply:

a) Utilities

b) Import Files

c) Spreadsheet Input


405

Figure 3.5.4-3 TRIFLEX Import Screen

5. Up comes the screen you see below.

Figure 3.5.4-4 TRIFLEX Spreadsheet Import Screen


406

6. Go to your Excel spreadsheet file and Copy the portion of your Excel spreadsheet file to the clipboard.

Figure 3.5.4-5 EXCEL Spreadsheet

7. Copy into the clipboard the data from the EXCEL spreadsheet and paste it into TRIFLEX.


407

Figure 3.5.4-6 TRIFLEX Spreadsheet Input

5. Select the radio button for Absolute coordinate conversion.

6. Convert the TRIFLEX “Spreadsheet Input” into a piping model, by clicking on Convert to Components.

Figure 3.5.4-7 TRIFLEX piping model

10. Note how TRIFLEX has converted the G.P.S. data into a piping model.

The Key is to have the spreadsheet data in their correct columns and nothing extra in the spreadsheet data that you are pasting into TRIFLEX.


408

The locations for anchors and supports and tunnels are very easy to identify because the G.P.S. locations and Node Numbers are identical

Figure 3.5.4-8 Surveyor G.P.S. tabulated information.

11. Next using “Anchor” and “Restraints” dialogs the user can set the boundary conditions


409

Figure 3.5.4-9 TRIFLEX Anchor screen

Figure 3.5.4-10 TRIFLEX Restraint screen


410

12. Using the powerful “Ripple” tools from each dialog screen the USER can easily set the operating conditions and soil loads for different areas of the model.

Figure 3.5.4-11 TRIFLEX Process screen

Figure 3.5.4-12 TRIFLEX Soils Loads screen


411

Figure 3.5.4-13 TRIFLEX Piping model

Figure 3.5.4-14 TRIFLEX Report Output screen

13. It only remains to run TRIFLEX and check the results.

Now you have successfully taken G.P.S. tabulated data and Imported it into TRIFLEX and created a piping model. All this done without the very lengthy step-by-step approach used by other Pipe Stress Programs.


412

3.5.5 Import a Plant -4D and ALIAS Input File

This procedure enables the User to define all data required to import a Plant-4D or an ALIAS file.

(*.PCF) Format PCF stands for Piping Component File.

ALIAS uses isogen. “Isogen” is a defacto standard for automatic generation and is supplied to all major plant design software vendors. This format can be used to import data into TRIFLEX.

Note: Any major plant design system, which utilizes PCF format, can selectively be Imported into TRIFLEX by following the procedures outlined below. Example of Plant-4D or ALIAS (*.PCF) Import. Importing Plant-4D or an ALIAS (*.PCF) File, Editing the Resulting Data & Processing the Analysis Using TRIFLEXWindows




4. Click on ALIAS

5. Locate the path where PCF files (*.PCF) reside. In TRIFLEX Windows, the PCF file folder resides under the following path:

C:\Program Files\PipingSolutions\TRIFLEXWindows\Samples\PCF Examples

Select and view the (*. PCF) file.

6. When the desired view of the piping system is achieved, click on the V+ button (2rd button down) on the Graphics Toolbar. This will set this new view of the piping model as the New View for the piping model.

7. At this point, the User needs to review the data and add any new data as found to be necessary.

a) Click on SETUP, then on PROJECT and enter the desired data.

b) Click on SETUP, then on OUTPUT UNITS and select the desired System of Units.


413

c) Click on SETUP, then on MODELING DEFAULTS and enter the desired data.

d) Click on SETUP, then on CASE DEFINITION and select the desired analysis conditions.

e) Click on the INPUT SPREADSHEET button on the Main Menu bar. The worksheet will then be displayed for the User to review the data.

f) Scroll to the top of the spreadsheet and double click on the word ANCHOR on the first line. The Anchor dialog will then be displayed. Notice what the Anchor flexibility is defined as. If Totally Free. Click on the Totally Rigid radio button.

g) Click on the INITIAL MVTS/ROTS tab. Enter any desired anchor movements and rotations.

h) Click on the PIPE PROPERTIES tab. Check the data. Enter Pipe Size, Contents, Pipe Materials, and/or pipe insulation (if none came over in the data from PCF). Be sure to press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated throughout the piping model. If the contents or the pipe insulation varies throughout the piping system, then you must go to each pipe segment where the changes occur and enter/ripple the proper va lues.

i) Click on the PROCESS tab. Check the data. Enter the pressure and temperature values, if the displayed values are not the desired values. If a code compliance analysis is to be processed, then the USE INSTALLED MODULUS radio button is to be selected (default). If the User expects to process a rotating equipment analysis or simply wishes to see the true movements at operating conditions, then the USE OPERATING MODULUS radio button should be selected. If the pressure and/or temperature varies throughout the piping system, then the User must go to each pipe segment where the changes occur and enter/ripple the proper values.

j) Click on the WIND LOADS tab. No wind load data will be brought over from the data conversion. The User may enter the desired data. Once the data is entered, press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated throughout the piping model.

k) Click on the SOIL LOADS tab. No soil load data will be brought over from the data conversion. The User may enter the desired data. Once the data is entered, press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated through the piping model.

l) Click on the CODE COMPLIANCE tab. No code compliance data will be brought over from the data conversion. The User may enter the


414

desired data. Once the data is entered, press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated through the piping model.

m) Looking at the graphics model of the piping system, there may be some Valves that have distance and appear to be OK. But you must look at all Valves. All valves come across as user-specified because the length was input. All Valve data will not transfer across. And if it did, you as the Stress Analysis cannot be sure that the CAD personnel have added the Valve data correctly. For example look at the screen capture below and see that the Weights are missing. This is common since the weights of valves are not always readily available. And Operator weight as well. Also note that the Class did not come across. Double-check that as well.

Figure 3.5.5-1 Importing Plant4D

n) Looking at the graphics model of the piping system, there may be some flanges that are facing forward when they should be facing backward. Double click on each flange and place a check mark in the check box in the field labeled “FLANGE IS FACING BACKWARD” which can be found in the middle of the Flange dialog. Also as previously mentioned double check the weight of the flange, and class as well.

o) Scan the balance of the data to insure that it is correct. Make any of the desired changes and process the analysis.


415





416

3.5.6 Import CADPipe Input File

This procedure enables the User to define all data required to import a CADPipe neutral file.

(*.ude) ORANGE SYSTEMS Format Example of CADPIPE (*.UDE) Import. Importing CADPIPE (*.UDE) File, Editing the Resulting Data & Processing the Analysis Using TRIFLEXWindows




4. Click on CADPIPE

5. Locate the path where UDE files (*.UDE) reside. In TRIFLEX Windows, the CADPIPE file folder resides under the following path:

C:\Program Files\PipingSolutions\TRIFLEXWindows\Samples\CADPIPE Examples

Select and view the (*. UDE) file.








417




h) Click on the PIPE PROPERTIES tab. Check the data. Enter Pipe Size, Contents, Pipe Materials, and/or pipe insulation (if none came over in the data from CADPIPE). Be sure to press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated throughout the piping model. If the contents or the pipe insulation varies throughout the piping system, then you must go to each pipe segment where the changes occur and enter/ripple the proper values.




l) Click on the CODE COMPLIANCE tab. No code compliance data will be brought over from the data conversion. The User may enter the desired data. Once the data is entered, press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated through the piping model.

m) Looking at the graphics model of the piping system, there may be some Valves that have distance and appear to be OK. But you must


418

look at all Valves. All valves come across as user-specified because the length was input. All Valve data will not transfer across. And if it did, you as the Stress Analysis cannot be sure that the CAD personnel have added the Valve data correctly. For example look at the screen capture below and see that the Weights are missing. This is common since the weights of valves are not always readily available. And Operator weight as well. Also note that the Class did not come across. Double-check that as well.

Figure 3.5.6-1 Importing CADPipe



8) Execute the analysis by either of the following methods:




419

3.5.7 Import CALMA V Input File

This procedure enables the User to define all data required to import a CALMA file.

(*.CLM) CALMA Format Example of CALMA (*.CLM) Import. Importing CALMA (*.CLM) File, Editing the Resulting Data & Processing the Analysis Using TRIFLEXWindows




4. Click on CALMA

Locate the path where CALMA files (*.CLM) reside.

Select and view the (*. CLM) file.









420



h) Click on the PIPE PROPERTIES tab. Check the data. Enter Pipe Size, Contents, Pipe Materials, and/or pipe insulation (if none came over in the data from CALMA). Be sure to press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated throughout the piping model. If the contents or the pipe insulation varies throughout the piping system, then you must go to each pipe segment where the changes occur and enter/ripple the proper values.




l) Click on the CODE COMPLIANCE tab. No code compliance data will be brought over from the data conversion. The User may enter the desired data. Once the data is entered, press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated through the piping model.

m) Looking at the graphics model of the piping system, there may be some Valves that have distance and appear to be OK. But you must look at all Valves. All valves come across as user-specified because the length was input. All Valve data will not transfer across. And if it did, you as the Stress Analysis cannot be sure that the CAD personnel


421

have added the Valve data correctly. For example look at the screen capture below and see that the Weights are missing. This is common since the weights of valves are not always readily available. And Operator weight as well. Also note that the Class did not come across. Double-check that as well.

Figure 3.5.7-1 Importing CALMA







422

3.5.8 Import CATIA IV, STEP AP 227

STEP AP227 to TRIFLEX Converter

I. Introduction

TRIFLEX is a piping stress analysis program written and maintained by PipingSolutions, Inc., Houston, Texas. In order to process files created by CATIA IV, as implemented and utilized by companies using CATIA IV, a conversion routine was written by PipingSolutions, accepting as input the STEP (ISO-10303) Application Protocol 227 files created by CATIA, and producing as output, a TRIFLEX neutral file. The TRIFLEX neutral file, or IN file, can then be imported into TRIFLEX, bringing in geometrical attributes suitable for processing.

II. Converter Operation

Figure 3.5.8-1 STEP Converter Main Dialog

Double clicking on the STEP Converter Icon brings up the screen as shown in Figure 1. To start, click on the ‘Click Here to Begin’ button in the center of the dialog. The following Windows standard file dialog appears (Figure 2). Select the STEP text file to be converted and press OPEN. The STEP file should be a standard ISO-10303 data file as detailed in ISO-10303, AP 11. At present, compressed format and short entity names are not accepted. By default, the STEP file should have extensions of *.STP or *.STEP. Alternatively *.TXT may be used.


423

After selecting the file to be converted, and pressing ‘OPEN’, another standard file dialog appears asking for the file name in which the conversion is to be stored. This file must have extension *.IN. By default, a file with the same base name as the STEP file and the proper extension is suggested by the dialog. To use this name, press ‘SAVE’.

Figure 3.5.8-2 Selection of CATIA STEP File

Figure 3.5.8-3 Selection of TRIFLEX *.IN File

Depending on the speed and capability of the computer and the size of the CATIA piping model several seconds may elapse after which the opening screen (Figure 1) will reappear. If you have more files to convert, you may press the ‘Click Here to Begin’ button once more, to repeat the process or, if you are through, press the ‘Finish’ button. A file has been created in the selected folder with the selected name capable of being imported into TRIFLEX.


424

In order to get the file into TRIFLEX, start the TRIFLEX program. When the opening screen is present, Select from the Main Menu, UTILITIES/IMPORT FILES/TRIFLEX KEYWORD (See Figure 3.5.9-4).

Figure 3.5.8-4 TRIFLEX Import Dialog

Again a standard Windows file dialog will appear, requesting the selection of the *.IN file to be imported into TRIFLEX. After selecting the file, pressing ‘OPEN’, and waiting a few seconds for processing, a graphical representation of the piping system as originally input into CATIA will appear in TRIFLEX. At this point, the user may make necessary changes to the TRIFLEX components, set up Process, Code Compliance, and Case Definitions and perform a stress analysis. Reference the TRIFLEX Manual for details.

III. Security

The STEP Converter program is tied into the TRIFLEXWindows security system. In order to run the software, TRIFLEXWindows version 2.2.0 or later must be installed on the machine and a valid activator setup, local or network, found and validated. Further, evaluation versions of PipingSolutions’ software are time limited independently of the TRIFLEXWindows activator setup to ensure that only the latest versions of the software are available and run.


425

IV. Limitations, Rules, and Caveats

There are several restrictions that should be noted and observed when using the STEPConverter.

1. Only ‘Long Form’ Step files are permissible.

2. It is assumed that each component in the STEP file is defined by an entry under PIPING_COMPONENT_DEFINITION entity with a ‘#5’ in the fifth field. Further the type of component is fully contained in the DESCRIPTIVE_REPRESENTATION_ITEM/part name entity and it is one of the following:

BRANCH NAMES

TEE

BOSS

TEE REDUCING

LATERAL

LATERAL REDUCING

CROSS

CROSS REDUCING

WELDED LATROLET STANDARD WEIGHT

WELDED LATROLET DOUBLE EXTRA STRONG

SOCKET WELD LATROLET

THREADED LATROLET

SOCKET WELD OLET

THREADED OLET

WELDED OLET

WELDED ELBOWLET DOUBLE EXTRA STRONG

SOCKET WELD ELBOWLET

THREADED ELBOWLET


426

NIPOLET 3 1/2"

NIPOLET 4 1/2"

NIPOLET 5 1/2"

NIPOLET 6 1/2"

WYE

HALF COUPLING

THERMAL SLEEVE

FLANGE NAMES

FLANGE BLIND

FLANGE FOUNDATION

FLANGE LAP

FLANGE ORIFICE

FLANGE SILBRAZED

FLANGE SLIP ON

FLANGE SLIP ON REDUCING

FLANGE SOCKETWELD

FLANGE SOCKETWELD REDUCING

FLANGE SPECTACLE

FLANGE THREADED

FLANGE THREADED REDUCING

FLANGE WELDNECK

FLANGE WELDNECK LONG

FLANGE WELDNECK REDUCING

ELBOW NAMES

MITER ELBOW

ELBOW 45 LONG RADIUS


427

ELBOW 45 SHORT RADIUS

ELBOW 45 LONG TANGENT

ELBOW 45 SHORT TURN

ELBOW 45 BELL END LONG RADIUS

ELBOW 45 BELL END LONG TANGENT

ELBOW 45 STREET

ELBOW 90

ELBOW 90 REDUCING

ELBOW 90 SHORT RADIUS

ELBOW 90 LONG RADIUS

ELBOW 90 SHORT TURN

ELBOW 90 LONG TURN

ELBOW 90 BELL END SHORT RADIUS

ELBOW 90 BELL END LONG RADIUS

ELBOW 90 BELL END LONG TANGENT

ELBOW 90 STREET LONG RADIUS

ELBOW 90 STREET SHORT RADIUS

RETURN BEND LONG RADIUS

RETURN BEND SHORT RADIUS

ADAPTOR

BELLMOUTH

BOSS ORIFICE

BUSHING

BUSH-FLUSH

BUSHING REDUCING


428

CAP

COUPLING

COUPLING-REDUCING

EXPANSION JOINT

CLOSURE FITTING

BULKHEAD PENETRATION

INSERT

NIPPLE

ORIFICE

PLUG

REDUCER CONCENTRIC

REDUCER ECCENTRIC

SLEEVE

SPOOL PIECE

STUB END

SWAGE CONCENTRIC

SWAGE ECCENTRIC

TAIL PIECE

THEMAL SLEEVE

UNION

UNION NUT

UNION ASSEMBLY

GASKET NAMES

GASKET

GASKET RASIED FACE FLANGES

GASKET FLAT FACE FLANGES


429

MISC

BLANK FLANGE COVER

FILTER

FLOW VENTURI

GAGE

ORIFICE PLATE

SEA CHEST

SPACER

BLIND FLANGE.SPECTACLE

SPECIALTY ITEM 1

SPECIALTY ITEM 2

SPLASH PLATE

STRAINER BASKET TYPE

STRIANER CONICAL

STRAINER T TYPE

STRAINER Y TYPE

SUCTION

STEAM TRAP BUCKET TYPE

PIPE

TUBE

VALVES

BALL

BALL.STRAIGHT.2-WAY

BALL3-WAY

BUTTERFLY.HIGHPERFORMANCE


430

CHECK

CHECK.LIFT

CHECK.PISTON

CHECK.STOP

STOP CHECK.ANGLE

CHECK.SWING

CHECK.WAFER

CHECK.UNION END

CONTROL.FLOW

CONTROL.ACTUATOR OPERATED

CONTROL.MANUAL.PILOT OPERATED

CONTROL.SOLENOIDOPERATED.2-WAY

CONTROL.SOLENOIDOPERATED.3-WAY

DUO-CHECK.WAFER

DIAPHRAGM

DIAPHRAGM.HANDWHEEL

FLOAT

GATE

GATE.CONTROL

GATE.DIAPHRAGM CONTROL

GATE.UNION END

GLOBE HOSE

GLOBE UNION END

GLOBE

GLOBE AIR OPERATED

GLOBE ANGLE

GLOBE ANGLE CAPPED

GLOBE.CONTROL


431

GLOBE.CAPPED

GLOBE.DIAPHRAGM CONTROL

GLOBE.NEEDLE

GLOBE.SOLENOID

GLOBE.STOP CHECK

GLOBE.STOP

GLOBE.UNCAPPED

GLOBE.Y-PATTERN.STOP

Y-PATTERN.GLOBE.HANDWHEEL

NEEDLE

PLUG

PLUG.LEVER

PLUG-3-WAY

PLUG-3-WAY.LEVER

PLUG-4-WAY

PLUG-4-WAY.LEVER

PRESSURE REDUCING

PRESSURE RELIEF

PRESSURE REGULATING

PRESSURE SAFETY

RELIEF

RELIEF ANGLE

RELIEF.DIRECT SPRING.ANGLE

ROTARY.TRIPLE OFFSET(VANESSA)

RELIEF.PILOT ACTUATED.ANGLE

SOLENOID

TEMPERATURE REGULATING

VENT AND DRAIN


432

3. The material used for the component is contained in the DESCRIPTIVE_REPRESENTATION_ITEM/material category entity and it is one of the following:

ALUMINUM

NAVAL BRASS

BUNA-N

BRASS

BRONZE

CHROMOLY-STEEL

CARBON STEEL

COPPER

CUNI 70:30

CUNI 80:20

CUNI 90:10

ETHYLENE PROPYLENE

CAST IRON

FIBERGLASS

FLOUROCARBON

GUN METAL

GALVANIZED STEEL

GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC

ALLOY 625

NICRFE ALLOY 600

K-MONEL

NICKEL-ALUMINUM-BRONZE

NICKEL-COPPER


433

NYLON

NEOPRENE

PLASTIC

PVC

RUBBER

SYNTHETIC RUBBER

CRES 304

CRES 304L

CRES 305

CRES 316

CRES 316L

TITANIUM

VARIOUS

VALVE BRONZE

4. Relevant information regarding the component is contained in the DESCRIPTIVE_REPRESENTATION_ITEM/ pipe nominal OD and DESCRIPTIVE_REPRESENTATION_ITEM/ schedule entities.

5. All connections to the component are contained in the CARTESIAN_POINT/connect point and DIRECTION entities associated with the component definition.

6. Every connection between two or more components is delineated in a PLANT_ITEM_CONNECTION entity with an appropriate back reference to the nodes being connected.

7. The unit system used by the STEP file has all length dimensions in millimeters.

8. The unit system used by the converted IN file, will result in USCS units with length given in feet, Diameter and thickness dimensions in inches.

9. The STEPConverter only attempts to recreate the geometrical data in the original STEP file from CATIA. This implies that components (or representations of components) and their connectivity are brought into TRIFLEX.


434

10. TRIFLEX *.IN files have a limited scope in representing a piping model, therefore, when necessary, the closest representation possible is made. TRIFLEX *.IN files have no means of handling a variety of the component types given in item #2 and those which can be represented quite often will not be represented properly in the graphical rendition because of the type of component. At present, for example, TRIFLEX has no way of modeling a CAP. Instead a RIGID JOINT is inserted into the TRIFLEX model. Also, there is no provision within the *.IN file to differentiate between various types of valves, flanges, or reducers. The default type is used in these cases. The user may go into the TRIFLEX dialog for the component and either replace it with a component more suitable for the task, or change the description parameters in order to achieve a better graphical representation of the piping model. The model as imported and modified with process data, should, however, yield an acceptable stress analysis. It is highly recommended that the user go through each component contained in the converted file to assess the accuracy and suitability of the modeling parameters assigned by the conversion process before relying upon the results of the analysis, however.

V. Troubleshooting

Occasionally, a particular file may not convert properly. TRIFLEX may respond with an error message or by simply not displaying the graphical representation of the piping system and giving no error message. In such a situation the user should attempt to find a file by the name of BASENAME.log in the folder containing the *.IN file where BASENAME is the same as the root of *.IN file. Opening this file with NOTEPAD.EXE will often reveal the error location. In addition there are two files, Tempfile1.temp and Tempfile2.temp, which are produced during the conversion and may lead to the error location. These two files are overwritten whenever a new conversion is done, so in order to inspect the appropriate files, do only the erroneous conversion and then press the ‘Finish’ button on the Converter’s main dialog. Should an error message be presented, the TRIFLEX location of the problem can be determined. Tempfile1 and Tempfile2 will then allow the tracing of the error back to a particular record in the STEP file.


435

3.5.9 Import an Intergraph PDS Neutral File into TRIFLEX®Windows

Importing an Intergraph PDS Neutral File, Editing the Resulting Data and Processing an Analysis Using TRIFLEX

1. Start up TRIFLEX®Windows



4. Click on PDS IMPORT SETTINGS

Figure 3.5.9-1 PDS Import 5. Click on UTILITIES


7. Click on PDS FILES

8. Locate the path where PDS Neutral files (*.NEU) or (*.N) reside. In the standard TRIFLEX® Windows, examples of PDS Neutral files reside under the following path:

c:\Program Files\PipingSolutions\TRIFLEXWindows\Samples

\PDS Files

Select the (*.NEU) or (*.N) file, which should be viewed.

a. Enter Starting Node Number.

b. Enter Node Increment.

c. Select the X-axis orientation

d. Flanged or Welded Valve

e. Valve type

f. Valve rating.

g. Flange type

h. Flange rating

i. Click OK


436

9. The piping model will be displayed on the screen. In many piping models imported from PDS, the coordinates of the piping system will cause the piping model to appear very distant. Often it will only be represented on the screen with a spec that is barely visible. To identify the location of the piping model , do the following:

a) Click on the NODE LABELS button on the Graphics Toolbar. The spec should then be visible with a group of tightly displayed node numbers.

b) Click on the ZOOM button on the Graphics Toolbar. Then place the cursor near the tightly displayed node numbers, press the left mouse button and drag the cursor to make a box around the tightly displayed node numbers. When the mouse left button is released, TRIFLEX® will re-display the piping model in the window in a larger size. Perform this operation several times until the piping system is the desired size.

10. In Graphic Mode (a hand will show for the cursor when placed in the viewing area), click on the ZOOM POINT button (6th button down) on the Graphics Toolbar. Then place the target on the piping model at the point on the model to be the center point for rotation of the piping system on the screen and then click the left mouse button. TRIFLEX® will bring the selected point in the piping system into the center of the screen and will zoom out on it.

11. When the desired view of the piping system is achieved, click on the Add View (V+) button on the Graphics Toolbar. This will set this new view of the piping model as the New Viewing Position for the piping model.

12. To Recall the View previously Set. Click on the Recall View (VR) button on the Graphics Toolbar.

13. At this point, the User needs to review the data and add data as found to be necessary.


b) Click on SETUP, then on INPUT UNITS and select the desired System of Units.

c) Click on SETUP, then on OUTPUT UNITS and select the desired System of Units.

d) Click on SETUP, then on MODELING DEFAULTS and enter the desired data.


437

e) Click on SETUP, then on CASE DEFINITION and select the desired analysis conditions.

f) Click on WORKSHEET button on the Main Menu bar. The work sheet will then be displayed for the User to review the data.

g) Scroll to the top of the spreadsheet and double click on the word ANCHOR on the first line. The Anchor dialog will then be displayed. Notice that the Anchor flexibility is defined as totally Rigid. Click on the Totally Rigid radio button.

h) Click on the INITIAL MVTS/ROTS tab. Enter any desired anchor movements and rotations.

i) Click on the PIPE PROPERTIES tab. Check the data. Enter contents properties and or pipe insulation,(if none came over in the data from PDS). Be sure to press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated through the piping model. If the contents or the pipe insulation varies throughout the piping system, then you must go to each pipe segment where the changes occur and enter/ripple the proper values.

j) Click on the PROCESS tab. Check the data. Enter the pressure and temperature values, if the displayed values are not the desired values. If a code compliance analysis is to be processed, then the USE INSTALLED MODULUS radio button is to be selected (default). If the User expects to process a rotating equipment analysis or simply wishes to see the true movements at operating conditions, then the USE OPERATING MODULUS radio button should be selected. If the pressure and/or temperature varies throughout the piping system, then the User must go to each pipe segment where the changes occur and enter/ripple the proper values.

k) Click on the WIND LOADS tab. No wind load data will be brought over from PDS in the data conversion. The User may enter the desired data. Once the data is entered, press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated through the piping model.

l) Click on the SOIL LOADS tab. No soil load data will be brought over from PDS in the data conversion. The User may enter the desired data. Once the data is entered, press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated through the piping model.


438

m) Click on the CODE COMPLIANCE tab. No code compliance data will be brought over from PDS in the data conversion. The User may enter the desired data. Once the data is entered, press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated through the piping model.

n) Looking at the graphics model of the piping system, there may be some Valves that have distance and appear to be OK. But you must look at all Valves. All valves come across as user-specified because the length was input. All Valve data will not transfer across. And if it did, you as the Stress Analysis cannot be sure that the CAD personnel have added the Valve data correctly. For example look at the screen capture below and see that the Weights are missing. This is common since the weights of valves are not always readily available. And Operator weight as well. Also note that the Class did not come across. Double-check that as well.

Figure 3.5.9-2 PDS Import

o) Looking at the graphics model of the piping system, there may be some flanges that are facing forward when they should be facing backward. Double click on each flange and place a check mark in the check box in the field labeled “FLANGE IS FACING BACKWARD” which can be found in the middle of the Flange dialog. Also as previously mentioned double check the weight of the flange, and class as well.

p) Scan the balance of the data to insure that it is correct. Make any of the desired changes and process the analysis.



439




440

New Example of Intergraph PDS Import.

Importing an Intergraph PDS Neutral File, Editing the Resulting Data & Processing the Analysis Using TRIFLEXWindows

1. 1.Start up TRIFLEXWindows



4. Click on PDS IMPORT SETTINGS

a. Enter the Starting Node Number

b. Enter the Node Increment

c. Select the X-Axis Orientation from the pull down menu provided in this field

d. Click on the OK button



7. Click on PDS FILES

8. Locate the path where PDS Neutral files (*.NEU or *.N) reside. In the TRIFLEXWindows, PDS Neutral files reside under the following path:

C:\Program Files\PipingSolutions\TRIFLEXWindows\Samples\PSDExamples

Select and view the (*. NEU or *.N) file.

9. The piping model will be displayed on the screen. In many piping models imported from PDS, the coordinates of the piping system will cause the piping model to appear very distant. Often it will only be represented on the screen with a speck that is barely visible. To identify the location of the piping model, do the following:

a) Click on the NODE LABELS button (9th button down) on the Graphics Toolbar. The speck should then be visible with a group of tightly displayed node numbers.


441

b) Click on the ZOOM button (15th button down or the last button) on the Graphics Toolbar. Then place the cursor near the tightly displayed node numbers, press the left mouse button and drag the cursor to make a box around the tightly displayed node numbers. When the left mouse button is released, TRIFLEX will re-display the piping model in the window in a larger size. Perform this operation several times until the piping system is the desired size.

10. In Graphic Mode (a hand will show for the cursor), click on the ZOOM POINT button (14th button down) on the Graphics Toolbar. Then place the target on the piping model at the point on the model to be the center point for rotation of the piping system on the screen and then click the left mouse button. TRIFLEX will bring the selected point in the piping system into the center of the screen and will zoom in on it.



a. Click on SETUP, then on PROJECT and enter the desired data.

b. Click on SETUP, then on OUTPUT UNITS and select the desired System of Units.

c. Click on SETUP, then on MODELING DEFAULTS and enter the desired data.

d. Click on SETUP, then on CASE DEFINITION and select the desired analysis conditions.

e. Click on the WORKSHEET button on the Main Menu bar. The worksheet will then be displayed for the User to review the data.

f. Scroll to the top of the spreadsheet and double click on the word ANCHOR on the first line. The Anchor dialog will then be displayed. Notice that the Anchor flexibility is defined as totally free. Click on the Totally Rigid radio button.

g. Click on the INITIAL MVTS/ROTS tab. Enter any desired anchor movements and rotations.

h. Click on the PIPE PROPERTIES tab. Check the data. Enter Pipe Size, Contents, Pipe Materials, and/or pipe insulation (if none came over in the data from PDS). Be sure to press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated throughout the piping model. If the contents or the pipe


442

insulation varies throughout the piping system, then you must go to each pipe segment where the changes occur and enter/ripple the proper values.

i. Click on the PROCESS tab. Check the data. Enter the pressure and temperature values, if the displayed values are not the desired values. If a code compliance analysis is to be processed, then the USE INSTALLED MODULUS radio button is to be selected (default). If the User expects to process a rotating equipment analysis or simply wishes to see the true movements at operating conditions, then the USE OPERATING MODULUS radio button should be selected. If the pressure and/or temperature varies throughout the piping system, then the User must go to each pipe segment where the changes occur and enter/ripple the proper values.

j. Click on the WIND LOADS tab. No wind load data will be brought over from PDS in the data conversion. The User may enter the desired data. Once the data is entered, press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated throughout the piping model.

k. Click on the SOIL LOADS tab. No soil load data will be brought over from PDS in the data conversion. The User may enter the desired data. Once the data is entered, press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated through the piping model.

l. Click on the CODE COMPLIANCE tab. No code compliance data will be brought over from PDS in the data conversion. The User may enter the desired data. Once the data is entered, press RIPPLE so that the entered data will be propagated through the piping model.

m. Looking at the graphics model of the piping system, there may be some Valves that have distance and appear to be OK. But you must look at all Valves. All valves come across as user-specified because the length was input. All Valve data will not transfer across. And if it did, you as the Stress Analysis cannot be sure that the CAD personnel have added the Valve data correctly. For example look at the screen capture below and see that the Weights are missing. This is common since the weights of valves are not always readily available. And Operator weight as well. Also note that the Class did not come across. Double-check that as well.


443

Figure 3.5.9-3 PDS Import

n. Looking at the graphics model of the piping system, there may be some flanges that are facing forward when they should be facing backward. Double click on each flange and place a check mark in the check box in the field labeled “FLANGE IS FACING BACKWARD” which can be found in the middle of the Flange dialog. Also as previously mentioned double check the weight of the flange, and class as well.

o. Scan the balance of the data to insure that it is correct. Make any of the desired changes and process the ana lysis.




Intergraph is a registered trademark and PDS is trademark of Intergraph Corporation. Plant Design System (PDS) is an Intergraph software product. TRIFLEXWindows is a registered trademark and product of PipingSolutions, Inc.


444

3.5.9.1 Generating a Stress Neutral File for PDS

Note: This Procedure is from Intergraph’s reference guide.

Before Using This Command you must have access to an existing PDS Piping Model containing a completed pipeline.

Operating Sequence

1. Enter PDS from either the Shortcut to pds icon or from Start, Programs, PD_SHELL

2. Select Project Number Select the PDS project from which the neutral file will be generated. Select the Pipe Stress Analysis button. The system will display the Plant Design – Stress Analysis form.

3. Enter 3-D Model Number(s) Select a Model No field and key in a valid model number. Do not key in the .dgn filename. The software checks the model number for validity and either accepts the entry and moves the cursor to the next Model No field or displays an error message in the message field.

4. Select the Pipeline Names field adjacent to the Model No field selected in the previous step and key in a valid pipeline name. The software accepts the entry and moves to the next Pipeline Names field.

5. Select the Stress Output Node: Path field and key in the desired location of the neutral file.

6. Select the Stress Defaults File field and key in the location of the defaults file. Note: There are 2 defaults files delivered with PDS, defaults.dat and triflex.dat These files are located in the product directory C:\win32app\ingr\PDSTRESS\dat


445

7. Select the Confirm button to accept the data displayed on the form and begin generating the neutral file. The system displays the message "Creating Neutral File" When the neutral file generation is completed, the system displays a status form. The status form displays any processing information, warning messages and/or error messages that occur during the generating process. Use the scroll bar and buttons to scroll through the information displayed on the status screen. Refer to the section Warning and Error Messages for detailed descriptions of each warning and error message.

Refer to PDS Stress Analysis Interface (PD_STRESS) Reference Guide DEA503920 for information not covered in this write up


446

Generating a Stress Neutral File for PDS

This section describes how to generate neutral files interactively.

NOTE: Operating System = NT40.

Before Using This Command

You must have access to an existing PDS Piping Model containing a completed pipeline.

Operating Sequence

1. Enter PDS from either the Shortcut to PDS icon or from Start, Programs, PD_SHELL.

2. Select a Project Number.

3. Select the PDS project from which the neutral file will be generated.

4. Select the Pipe Stress Analysis button.

The system will display the Plant Design – Stress Analysis form.

5. Enter 3-D Model Number(s).

Select a Model No field and key in a valid model number. Do not key in the .dgn filename.

The software checks the model number for validity and either accepts the entry and moves the cursor to the next Model No field, or displays an error message in the message field.

6. Select the Pipeline Names field adjacent to the Model No field selected in the previous step and key in a valid pipeline name.

The software accepts the entry and moves to the next Pipeline Names field.

7. Select the Stress Output Node: Path field and input the desired location of the neutral file.

8. Select the Stress Defaults File field and input the location of the defaults file.

Note: There are 2 defaults files delivered with PDS: defaults.dat and triflex.dat. These files are located in the product directory :\win32app\ingr\PDSTRESS\dat.


447

9. Select the Confirm button: This will accept the data displayed on the form and begin generating the neutral file.

The system displays the message:

Creating Neutral File

When the neutral file generation is completed, the system displays a status form.

The status form displays any processing information, warning messages and/or error messages that occur during the neutral file generating process. Use the scroll bar and buttons to scroll through the information displayed on the status screen. For detailed descriptions of each warning and error message, refer to the Warning & Error messages which appear in the manual.

For information not covered in this procedure, refer to the Intergraph document named PDS Stress Analysis Interface (PD_STRESS) Reference Guide (DPDS3-P3-200025A).

Intergraph is a registered trademark and PDS is trademark of Intergraph Corporation. Plant Design System (PDS) is an Intergraph software product.


448

3.6 Export Interfaces

Import/Export Capabilities

TRIFLEX® Windows can import and export old TRIFLEX® DOS keyword and job files.

TRIFLEX® Windows has multiple export interfaces (see table below).

Figure 3.6.0-1 Exporting Interfaces

EXPORT FILES SUB MENU DESCRIPTION

TRIFLEX Keyword Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a TRIFLEX Keyword File.

(*.IN) TRIFLEX Keyword Format

isoOut File Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to an ISO Out File

(*.iOUT) isoOut Format

3D DXF Generates a DXF with an isometric drawing.

(*.dxf) 3D.dxf Format


449

ANY SYSTEM

JPEG File Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a JPEG File.

(*.jpg) JPEG Format

Bitmap File Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a Bitmap File.

(*.bmp) Bitmap Format

HPGL File Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a HPGL File.

(*.hgl) HPGL Format

PostScript File Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a PostScript File

(*.eps) PostScript Format

Export Spreadsheet Data to HTML / XLS / TXT

Enables the User to export various spreadsheets such as, XLS Files, HTML Files, and TAB-delimited Files

relief + Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a SchmArt Database File.

(*.mdb) SchmArt Database Format


450

3.6.1 Export a TRIFLEX Keyword file

Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a TRIFLEX® Keyword File.

(*.IN) TRIFLEX® Keyword Format

1. While in TRIFLEXWindows (you have just finished and are in Graphics mode)


3. Click on Export Files

4. Click on TRIFLEX Keyword

5. Locate the folder where you want to store your TRIFLEX Keyword file (*.in). Using TRIFLEX Windows, the Samples file folder is shown as an example.

C:\Program Files\PipingSolutions\TRIFLEXWindows\Samples\

Figure 3.6.1-1 TRIFLEX Keyword Export

Note: When you SAVE a TRIFLEX model a “*.DTA” file is saved; and a “*.RES” folder is created. Within the “*.RES” folder there exists a folder called “1” (or case 1). Within the “1” folder you will find the “*.IN” fo lder.


451

3.6.2 Export an isoOUT file

Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to an ISO Out File

(*.iOUT) isoOut Format Format of “Smart Stress Iso” by Nor-Par Online




4. Click on isoOut File

5. Locate the folder where you want to store your isoOut file (*.iOUT). In TRIFLEX Windows, the Samples file folder is shown as an example.


Figure 3.6.2-1 Export a isoOut file

Note: You can use any “File name”.

6. Now, we have successfully Exported an Interface with “Smart Stress Iso”.


452

3.6.3 Export a 3D DXF file

Follow each Figure below to Export a 3D dxf file to AutoCAD. Any program that uses the DXF format can read this file.

Figure 3.6.3-1 Export a 3D dxf file screen



453



Record these values for future use.

Node Number Font Size, and Dimension for Font Size.


454

Figure 3.6.3-5 Check the color of each Layer in AutoCAD

Figure 3.6.3-6 Make sure all Layers in AutoCAD are Black or 250.


455


Then is should look like Figure 3.6.3-7 shown.

If your result in AutoCAD is not to your liking, you will need to return to TRIFLEX and Export a 3D DXF file again. This time you will want to change the values shown in Figure 3.6.3-3; that is the “Node Number for Font Size”, and “Dimension for Font Size”. These values you “recorded for future use”.

Then is should look like Figure 3.6.3-7 shown.


456

3.6.4 Export a JPEG file

Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a JPEG File. (Commonly used with Digital Photographs)

(*.jpg) JPEG Format




10. Click on JPEG File

11. Locate the folder where you want to store your JPEG file (*.jpg). In TRIFLEX Windows, the Samples file folder is shown as an example.


Figure 3.6.4-1 Export a JPEG file screen


457

12. Next the JPEG Image Options dialog box will appear. You can decide the Image Resolution, and the Image Quality level you want.

Figure 3.6.4-2 Export a JPEG file screen

Guidelines on Resolution from JPEG 2000 • Digital Camera

Resolution: 8192 x 8192 Pixels. (e.g. 4096 x 3112 Pixels from 35 mm film scans)

• Printing and Scanning (dots per inch means Pixels per inch)

Resolution: 4800 x 1200 dpi (High Quality Printer)

Resolution: 600 x 600 dpi (Low Quality Printer) • TRIFLEX default

Resolution: 690 x 432 Pixels

Image Quality Level: 7

A suggestion is warranted here. Larger Resolution means Larger File Sizes.


458

3.6.5 Export a BITMAP file

Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a Bitmap File. (Commonly used with Paint type programs)

(*.bmp) Bitmap Format




4. Click on Bitmap File

5. Locate the folder where you want to store your Bitmap file (*.bmp). In TRIFLEX Windows, the Samples file folder is shown as an example.


Figure 3.6.5-1 Export a Bitmap file screen


459

6. Next the Bitmap image resolution dialog box will appear. You can decide the Image resolution, and the Estimated file size you want.

Figure 3.6.5-2 Export a Bitmap file screen

Guidelines on Resolution from JPEG 2000 • Digital Camera

Resolution: 8192 x 8192 Pixels. (e.g. 4096 x 3112 Pixels from 35 mm film scans)

• Printing and Scanning (dots per inch means Pixels per inch)

Resolution: 4800 x 1200 dpi (High Quality Printer)

Resolution: 600 x 600 dpi (Low Quality Printer) • TRIFLEX default

Resolution: 1024 x 768 Pixels

Estimated file size: 2.25 Mb

A suggestion is warranted here. Larger Resolution means Larger File Sizes.


460

3.6.6 Export a HPGL file

Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a HPGL File. (Hewlett Packard Graphics Language)

(*.hgl) HPGL Format




4. Click on HPGL File

5. Locate the folder where you want to store your HPGL file (*.hgl). In TRIFLEX Windows, the Samples file folder is shown as an example.


Figure 3.6.6-1 Export a HPGL file screen


461

3.6.7 Export a PostScript file

Enables the User to define all data required to export the current project to a PostScript File (Adobe PostScript is a Font type)

(*.eps) PostScript Format (Encapsulated PostScript)




4. Click on PostScript File

5. Locate the folder where you want to store your PostScript file (*.eps). In TRIFLEX Windows, the Samples file folder is shown as an example.


Figure 3.6.7-1 Export a PostScript file screen


462

3.6.8 Export a SpreadSheet

3.6.8.1 Export to Excel

Follow each Figure below to Export a SpreadSheet into an Excel file.

Figure 3.6.8-1 Export a Spreadsheet screen

Note: Here I am Exporting the Exact (Full spreadsheet) viewed in TRIFLEX. The user could select certain sections to copy and paste into Excel if the user required this. This approach is used in creating specialty reports for clients.

Contact PipingSolutions staff for details on Specialty Reports created from TRIFLEX input and output.


463




464

Figure 3.6.8-4 Export a SpreadSheet screen


465

3.6.8.2 Export to TXT File

Note: it is recommended that you use a Font: “Courier New”, Size: “9” for a Portrait size page.

Follow each Figure below to Export a SpreadSheet into a TXT File or Word file.

Figure 3.6.8.2-1 Export a SpreadSheet screen


466




467


The circled items show the “Courier New” font and Font size of “9” as previously mentioned.


468

3.7 Data Bases

3.7.1 Generic Pipe Database

Figure 3.7.1-1 Pipe Database The Generic Pipe Database can be Changed or Updated. But the ASME Database for B31.1, B31.3 cannot be changed by the User. The basic function of this database dialog box is to enable the User to browse through all the records in the Pipe Database. Depending upon the different standards that can be selected by the User, the Physical Properties are shown in a given set of units.

Note: Like all databases within TRIFLEX, TRIFLEX’s Standard Pipe Database should not be changed by the User due to the risk of potential loss of valuable information.


469

Other databases within TRIFLEX include: Pipe database, Material database, Insulation database, Fiberglass or FRP database, Valve database, Flange database, Pressure Relief Valve database, Structural Steel database. Nominal Diameter: {Enter Text} Pipe O.D.: {Enter Text}

Physical Data------------------------------

Iron Pipe Size: {Enter Text}

Schedule No.: {Enter Text}

Stainless Steel Schedule No.: {Enter Text}

Wall: {Enter Text}

First, Last, Previous, Next Buttons: {Enter Text}

New,

Delete,

Save

Buttons:


470

3.7.2 Flange Database

Figure 3.7.2-1 Flange Database

Figure 3.7.2-2 Flange Database The basic function of this database dialog box is to allow the User to browse through the Flange Database. After choosing the flange type, pipe size, and pressure class, all records can be accessed.


471

Note: Like all databases within TRILFEX, TRIFLEX’s Standard Flange Database should not be changed by the User due to the risk of potential loss of valuable information.

Other databases within TRIFLEX include: Pipe database, Material database, Insulation database, Fiberglass or FRP database, Valve database, Flange database, Pressure Relief Valve database, Structural Steel database.

Pipe Size: Nominal Pipe Size Pressure Class: 75, 150, 300, 400, 600, 1500, or 2500 Manufacturer: AAAT Std. Flange, Blind Flange, Lap Joint Flange, Slip On Flange, Weld Neck Flange, User-Specified Query Database Button: When pressed this will tell you if there is such a recode in the Flange Database. If there is NOT then you will see the following message. “There is no such record in flange database!” Weight: Very Important. You need the weight and length for a flange. If you do not have this information, then this is where you add the weight of the particular flange you need to use in the analysis. Length: Very Important. You need the weight and length for a flange. If you do not have this information, then this is where you add the length of the particular flange you need to use in the analysis. New, Delete, Save Buttons: New starts a NEW flange. Delete will DELETE a particular flange. Save will SAVE what you have done. Whether it was a new addition or a deletion.


472

3.7.3 Valve Data Base

Figure 3.7.3.0-1 Valve Database

3.7.3.1 Build your Companies Valve Database

Figure 3.7.3.1-1 Valve Database The basic function of this database dialog box is to allow the User to browse through the valve database after choosing Type, Size, and Rating. Like other databases, TRIFLEX’s Standard Value Database should not be changed by the User due to the risk for loss of valuable information.


473

Note: Like all databases within TRILFEX, TRIFLEX’s Standard Valve Database should not be changed by the User due to the risk of potential loss of valuable information.


In addition when the User specifies a valve type, then this selection should be carried forward for all the subsequent valves, unless the User enters a different valve type. Pipe Size: Nominal Pipe Size Pressure Class: 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500 Manufacturer: Flanged AAAT Std. Valve Flanged Check Valve Flanged Gate Valve Flanged Globe Valve Welded AAAT Std. Valve Welded Check Valve Welded Gate Valve Welded Globe Valve Query Database Button: When pressed this will tell you if there is such a record in the Valve Database. If there is NOT then you will see the following message. “There is no such record in Valve database!” Type: Flanged Valve or Welded Valve. Insulation: Thickness (in inches) of insulation around the Valve. Length: Very Important. You need the weight and length for a Valve. If you do not have this information, then this is where you add the length of the particular Valve you need to use in the analysis. Weight: Very Important. You need the weight and length for a Valve. If you do not have this information, then this is where you add the weight of the particular Valve you need to use in the analysis.


474

New, Delete, Save Buttons: New starts a NEW valve. Delete will DELETE a particular valve. Save will SAVE what you have done. Whether it was a new addition or a deletion.


475

3.7.4 Pressure Relief Valve Database

Figure 3.7.4-1 Pressure Relief Valve Database

Figure 3.7.4-2 Pressure Relief Valve Database The basic function of this database dialog box is to allow the User to browse through the pressure relief valve database after choosing Inlet Nominal, Exit Nominal Diameter, Orifice Area, Pressure, and Type. Like other databases, TRIFLEX’s Pressure Relief Value Database should not be changed by the User due to the risk for loss of valuable information.


476

Note: Like all databases within TRILFEX, TRIFLEX’s Standard Valve Database should not be changed by the User due to the risk of potential loss of valuable information.

Other databases within TRIFLEX include: Pipe database, Material database, Insulation database, Fiberglass or FRP database, Valve database, Flange database, Pressure Relief Valve database, Structural Steel database. In addition when the User specifies a valve type, then this selection should be carried forward for all the subsequent valves, unless the User enters a different valve type. Inlet Nominal: 1-1/2 inch (example) Exit Nominal Diameter: 1-1/2 inch (example) Orifice Area: 0.50 in^2 (example) Pressure: 150 lbs (example) Pressure (possible choices) 150, 300, 600, 1500, 2500, 3705, 5000 Manufacturer: Flanged AAAT Std. PRV Flanged Crosby PRV Threaded Crosby PRV Welded AAAT PRV Type: Flanged PPV Threaded PPV Welded PPV Insulation Factor: 3.5 inch (example) Valve Height: 3 ft (example) Inlet To: 0.75 ft (example) Mid To: 0.75 ft (example) Valve (weight): 45 lbs. (example) Weight: Very Important. You need the weight for a pressure relief Valve. If you do not have this information, then this is where you add the weight of the particular pressure relief Valve you need to use in the analysis.


477

Query Database Button: When pressed this will tell you if there is such a record in the PRV Valve Database. If there is NOT then you will see the following message. “There is no such record in PRV database!” New, Delete, Save Buttons: New starts a NEW valve. Delete will DELETE a particular valve. Save will SAVE what you have done. Whether it was a new addition or a deletion.


478

3.7.5 Structural Steel Data Base (Joint)

Figure3.7.5-1 Structural Steel Database, User Defined The basic function of this database dialog box is to allow the User to Input, Edit and Catalog User Defined Custom Structural Shapes and Browse to his Input after choosing a specific structural steel shape.

Note: Like all databases within TRILFEX, TRIFLEX’s Structural Steel Database should not be changed by the User due to the risk of potential loss of valuable information.



479

Designation: The Structural Item. Moment of Inertia about B (axis) (in4) Moment of inertia about the B axis. IB (in4) Structural Steel Handbook Moment of Inertia about B Moment of Inertia about C (axis) (in4) Moment of inertia about the C axis. IC (in4) Structural Steel Handbook Moment of Inertia about C Torsion Const., K: (in4) Structural Steel Handbook, Torsional Constant, K Distance from centroid to the Structural Steel Handbook, extreme fiber along the B axis. Distance from centroid to extreme fiber along CB: (in) the B-axis. Distance from centroid to the Structural Steel Handbook, extreme fiber along the C axis. Distance from centroid to extreme fiber along CC: (in) the C-axis. Cross Sectional Area. Cross Sectional Area A: (in2) New, Delete, Save Buttons: New Item to add to the Database Delete the Item shown from the Database Save the Item shown to the Database


480

The following steps are used to create a NEW structural steel profile

1. Select Structural Steel

Figure 3.7.5-2 Structural Steel Database

2. Select NEW after dialog comes up.


1. Utilities

2. Database

3. Structural Steel


481

3. Input the shape or profile of the NEW structural Shape


The Graph below shows you the proper way to define the shape.


Note: The points to define your shape must be Input in counter clockwise order or CCW.

B axis

C axis 2 3

1 4

Note: the points to define your shape must be Input in counter clockwise order or CCW.


482

4. Once the shape is defined TRIFLEX will fill in the values for you.


5. When the User wishes to input his newly created profile or shape. Then when you begin with the Joint Data Tab the User must select “User Defined” as shown.


Note: Care must be taken to correctly input the Torsional Constant, K. Here we have a temporary incorrect value of “0 or 1”.

User to Calculate.


483

6. Select his newly created profile or shape by selecting “his description” in this case New shape No 1, which is found under the “Designation” box in the Joint Data Tab as shown.


7. The profile or shape can now be seen in TRIFLEX.


Note: that the Mirror C axis was checked in this example. Therefore allowing the user to see his shape exactly as Input.


484

8. Below is an Isometric view of the New Shape.


The profile or shape can now be seen in TRIFLEX.

Note: that the Mirror C axis was checked in this example. Therefore allowing the user to see his shape exactly as Input.


485

3.7.6 Pipe Material Database

Figure 3.7.6-1 Material Database

The basic function of this database dialog box is to show all the materials that are listed in the Material combo-box. The left side shows general data and the right side shows properties’ values at different temperatures. These values are to be used for calculation purposes in TRIFLEX.

Note: Like all databases within TRILFEX, TRIFLEX’s Material Database should not be changed by the User due to the risk of potential loss of valuable information.



486

Material: {Enter Text} Material Code: {Enter Text} Description: {Enter Text} Density: {Enter Text} Insert/Delete Row Buttons: {Enter Text} New, Delete, Save Buttons: {Enter Text}


487

3.7.7 Insulation Database

Figure 3.7.7-1 Insulation Database The basic function of this database dialog box is to allow the User to browse through all insulation material records stored in the TRIFLEX database. The density and thermal conductivities are shown for each material and the User is allowed to input his/her own data into the database.

Note: Like all databases within TRILFEX, TRIFLEX’s Insulation Database should not be changed by the User due to the risk of potential loss of valuable information.

Other databases within TRIFLEX include: Pipe database, Material database, Insulation database, Fiberglass or FRP database, Valve database, Flange database, Pressure Relief Valve database, Structural Steel database. Material: {Enter Text} Density: {Enter Text} New, Delete, Save Buttons: {Enter Text}


488

3.7.8 Fiberglass Pipe Material

Figure 3.7.8-1 Fiberglass Pipe Material Database The basic function of this database dialog box is to allow the User to browse through all insulation material records stored in the TRIFLEX database. The density and thermal conductivities are shown for each material and the User is allowed to input his/her own data into the database.

Note: Like all databases within TRILFEX, TRIFLEX’s Insulation Database should not be changed by the User due to the risk of potential loss of valuable information.



489

Material: Centricast EP 1.5” – 14” Centricast RB – 2530 1” Centricast RB – 2530 1.5” – 4” Centricast RB – 2530 6” – 14” F - Chem 100 Mil 14” – 72” Description: (example) Centricast RB – 2530 1” Density: (example) 0.067 lbs/in^3 Insert/Delete Row: Inserting a row in the table shown. Deleting a row in the table shown New, Delete, Save Buttons: New Item for this database Delete an item shown from the database Save the item shown in the database


490

3.8 Graphic Manipulation

Practice with your mouse in TRIFLEX’s graphic mode and use all the different commands given in Appendix A, “TRIFLEX Windows Command and Shortcut Keys”. See Appendix A at the end of this Chapter.


491

3.9 Run TRIFLEX

Refer to Chapter Two and view Tutorial. The Tutorial covers running TRIFLEX step by step.

A quick review is covered here.

To process a TRIFLEXWindows analysis of the piping system you just entered, click on the Green Arrow icon in the Main Menu or from the Setup menu, select the Basic option as shown in Figure 3.9.0-1.

Figure 3.9.0-1 Main Screen, Calculate Pull-Down Menu


492

Figure 3.9.0-2 Main Screen, Calculation Ready/Stop Icon

Figure 3.9.0-3 Main Screen, Calculation Complete

Note: A case number must be filled in before TRIFLEX Windows will perform the stress calculations.


493

Once TRIFLEX has been instructed to process the analysis, the program will begin executing the stress calculations. The status of the calculations will be displayed in the TRIFLEXWindows screen.

While the calculation is in progress, the Calculation Ready/Stop Icon will be displayed as a red stop sign as shown in Figure 3.9.0-2. To stop the calculation process, click the Calculation Ready/Stop Icon and the calculations will be immediately aborted.

Upon completion of the calculation process, the Calculation Ready/Stop Icon will be returned to the green arrow ready state as shown in Figure 3.9.0-3.


494

3.9.1 View Run Output

Figure 3.9.1-1 Output Pull-Down Menus

To view the results of the stress calculations in spreadsheet format, do the following: From the Output Pull Down menu, select View Results. See Figure 3.9.1-1 for this menu. The TRIFLEXWindows calculation results will be displayed as shown in Figure 3.9.1-2

Figure 3.9.1-2 Output Report, View results


495

To view Code Compliance Report

1. Select the Load Case that you wish to view using the Load Case pull down menu as shown in Figure 3.9.1-2 as 1:THERM+PRESS+WT.

2. Select the report that you wish to view using the Type Report Selector pull down menu as shown in Figure 3.9.1-3.

Figure 3.9.1-3 Output Report, Type Report Selector


496

3. From the Output Pull Down menu, select Piping Code Report similar to that shown in Figure 3.9.1-1. The TRIFLEXWindows calculation results will be displayed as shown in Figure 3.9.1-4.

Figure 3.9.1-4 Output Code Compliance Report

To view the piping model output graphically,

4. Click on the Output Display icon in the Main Menu Bar as shown in Figure 3.9.1-5 or, from the Output Pull Down menu, select Output Graphic Display similar to that shown in Figure 3.9.1-1. An Output display screen will appear in the middle of the screen.


497

Figure 3.9.1-5 Output Display Icon

5. In the Output Display screen, click on the Display Pull Down menu as shown in Figure 3.9.1-6 to select the calculated output data that you wish to view.

6. If you select deflections, rotations, forces or moments, you must then select the Line of Action that you wish. Under Line of Action, TRIFLEX will default to Resultant values unless you specify another category. Then click OK.

If you select any of the stresses calculated by TRIFLEX, then you must select either Absolute Value or Sign (+/-) from the Stress Display group. Under the Stress Display group, TRIFLEX will default to Absolute values unless you specify Sign (+/-). Then click OK.

Note: If your piping model does not appear on the screen at this point, then press Control + Tab to toggle between all screens available describing the piping system. Stop when you see the piping model. Alternatively, you can click on the Spreadsheet Icon to toggle between the spreadsheet view and the graphical piping model.


498

Figure 3.9.1-6 Output Display Dialog

Figure 3.9.1-7 Output Display Deformed Graphics

ü

To view the piping model with a superimposed deformed shape,

7. In the Output Display screen shown in Figure 3.9.1-7, click on the Display Pull Down menu and select Deflection.

8. Then on the Output Display screen, click on the check box for Show Center Line Deviation and enter a number in the Scale field indicating the multiplier factor to be applied to the deflection shown on the model. Then click OK. A


499

screen showing the deformed piping model will then appear as shown in Figure 3.9.1-7.


500

3.10 Printing

3.10.1 Output & View Analysis Results

The User can view and print the ANSI/ASME Code Compliance Report in different ways.

The following is the list of ways the user can view and print the Report:

• Full Report • Center of Gravity • Piping System Geometry • Piping System Properties • Piping System Weights • Anchor Description • Anchor Initial Movements, Translation and Rotation • Restraint Description • Piping System Movements • Local Movements • Anchor Movements • Restraint Movements • Local Forces and Moments • System Forces and Moments • Anchor Forces and Moments • Restraint Forces and Moments • System Stresses - this Load Case • Maximum System Value

The Load Cases are viewed in the pull down box and each different load case can be viewed and printed by the different ways mentioned above.


501

3.10.1.1 Printing Output Reports (as SpreadSheet) TRIFLEXWindows has also created a facility to view and Print Out Reports using Spreadsheet format. The most important spreadsheet to print out is the Piping Code Report. Follow the screens below to view the Piping Code Report, Full Report.

Figure 3.10.1.1-1 Output, View Analysis Results

Figure 3.10.1.1-2 View, Full Report


502

Figure 3.10.1.1-3 File, Print

Figure 3.10.1.1-4 Print, Full Report


503

Below is the “Print Options” dialog screen within TRIFLEX.

In Figure 3.10.1.1-5, we see that TRIFLEX will print out the spreadsheet by the Print Order that the User has specified. Shown is the “Over then down” approach to printing out the spreadsheet. This is a common approach which is normally used by Excel to print out an Excel spreadsheet. The dialog box explains itself.

Figure 3.10.1.1-5 Print, print Options

Figure 3.10.1.1-6 Print, Printer Selection


504

3.10.2 Piping Code Report

Figure 3.10.2-1 Piping Code Report

The previous section discussed the approach to printout a spreadsheet type of report.

When working with the Piping Code Report as shown in Figure 3.10.2-1 the user can eliminate a lot of paper output and go right to the most important line items by Double-Clicking on the top of the column he wants to have the result for.

This will sort the column by lowest to highest values. Placing the lowest value on the top of the column.

Then Double-Clicking on the column marked “Sustained Stress Actual” once again will sort the column by highest to lowest values. Placing the highest value on the top of the column.

With this approach the User can immediately see the highest value of that chosen column. In this case the highest value of the “Sustained Stress Actual”.

By doing this the user will see any values which have been yellow highlighted by TRIFLEX to indicate that they are OVERSTRESSED.

The user may only want to Print Out that line or a group of lines.


505

3.10.3 Spring Hanger Report

Figure 3.10.3-1 Spring Hanger Report

This report is Vidal when ordering the spring from a spring hanger manufacturer.

AAA Technology for example would receive the spring hanger report with great interest since it gives the information required to build the spring, which will satisfy your Pipe Stress Analysis and satisfy the piping system requirements.

Refer to AAA technology’s catalog on Springs for more information, or go to AAA Technology’s web site. Section 3.1.2.7.8 will show you how to connect to the web site.

Then “File”, “Print” will print out this Report.


506

3.10.4 Color Mapped Graphic Display

When a User wishes to print out many different Parameters in a Graphics format from his piping system. The User goes to Output, then to Color Mapped Graphic Display.

The dialog screen shown in Figure 3.10.4-1 gives the user many choices to show graphically. Input Parameters, Calculation Results, Piping Code Results all can be displayed graphically. Figure 3.10.4-1 shows that the User wishes to display the Deflection which is from the Calculation Results (Note Tab).

Figure 3.10.4-1 Graphics Display Control

When ready with your choices on the dialog and clicking OK, then the graphic display will show your requested information. Figure 3.10.4-2 shows the deflected shape of the piping system. Note that the “Show Center Line Deviation” box was checked. This shows the centerline of the piping system and shows it in the deflected shape.

Graphic Display Control Tabs

Input Parameters Calculation Results

Piping Code Results

(B31.3 example)

Base Temperature

Deflection

(show centerline)

Wall Thickness Design

Pressure Rotation

Wall Thickness Required


507

Temperature Force

Sustained Stress Actual


Moment

Sustained Stress Allowed


Longitudinal Stress

(NON-CODE)

Sustained Stress Percent

Shear Stress

(NON-CODE)

Expansion Stress Actual

Principal Stress

(NON-CODE)

Expansion Stress Allowed

Octahedral Stress

(NON-CODE)

Expansion Stress Percent

Bending Stress

(NON-CODE)

Data Sequence

Torsional Stress

(NON-CODE)

Hoop Stress

(NON-CODE)

Expansion Stress

(NON-CODE)


508

Figure 3.10.4-2 Graphics Display

After viewing your deflected shape output and are ready to continue with the printout of your system. Go to Output and click on “Show Color Scale” and a scale with the correct parameters will be added to the display screen. See Figure 3.10.4-3 to view “Show Color Scale” with the deflected system.

Figure 3.10.4-3 Graphics Display with Show Color Scale

Then “File”, “Print” will bring up the Graphics Output Print Setup dialog box shown in Figure 3.10.4-4.


509

Figure 3.10.4-4 Graphics Output Print Setup

Before saying OK and receiving your printout check the box on the right which says “Print Color Scale” and the Color Scale will be printed with your Printout.

Note that the box below the “Print Color Scale” has different options as to were to place your color scale in the print out.

Also the final printout will have your “Project” information in the bottom right hand corner on the printout.

Note: The box called “Additional Report Information” is a good place to add the date of this particular printout. Dates and times can be used to better interface with project personnel during conference room meetings.


510

3.10.4.2 Printing Graphics Output

3.10.4.2.1 Printer

Figure 3.10.4.2.1-1 Printer Setup

Printer

Name Tektronix Phaser 860DP by Xerox

Status Ready

Type Tektronix Phaser 860DP by Xerox

Where USB001

Paper Letter

Size 8-1/2 x 11

Source Specifies where the paper you want to use is located in the printer.

Orientation Portrait or Landscape Properties Allows the user to select specific features about the existing printer selected.


511

3.10.4.2.2 Graphics Output Print Setup

Dialog is displayed following the print dialog.

Figure 3.10.4.2.2-1 Graphics Output Print Setup

Information

Gives information of your previous printing selections, and questions upon the number of pages the item to be printed should take up.

Resolution

Allows user to set the resolution of the item to be printed on a scale from default to very high resolution. Caution: the higher the resolution, the more memory is required, the slower your PC will operate.

Width (in Pages)

Allows the User to decide upon how many page widths (this is set at 8-1/2” x 11”) should be printed.

Height (in Pages)

Allows the User to decide upon how many page heights (this is set at 8-1/” x 11”) should be printed.


512

Note: Changing Width and Height pages becomes useful when trying to create a larger output for Project Conference Reviews.

Additional Report Information

Allows the User to input any further information that will be displayed on the printed copy. Here you can put the date and time of the printout. This is very useful when working within project organizations.

Margins

Allows the user to decide between a cutting margin or a page margin.

Report

Gives the user the option of inserting a color scale in their specified location on the printed copy.

See Graphics Output Print Setup Dialogue


513

3.10.5 Preview Reports

From the Output Pull Down menu, select Preview Report or Print Report similar to that shown in Figure 3.10.5-1. The Report Print (Print Static / Dynamic Reports) screen will then appear.

Figure 3.10.5-1 Print Report

1. In Print Report or Preview Report screen, select the Load Cases and the reports from the Available Report group by placing a check in the box adjacent to each desired report as shown in Figure 3.10.5-1.

2. A Preview Report sample screen is shown in Figure 3.10.5-2

Note: The above procedure will produce Preformatted Output Reports. These reports are the same reports produced in TRIFLEX DOS.


514

Figure 3.10.5-2 Report Print Menu

After viewing CLOSE the viewing window to return to the model.

To exit TRIFLEX®Windows, click EXIT under FILE.

To EXIT from the File Pull Down menu, select Save As similar to the procedure used in most Windows programs.


515

3.10.6 Print Reports

To print output reports, click on Output on the Main Menu and then click on Print Reports on the Pull down Menu. The screen in Figure 3.10.3.2-1 will appear.

Figure 3.10.6-1 Printing Options

Select the desired load cases and check the reports you wish to review and click the OK button. TRIFLEX will then give you an opportunity to select the printer and printing options as shown in Figure 3.10.6-2 and will then print the reports for you.


516

Figure 3.10.6-2 Printing Options

The Print Setup (shown in Figure 3.10.6-2) dialog has been previously discussed under section 3.10.4.2.1

Note: If an “NT” Operating system is employed; the User must assign a local Printer to the Print device.


517


518

APPENDIX A- TRIFLEX Windows Command and Shortcut Keys

(Graphics Window)

COMMANDS SHORTCUTS

Function Keys

• Help Topics F1

• (not active) F2

• (not active) F3

• Worksheet Toggle F4

• Start Calculation F5

• (not active currently) F6

• Preview Report F7

• Print Report F8

• Edit Current Component F9

• Find Next Component F10

• Find Previous Component F11

• (not active currently) F12

COMMANDS SHORTCUTS

Movement Keys

• Move to End END

• Move to First Component HOME

• Move to Next Component F10

• Move to Previous Component F11


519

COMMANDS SHORTCUTS

Control Keys

• Delete DEL

• Insert INS

• New CTRL + N

• Open CTRL + O

• Copy CTRL + C

• Cut CTRL + X

• Paste CTRL + V

• Print CTRL + P

• Save CTRL + S

• Undo CTRL + Z

• Redo CTRL + Y


520

COMMANDS SHORTCUTS

Control Keys

• Bring up “Start” CTRL + ESC

• Full Screen Capture to Clipboard PRT SCREEN

• Current Window Capture to Clipboard ALT + PRT SCREEN

• Change pointer/manipulator ESC

• Change pointer to manipulator ALT + SHIFT

• Change to manipulator (temporary) ALT

• Moves to next available window ALT + ESC

• Moves Entire model considered SPAN SHIFT+ Hand (click Arrow)

• Graphic “Hand Mode” Right Click + Hold Down

Middle Wheel of Mouse

• Next (toggle between graphics CTRL + F6

& Spreadsheet input)

• Toggle through all available windows ALT + TAB

• Renumber Selection (must be selected first) CTRL + R

• Find Node CTRL + F

• Select Current Branch CTRL + B

• Deselect Current Branch Shift + CTRL + B

• Select All CTRL + A

• Deselect All Shift + CTRL + A

• Zoom (with Graphic “Hand Mode”) Left Click + Hold Down

Middle Wheel of Mouse

• Pan Shift + Left Click on Object

chapter 3

Documents

anchor component

coding flange data

coding elbow data

coding piping data

coding reducer data

coding valve data

component sub menu

coding joint data tab